PCS-915IC

PCS-915IC
Centralized Busbar Relay

Instruction Manual
NR Electric Co., Ltd.
Preface
Preface
1.1 Introduction
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.
Documentation for equipment ordered from NR is dispatched separately from manufactured goods
and may not be received at the same time. Therefore, this guide is provided to ensure that printed
information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of
this manual, and read relevant chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
1.2 Health and Safety

The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason, only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;
Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;
Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;
Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
1.3 Instructions and Warnings

The following indicators and standard definitions are used:
PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay
i
Date: 2015-07-13
Preface
DANGER! means that death, severe personal injury and considerable equipment damage
will occur if safety precautions are disregarded.
WARNING! means that death, severe personal and considerable equipment damage
could occur if safety precautions are disregarded.
CAUTION! means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
NOTICE! is particularly applies to damage to device and to resulting damage of the protected
equipment.
DANGER!
NEVER allow a open current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
device while the primary system is live. Open CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage that cause death.
WARNING!
ONLY qualified personnel should work on or in the vicinity of this device. This personnel
MUST be familiar with all safety regulations and service procedures described in this
manual. During operating of electrical device, certain part of the device is under high
voltage. Severe personal injury and significant device damage could result from
improper behavior.
WARNING!
Do NOT touch the exposed terminals of this device while the power supply is on. The
generated high voltage causes death, injury, and device damage.
WARNING!
Thirty seconds is NECESSARY for discharging the voltage. Hazardous voltage can be
present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply.
CAUTION!
Earthing
Securely earthed the earthing terminal of the device.
Operating environment
ONLY use the device within the range of ambient environment and in an
environment free of abnormal vibration.
ii

Date: 2015-07-13
Preface
Ratings
Check the input ratings BEFORE applying AC voltage/current and power supply to
the device.
Printed circuit board
Do NOT attach or remove printed circuit board if the device is powered on.
External circuit
Check the supply voltage used when connecting the device output contacts to
external circuits, in order to prevent overheating.
Connection cable
Carefully handle connection cables without applying excessive force.
NOTICE!
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing
features, please MAKE SURE that the version of this manual is compatible with the
product in your hand.
Copyright 2015 NR. All rights reserved.

We reserve all rights to this document and to the information contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and dissemination
to third parties is strictly forbidden except where expressly authorized.
The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated.
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.
NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Tel: +86-25-87178888
Headquarters: 69, Suyuan Avenue, Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China
Fax: +86-25-87178999
Manufactory: 18, Xinfeng Road, Jiangning, Nanjing 211111, China
Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nrec.com
PN: ZL_PCS-915IC_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X
Version: R2.13
iii
Date: 2015-07-13
Preface
Documentation Structure
The manual provides a functional and technical description of this relay and a comprehensive set
of instructions for the relays use and application.
All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:
1 Introduction
Briefly introduce the application, functions and features about this relay.
2 Technical Data
Introduce the technical data about this relay, such as electrical specifications, mechanical
specifications, ambient temperature and humidity range, communication port parameters, type
tests, setting ranges and accuracy limits and the certifications that our products have passed.
3 Operation Theory
Introduce a comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protective elements.
4 Supervision
Introduce the automatic self-supervision function of this relay.
5 Measurement and Recording

Introduce the management function (measurment and recording) of this relay.
6 Hardware
Introduce the main function carried out by each plug-in module of this relay and providing the
definition of pins of each plug-in module, typical wiring is provided.
7 Settings
List settings including system settings, communication settings, label settings, logic links and etc.,
and some notes about the setting application.
8 Human Machine Interface

Introduce the hardware of the human machine interface (HMI) module and a detailed guide for the
user how to use this relay through HMI. It also lists all the information which can be view through
HMI, such as settings, measurements, all kinds of reports etc.
9 Configurable Function
Introduce how to make function configuration, binary input configuration, binary output
configuration and LED indicator configuration etc. through PCS-Explorer software.
10 Communication
Introduce the communication port and protocol which this relay can support, IEC60970-5-103,
IEC61850 and DNP3.0 protocols are introduced in details.
iv

Date: 2015-07-13
Preface
11 Installation
Introduce the recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of this relay. A
guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of this relay is also provided, incorporating
earthing recommendations. A typical wiring connection to this relay is indicated.
12 Commissioning
Introduce how to commission this relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of
this relay.
13 Maintenance
A general maintenance policy for this relay is outlined.
14 Decommissioning and Disposal

A general decommissioning and disposal policy for this relay is outlined.
15 Manual Version History

List the instruction manual version and the modification history records.
Typographic and Graphical Conventions

Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously
derived from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
&
AND gate
OR gate
Comparator
Binary signal via opto-coupler
BI
SET
I>
Input signal from comparator with setting
EN
Input signal of logic setting for function enabling
SIG
Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler
v
Date: 2015-07-13
Preface
OTH
Input of other signal
XXX
Output signal
Timer
t
Time (optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristic)
t
10ms
2ms
[XXX]
0ms
Timer (delay pickup, settable)
0ms
[XXX]
Timer (delay dropoff, settable)
[XXX]
[XXX]
Timer (delay pickup, delay dropoff, settable)
Timer [delay pickup (10ms), delay dropoff (2ms), non-settable]
IDMT
Timer (inverse-time characteristic)
---xxx is the symbol
Symbol Corresponding Relationship

Basic
Example
A, B, C
L1, L2, L3
Ia, Ib, Ic, I0
IL1, IL2, IL3, IN
AN, BN, CN
L1N, L2N, L3N
Ua, Ub, Uc
VL1, VL2, VL3
ABC
L123
Uab, Ubc, Uca
VL12, VL23, VL31
U (voltage)
U0, U1, U2
VN, V1, V2
vi

Date: 2015-07-13
1 Introduction
1 Introduction
Table of Contents
1 Introduction ....................................................................................... 1-a
1.1 Application....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Function ........................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Feature ............................................................................................................. 1-2
1.4 Abbreviation .................................................................................................... 1-4
1-a
Date: 2013-12-13
1 Introduction
1-b
Date: 2013-12-13
1 Introduction
1.1 Application
PCS-915IC is a numerical busbar differential protection intended to be used for protecting and
monitoring various busbar arrangement of various voltage levels. It is capable to protect up to 25
bays including bus coupler/section.
PCS-915IC utilizes NRs innovative hardware platform which supports both conventional CT/VT
and electronic current and voltage transformer (ECVT). It is compliant to several communication
protocols, such as IEC60870-5-103, IEC61850, DNP3.0 and Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP).
The maximized functions are introduced in this manual, for a specific project, some functions
maybe not configured or disabled according to users requirement.
NOTICE!
The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings
and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the
corresponding label settings.
In this instruction manual, @BBx is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding
busbar and @Bayn is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay. For a bus
coupler bay, @BCy is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus
coupler. For a bus section bay, @BSz is also used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus section.
For example, the tripping signal of ground overcurrent protection of bay 02 can be
described as @Bay02.50/51G.Op_Trp, if the label setting of bay 02 i.e. [Name_Bay02]
is set as Fdr01, the displayed tripping signal of ground overcurrent protection of bay
02 is [Fdr01.50/51G.Op_Trp]. If [Name_Bay02] is set as BC1, the displayed tripping
signal of ground overcurrent protection of bay 02 is [BC1.50/51G.Op_Trp]. Please refer
to Section Label Settings in Chapter 7 for details.
1.2 Function
PCS-915IC provides the following functions
1.
Protection function
Busbar differential protection (87B)
Steady-state percentage restraint differential protection
DPFC percentage restraint differential protection
Bus coupler protection
Breaker failure protection (50BF)
Dead zone fault protection (50DZ)
1-1
Date: 2013-12-13
1 Introduction
Pole disagreement protection (62PD)
Switch-onto-fault protection (50SOTF)
Overcurrent protection (50/51)
Feeder protection
Breaker failure protection (50BF)
Dead zone fault protection (50DZ)
Pole disagreement protection (62PD)
Overcurrent protection (50/51)
NOTICE!
DPFC is the abbreviation of deviation of power frequency component. When a fault
occurs in the power system, the fault current consists of three parts: the pre-fault power
frequency components, the power frequency variables during the fault and the transient
variables during the fault. DPFC is the power frequency variables during the fault.
2.
Auxiliary function
Dynamic busbar replica
CT circuit supervision
VT circuit supervision
Disconnector position alarm
1.3 Feature
1.
Protection and Control
Parallel calculation of double DSP system
Independent fault detector element
Accurate measurement which can prevent any undesired trip
Less than 20ms typical trip time for busbar differential protection
High sensitive percentage restraint differential protection
Matching to different CT ratios
A well proven adaptive weighted anti-saturation algorithm
Comprehensive event recorder
Language switchoverEnglish+ selected language
1-2
Date: 2013-12-13
1 Introduction
2.
Four kinds of clock synchronization methods
Conventional
PPS (RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level
IRIG-B (RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level
PPM (DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the optical coupler
PPS (DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the optical coupler
SAS
SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point-to-point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network
SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network
Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol
Advanced
IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588
IRIG-B (Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface
PPS (Fiber): Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface
No clock syncronization
3.
Event recorder and disturbance recorder
1024 latest fault reports
1024 latest self-supervision reports
1024 latest status change of binary input reports
32 latest fault waveforms (The file format of disturbance recorder is compatible with the
international COMTRADE file)
4.
Communication
Optional 2 RS-485 communication rear ports conform to IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
1 RS-485 communication rear ports for clock synchronization
Optional 2 or 4 Ethernet ports (depend on the chosen type of MON plug-in module) conform
to IEC 61850 protocol, DNP3.0 protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol over TCP/IP
Optional 2 Ethernet ports via optic fiber (ST interface) conform to IEC 61850 protocol, DNP3.0
protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol over TCP/IP
Optional additional module that supports PRP.
GOOSE and SV communication function (optional NET-DSP plug-in module)
1-3
Date: 2013-12-13
1 Introduction
5.
User Interface
Friendly HMI interface with LCD and 9-button keypad on the front panel.
1 RS-232 rear port for printer
1 front multiplex RJ45 port for testing and setting
Language switchoverEnglish+ selected language
Auxiliary softwarePCS-Explorer
1.4 Abbreviation
Symbol
Description
FD
Fault detector
BBx
Busbar No.x, x is the number of each busbar
BCy
Bus coupler No.y, y is the number of each bus coupler
BSz
Bus section No.z, z is the number of each bus section
feeder m
Feeder No.m, m is the number of each feeder
bay n
Bay No.n (includes each BC/BS and each feeder), n is the number of each bay
VCE
Voltage controlled element
BBP
Busbar differential protection
BFP
Breaker failure protection
BFI
Breaker failure initiation
DZP
Dead zone fault protection
PD
Pole disagreement protection
IDMT
Inverse Definite Minimum Time
SAS
Substation automatic system
RTU
Remote terminal unit
DPFC
Deviation of power frequency component
CT
Current transformer
VT
Voltage transformer
SV
Sampled value
1-4
Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
Table of Contents
2 Technical Data ................................................................................... 2-a
2.1 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 Alternating Analog Current ................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Alternating Analog Voltage ................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.3 Power Supply ....................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.4 Binary Input .......................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.5 Binary Output ....................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Mechanical Specifications.............................................................................. 2-3

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range .................................................. 2-3
2.4 Communication Port ....................................................................................... 2-3
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.4.2 Ethernet Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port ................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4.4 Print Port .............................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port ................................................................................................. 2-5
2.5 Type Tests ........................................................................................................ 2-5

2.5.1 Environmental Tests............................................................................................................. 2-5
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.5.3 Electrical Tests ..................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................................................................................. 2-5
2.6 Certifications ................................................................................................... 2-6

2.7 Protective Functions....................................................................................... 2-6
2.7.1 Busbar Differential Protection .............................................................................................. 2-7
2.7.2 Switch-onto-fault Protection................................................................................................. 2-7
2.7.3 Overcurrent Protection......................................................................................................... 2-7
2-a
Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
2.7.4 Pole Disagreement Protection ............................................................................................. 2-7

2.7.5 Bus Coupler Breaker Failure Protection .............................................................................. 2-7
2.7.6 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection ...................................................................................... 2-7
2-b
Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
2.1 Electrical Specifications

2.1.1 Alternating Analog Current
Phase rotation
ABC
Nominal frequency (fn)
50Hz, 60Hz
Rated current (In)
1A
Linear to
0.05In~40In
5A
Thermal withstand
-continuously
4In
-for 10s
30In
-for 1s
100In
-for half a cycle
250In
Burden
< 0.15VA/phase @In
Accuracy
0.5%In
< 0.25VA/phase @In
2.1.2 Alternating Analog Voltage

Phase rotation
ABC
Nominal frequency (fn)
50Hz, 60Hz
Rated voltage (Un)
100V~130V
Linear to
1V~170V
Thermal withstand
-continuously
200V
-10s
260V
-1s
300V
Burden at rated
< 0.20VA/phase @Un
Accuracy
0.5%Un
2.1.3 Power Supply

Standard
IEC 60255-11:2008
Rated voltage
110Vdc/125Vdc/220Vdc/250Vdc
Permissible voltage range
88~300Vdc
Permissible AC ripple voltage
15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage
Burden
Quiescent condition
<40W
Operating condition
<60W
2.1.4 Binary Input

Rated voltage
24Vdc
48Vdc
Rated current drain
1.2mA
2.4mA
On value
16.8-28.8Vdc
33.6-57.6Vdc
Off value
<12Vdc
<24Vdc
2-1
Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
Maximum permissible voltage
100Vdc
Withstand voltage
2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously)
Response time for logic input
1ms
Rated voltage
110Vdc
125Vdc
220Vdc
250Vdc
Rated current drain
1.1mA
1.25mA
2.2mA
2.5mA
On value
77-132Vdc
87.5-150Vdc
154-264Vdc
175-300Vdc
Off value
<55Vdc
<62.5Vdc
<110Vdc
<125Vdc
Maximum permissible voltage
300Vdc
Withstand voltage
2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously)
Response time for logic input
1ms
2.1.5 Binary Output

1.
Tripping/signaling contact
Output mode
Potential free contact
Maximal system voltage
380Vac, 250Vdc
Continuous carry
8A
Pickup time (Typical)
<8ms (3ms)
Dropoff time
<5ms
0.65A@48Vdc
0.35A@110Vdc
Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms)
0.30A@125Vdc
0.20A@220Vdc
0.15A@250Vdc
12A@3s
Short duration current
18A@1s
24A@0.5s
40A@0.2s
Durability (Loaded contact)
10000 operations
Number
Maximum 55
2.
Signaling contact
Output mode
Maximal system voltage
380Vac, 250Vdc
380Vac, 250Vdc
Continuous carry
8A
8A
Pickup time
<10ms
<10ms
Dropoff time
<6ms
<10ms
0.7A@48Vdc
1.00A@48Vdc
0.4A@110Vdc
0.50A@110Vdc
0.3A@125Vdc
0.40A@125Vdc
0.2A@220Vdc
0.25A@220Vdc
0.15A@250Vdc
0.20A@250Vdc
12A@3s
12A@3s
Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms)
Short duration current
2-2
Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
15A@1s
15A@1s
20A@0.5s
20A@0.5s
30A@0.2s
30A@0.2s
Durability (Loaded contact)
10000 operations
10000 operations
Number
Maximum 8
Maximum 3
2.2 Mechanical Specifications

Mounting Way
Flush mounted
Housing color
Silver grey
Weight per device
Approx. 35kg (8U chassis)

Approx. 10kg (4U extended chassis)
Housing material
Aluminum
Location of terminal
Rear panel of the device
Device structure
Plug-in modular type @ rear side, integrated frontplate
Protection class
Standard
IEC 60225-1:2009
Front side
IP40
Other sides
IP30
Rear side, connection terminals
IP20
2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range

Standard
IEC 60225-1:2009
Operating temperature
-40C to +70C (Readability of display may be impaired below -20C)
Transport and storage temperature

range
-40C to +70C
Permissible humidity
5%-95%, without condensation
Pollution degree
Altitude
<3000m
2.4 Communication Port

2.4.1 EIA-485 Port
Baud rate
4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103:1997
Maximal capacity
32
Transmission distance
<500m
Safety level
Isolation to ELV level
Twisted pair
Screened twisted pair cable
2-3
Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
2.4.2 Ethernet Port

Connector type
RJ-45
Transmission rate
100Mbits/s
Transmission standard
100Base-TX
<100m
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103:1997, DNP 3.0 or IEC 61850
Safety level
2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port

2.4.3.1 For Station Level
Characteristic
Glass optical fiber
Connector type
ST
Fibre type
Multi mode
<2km
Wave length
1310nm
Transmission power
Min. -20.0dBm
Minimum receiving power
Min. -30.0dBm
Margin
Min +3.0dB
2.4.3.2 For Process Level

Characteristic
Glass optical fiber
Connector type
LC
Fibre type
Multi mode
<2km
Wave length
1310nm
Transmission power
Min. -20.0dBm
Min. -30.0dBm
Margin
Min +3.0dB
2.4.3.3 For Synchronization Port

Characteristic
Glass optical fiber
Connector type
ST
Fibre type
Multi mode
Wave length
820nm
Min. -25.0dBm
Margin
Min +3.0dB
2.4.4 Print Port

Type
RS-232
Baud Rate
4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Printer type
EPSON 300K printer
Safety level
2-4
Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port

Type
RS-485
<500m
Maximal capacity
32
Timing standard
PPS, IRIG-B
Safety level
2.5 Type Tests

2.5.1 Environmental Tests
Dry cold test
IEC60068-2-1:2007
Dry heat test
IEC60068-2-2:2007
Damp heat test, cyclic
IEC60068-2-30:2005
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests

Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I
Shock and bump
IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I
2.5.3 Electrical Tests

Standard
IEC 60255-27:2005
Dielectric tests
Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min
Standard
IEC 60255-5:2000
Impulse voltage tests
Test voltage 5kV
Overvoltage category
Insulation
resistance
measurements
Isolation resistance >100M@500VDC
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility

IEC 60255-22-1:2007
1MHz burst disturbance test
Common mode: class III 2.5kV

Differential mode: class III 1.0kV
IEC60255-22-2:2008 class IV
Electrostatic discharge test
For contact discharge: 8kV

For air discharge: 15kV
IEC 60255-22-3:2007 class III
Frequency sweep
Radiated amplitude-modulated
Radio frequency interference tests
10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz

Spot frequency
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz
Radiated pulse-modulated
2-5
Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
10V/m (rms), f=900MHz
IEC 60255-22-4:2008
Fast transient disturbance tests
Power supply, I/O, Earth: class IV, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns

Communication terminals: class IV, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns
IEC 60255-22-5:2008
Surge immunity test
Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class IV, 1.2/50us

Common mode: 4kV
Differential mode: 2kV
Conducted
RF
Electromagnetic
Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-6:2001
Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class III, 10Vrms, 150
kHz~80MHz
Power Frequency Magnetic Field
IEC 61000-4-8:2001
Immunity
class V, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s
Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity
IEC 61000-4-9:2001
class V, 6.4/16s, 1000A/m for 3s
Damped oscillatory magnetic field
IEC 61000-4-10:2001
immunity
class V, 100kHz & 1MHz100A/m
Auxiliary power supply performance
IEC60255-11: 2008
- Voltage dips
Up to 500ms for dips to 40% of rated voltage without reset
-Voltage short interruptions
100ms for interruption without rebooting
2.6 Certifications
ISO9001:2008
ISO14001:2004
OHSAS18001:2007
ISO10012:2003
CMMI L5
EMC: 2004/108/EC, EN50263:1999
Products safety(PS): 2006/95/EC, EN61010-1:2001
2.7 Protective Functions

The meanings of symbols mentioned in the following sections are given here.
In -- rated secondary current of CT
Un -- rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT
2-6
Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
2.7.1 Busbar Differential Protection

Current setting range
0.05In~20.00In
Tolerance of current setting
2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater
Undervoltage setting range
0 ~Un
Residual voltage setting range
0 ~Un
Negative-sequence voltage setting range
0 ~Un
Accuracy of voltage setting
2.5% of setting or 0.01Un, whichever is greater
2.7.2 Switch-onto-fault Protection

0.05In~20.00In
2.7.3 Overcurrent Protection

0.05In~20.00In
Time setting range
0.00~10.00s
Tolerance of time setting
1%xSetting + 40ms
2.7.4 Pole Disagreement Protection

Residual current setting range
0.05In~20.00In
Negative-sequence current setting range
0.05In~20.00In
Time setting range
0.00~10.00s
1%xSetting + 40ms
2.7.5 Bus Coupler Breaker Failure Protection

0.05In~20.00In
Time setting range
0.00~10.00s
1%xSetting + 40ms
2.7.6 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection

Phase current setting range
0.05In~20.00In
Residual current setting range
0.05In~20.00In
Negative-sequence current setting range
0.05In~20.00In
Time setting range
0.00~10.00s
1%xSetting + 40ms
2-7
Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
Undervoltage setting range
0 ~Un
Zero-sequence voltage setting range
0 ~Un
Negative sequence voltage setting range
0 ~Un
Accuracy of voltage setting
2.5% of setting or 0.01Un, whichever is greater
2-8
Date: 2013-12-13
3 Operation Theory
3 Operation Theory
Table of Contents
3 Operation Theory .............................................................................. 3-a
3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Supported Busbar Arrangements .................................................................. 3-1
3.3 Market Ordering Table (MOT) Configuration ................................................. 3-7
3.4 Function Configuration ................................................................................ 3-10
3.5 Busbar Differential Protection ..................................................................... 3-13
3.5.1 Fault Detector (FD) Element.............................................................................................. 3-14
3.5.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-15
3.5.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-22
3.5.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-22
3.5.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-25
3.5.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-27
3.6 BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection ............................................................. 3-30

3.6.3 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-32
3.6.4 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.6.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-33
3.7 Feeder Dead Zone Fault Protection (DZP) .................................................. 3-34

3.7.1 Fault Detector Element ...................................................................................................... 3-34
3.7.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-35
3.7.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-36
3.7.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-37
3-a

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.8 BC/BS Switch-onto-fault (SOTF) Protection ............................................... 3-38

3.8.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-39
3.8.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-40
3.8.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-41
3.9 Overcurrent (OC) Protection ........................................................................ 3-42

3.9.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-44
3.9.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-46
3.9.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-46
3.10 Pole Disagreement (PD) Protection ........................................................... 3-51

3.10.1 Fault Detector Element .................................................................................................... 3-51
3.10.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-51
3.10.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-51
3.10.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-51
3.10.5 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-52
3.10.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-53
3.11 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection (BFP) ................................................... 3-54

3.11.3 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 3-56
3.11.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................. 3-56
3.11.5 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-57
3.11.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-58
3.12 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection (BFP) .................................................. 3-59

3-b

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

3.12.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-63
3.12.5 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-64
3.12.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-65
3.13 CT Circuit Supervision ............................................................................... 3-68

3.13.3 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-71
3.13.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-76
3.14 VT Circuit Supervision ................................................................................ 3-77

3.14.3 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-78
3.14.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-79
3.15 Position of Disconnector and Circuit Breaker .......................................... 3-79

3.15.2 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-81
3.15.3 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-84
3.15.4 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-86
3.16 BC/BS Breaker Substitution and Bypass Breaker Substitution.............. 3-86

3.16.2 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-90
3.17 GOOSE and SV Function ............................................................................ 3-90

3.17.1 The Effect of Data Abnormality ........................................................................................ 3-91
3.17.2 Out of Service of a Bay .................................................................................................... 3-91
3.17.3 Maintenance Binary Input ................................................................................................ 3-92
3.17.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-92
3.17.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-93
3-c

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
List of Figures
Figure 3.2-1 Single BB ................................................................................................................ 3-1
Figure 3.2-2 Single BB with one BS (single CT)....................................................................... 3-2
Figure 3.2-3 Single BB with one BS (dual CTs) ........................................................................ 3-2
Figure 3.2-4 Single BB with two BS (single CT) ....................................................................... 3-3
Figure 3.2-5 Single BB with two BS (dual CTs) ........................................................................ 3-3
Figure 3.2-6 Double BB with one BC (single CT) ..................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3.2-7 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) ...................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3.2-8 Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT) ............................ 3-5
Figure 3.2-9 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT).............................. 3-6
Figure 3.2-10 Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT) .......................... 3-7
Figure 3.2-11 Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs) ............................. 3-7
Figure 3.5-1 Sketch diagram of double busbars with one BC (single CT) arrangement ... 3-14
Figure 3.5-2 Operation characteristic of steady-state percentage restraint differential
element ................................................................................................................................ 3-16
Figure 3.5-3 Operation characteristic of DPFC percentage restraint differential element 3-18
Figure 3.5-4 Waveform of CT saturation during external fault ............................................. 3-21
Figure 3.5-5 Logic of busbar differential protection .............................................................. 3-23
Figure 3.5-6 Logic diagram of voltage controlled element ................................................... 3-25
Figure 3.6-1 Logic of BC/BS dead zone fault protection....................................................... 3-33
Figure 3.7-1 Logic of feeder dead zone fault protection ....................................................... 3-36
Figure 3.8-1 Logic of SOTF protection .................................................................................... 3-40
Figure 3.9-1 Logic of overcurrent protection ......................................................................... 3-45
Figure 3.10-1 Logic of pole disagreement protection ........................................................... 3-52
Figure 3.11-1 The logic scheme of BFI of BS ......................................................................... 3-55
Figure 3.11-2 Logic of BC/BS BFP ........................................................................................... 3-56
Figure 3.11-3 Logic of BS BFP (BS is at the edge of the protected zone) .......................... 3-57
Figure 3.12-1 Logic of feeder BFP ........................................................................................... 3-63
Figure 3.13-1 Logic of CT circuit failure.................................................................................. 3-71
3-d

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.13-2 Logic of BBx differential current low value alarm .......................................... 3-72
Figure 3.13-3 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available)
.............................................................................................................................................. 3-72
Figure 3.13-4 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available)
.............................................................................................................................................. 3-73
Figure 3.13-5 Logic of CT circuit abnormality ........................................................................ 3-74
Figure 3.13-6 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that only one CT is
available) ............................................................................................................................. 3-75
Figure 3.13-7 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that double CTs are
available) ............................................................................................................................. 3-76
Figure 3.14-1 Logic of VT circuit failure .................................................................................. 3-78
Figure 3.15-1 Logic of inter-connection mode alarm ............................................................ 3-81
Figure 3.15-2 Logic of disconnector position alarm ............................................................. 3-82
Figure 3.15-3 Logic of automatic correction of disconnector position ............................... 3-83
Figure 3.15-4 Logic of dual-position alarm............................................................................. 3-84
Figure 3.16-1 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB2 ....................................................... 3-88
Figure 3.16-2 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB1 ....................................................... 3-88
Figure 3.16-3 Bypass breaker substitution (the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the
inside of the transfer bus disconnector) ......................................................................... 3-89
Figure 3.16-4 Bypass breaker substitution (the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the
outside of the transfer bus disconnector)....................................................................... 3-90
List of Tables
Table 3.3-1 MOT configuration table in PCS-Explorer software ............................................. 3-8
Table 3.3-2 Contents of the option Software Version........................................................... 3-9
Table 3.4-1 Function configuration table in PCS-Explorer software.................................... 3-10
Table 3.5-1 Restraint coefficients of DPFC BBP .................................................................... 3-18
Table 3.5-2 Input signals of busbar differential protection ................................................... 3-25
Table 3.5-3 Output signals of busbar differential protection ................................................ 3-26
Table 3.5-4 Busbar differential protection settings ............................................................... 3-27
Table 3.5-5 Function links of busbar differential protection................................................. 3-30
Table 3.6-1 Input signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection ............................................ 3-33
3-e

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.6-2 Output signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection ......................................... 3-33
Table 3.6-3 BC dead zone fault protection settings ............................................................... 3-34
Table 3.7-1 Input signals of feeder dead zone fault protection ............................................ 3-36
Table 3.7-2 Output signals of feeder dead zone fault protection ......................................... 3-37
Table 3.7-3 Feeder dead zone fault protection settings ........................................................ 3-37
Table 3.7-4 Function links of feeder dead zone fault protection .......................................... 3-38
Table 3.8-1 Input signals of BC/BS SOTF protection............................................................. 3-40
Table 3.8-2 Output signals of BC/BS SOTF protection ......................................................... 3-41
Table 3.8-3 Switch-onto-fault protection settings .................................................................. 3-41
Table 3.8-4 Function links of BC/BS SOTF protection .......................................................... 3-42
Table 3.9-1 Input signals of overcurrent protection .............................................................. 3-46
Table 3.9-2 Output signals of overcurrent protection ........................................................... 3-46
Table 3.9-3 Overcurrent protection settings........................................................................... 3-46
Table 3.9-4 Function links of overcurrent protection ............................................................ 3-50
Table 3.10-1 Input signals of pole disagreement protection ................................................ 3-52
Table 3.10-2 Output signals of pole disagreement protection ............................................. 3-53
Table 3.10-3 PD protection settings ........................................................................................ 3-53
Table 3.10-4 Function links of pole disagreement protection .............................................. 3-54
Table 3.11-1 Input signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection ........................................... 3-57
Table 3.11-2 Output signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection ........................................ 3-58
Table 3.11-3 BC/BS breaker failure protection settings ........................................................ 3-58
Table 3.12-1 Input signals of feeder breaker failure protection............................................ 3-64
Table 3.12-2 Output signals of feeder breaker failure protection ........................................ 3-65
Table 3.12-3 Feeder breaker failure protection settings ....................................................... 3-65
Table 3.12-4 Function links of feeder breaker failure protection ......................................... 3-68
Table 3.13-1 Output signal of CT circuit supervision ............................................................ 3-76
Table 3.14-1 Output signal of VT circuit supervision ............................................................ 3-79
Table 3.15-1 Position status of disconnector ......................................................................... 3-80
Table 3.15-2 Position status of circuit breaker ....................................................................... 3-80
Table 3.15-3 Input signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker ....................... 3-84
3-f

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.15-4 Output signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker .................... 3-85
Table 3.15-5 Function link of circuit breaker .......................................................................... 3-86
Table 3.16-1 Input signal of breaker substitution .................................................................. 3-90
Table 3.16-2 Output signal of breaker substitution ............................................................... 3-90
Table 3.17-1 Output signal of GOOSE and SV function ........................................................ 3-92
Table 3.17-2 Function link ......................................................................................................... 3-93
Table 3.17-3 GOOSE sending link ............................................................................................ 3-93
3-g

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.1 Overview
PCS-915 can provide busbar differential protection (BBP), bus coupler/section protection (includes
overcurrent protection, switch-onto-fault protection, pole disagreement protection, dead zone fault
protection and breaker failure protection), feeder protection (includes overcurrent protection, pole
disagreement protection, dead zone fault protection and breaker failure protection), CT circuit
supervision and VT circuit supervision. For a specific project, some functions maybe not
configured or disabled according to users requirement.
The device has 2 plug-in modules (protection DSP module and fault detector DSP module) to
perform calculation. The protection DSP module is responsible for calculation of protection
elements, and fault detector DSP module is responsible for calculation of fault detectors. Any fault
detector on fault detector DSP module picks up to provide positive supply of output relays. The
relays will trip only if the fault detector and the corresponding protection element operate
simultaneously. On the premise of 24 samples per cycle, all data measurement, calculation and
logic discrimination can be processed within one sampling period. The event recording and
protection logic calculation are completed simultaneously.
3.2 Supported Busbar Arrangements

The following figures show the applications of PCS-915 for several typical busbar arrangements.
BB: busbar; BC: bus coupler; BS: bus section.
Panel A
PCS-915
VT1
BB1
Figure 3.2-1 Single BB
3-1

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
BS1
VT1
PCS-915
VT2
BB1
BB2
Figure 3.2-2 Single BB with one BS (single CT)
Panel A
CT2
BS1
VT1
PCS-915
VT2
CT1
BB1
BB2
Figure 3.2-3 Single BB with one BS (dual CTs)
3-2

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915
VT1
VT2
VT3
*
BS2
BS1
BB1
BB2
BB3
Figure 3.2-4 Single BB with two BS (single CT)
Panel A
PCS-915
VT1
VT2
*
CT2
*
BS1
BB1
CT1
VT3
*
*
CT2
BS2 CT1
BB2
BB3
Figure 3.2-5 Single BB with two BS (dual CTs)
3-3

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915
VT1
BB1
*
VT2
BC1
BB2
Figure 3.2-6 Double BB with one BC (single CT)
Panel A
PCS-915
VT1
CT2
BB1
VT2
BC1
*
CT1
BB2
Figure 3.2-7 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs)
3-4

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915-A
Panel B
PCS-915-B
*
BS1
VT1
*
VT1
BB1
BB1
*
BC1
VT2 BC2
VT2
BB2
BB2
BS2
Figure 3.2-8 Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT)
3-5

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915-A
Panel B
PCS-915-B
*
BS1
VT1
*
VT1
BB1
BB1
*
CT2
CT2 *
BC1
* CT1
VT2 BC2
VT2
BB2
BB2
BS2
CT1 *
Figure 3.2-9 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT)
3-6

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915
VT1
VT3
*
BS1
*
BB1
BB3
VT2
BC1
BC2
BB2
Figure 3.2-10 Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT)
Panel A
PCS-915
*
VT1
VT3
*
BS1
BB1
*
BB3
CT2
CT2
VT2
BC1
*
BC2
CT1
CT1
BB2
Figure 3.2-11 Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs)
3.3 Market Ordering Table (MOT) Configuration

PCS-Explorer software is developed in order to meet customers demand on functions of UAPC
platform device such as device configuration and programmable design. Please refer to Chapter 9
for detailed configuration method about PCS-Explorer software.
MOT is provided for users to order the device. According to the selected series number of MOT,
the applied busbar arrangement, some software and hardware related function can be configured
via the PCS-Explorer software (Please refer to Chapter 9 for detailed configuration method).
3-7

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.3-1 MOT configuration table in PCS-Explorer software
Application
Remark
A: Single BB, 1 Breakers

B: Single BB with one BS (single CT)
C: Single BB with one BS (dual CTs)
D: Single BB with two BS (single CT)
E: Single BB with two BS (dual CTs)
BB: busbar;
F: Double BB with one BC (single CT)
BC: bus coupler;
G: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs)
BS: bus section.
H: Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT)

I: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT)
J: Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT)
K: Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs)
The option is reserved for other busbar
L: Other
arrangement, further modifications for

the program are required
Software Version
A: Standard 1
Please refer to Table 3.3-2 for concrete
B: Standard 2
contents
Language
C: English + Chinese
F: English + French
R: English + Russian
S: English + Spanish
Protocol
A: IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS & GOOSE)
B: IEC 60870-5-103 (Ethernet, Serial port)
C: DNP 3.0 (Ethernet)
Number of Terminals
A: 1~16 (use 8U device)
B: 17~25 (use 8U+4U device)
Only a 8U chassis
Each
is available
(double CTs are
available) will take
4U
extended
chassis is added
BC/BS
up two terminals
Dual-position Binary Inputs (BI)

X: Not required
A: Dual-position BI for disconnector
B: Dual-position BI for circuit breaker
C: Dual-position BI for disconnector and circuit breaker
Voltage Concerned Functions
A: With voltage concerned functions
B: Without voltage concerned functions
Communication Ports&Time Synchronization Mode
3-8

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
A: 3 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x RS-485 + RS-485
(IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer)
The MON plug in module is NR1101F

module
B: 4 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) +

RS-232 (Printer)
The MON plug in module is NR1102M

module
C: 2 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x 100Base-FX

(ST-Connector) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer)
The MON plug in module is NR1102N

module
AC Input
A: CT 1A
B: CT 5A
Power Supply for Device
A: 110~250Vdc
1)
If B: Without voltage concerned functions is selected, all the voltage related functions will quit
(DPFC voltage FD element and VT circuit supervision will not function, busbar differential
protection and breaker failure protection will not controlled by respective voltage controlled
element), and all settings and information related to voltage will be hidden.
If A: With voltage concerned functions is selected for Voltage Concerned Functions, voltage
related settings and information can be displayed, but all the voltage related function will be
controlled by the device setting [En_Volt_BB] (refer to Section 7.1). If [En_Volt_BB] is set as 0,
all the voltage related functions will be disabled (DPFC voltage FD element and VT circuit
supervision will not function, busbar differential protection and breaker failure protection will not
controlled by respective voltage controlled element); if [En_Volt_BB] is set as 1, DPFC voltage
FD element and VT circuit supervision are enabled, voltage controlled element of busbar
differential protection and breaker failure protection will be controlled by respective logic setting
([87B.VCE.En] and [50BF.VCE.En]).
2)
In this option, if dual-position BI for disconnector is enabled, the device will get both normally
closed auxiliary contact and normally open auxiliary contact of a disconnector to indicate the
position of the disconnector. If dual-position BI for disconnector is disabled, the device will only get
normally open auxiliary contact of a disconnector to indicate the position of the disconnector.
If dual-position BI for circuit breaker is enabled, the device will get both normally closed auxiliary
contact and normally open auxiliary contact of a breaker to indicate the position of the breaker. If
dual-position BI for circuit breaker is disabled, the device will only get normally closed auxiliary
contact of a breaker to indicate the position of the breaker.
The concrete contents about the two options of Software Version are listed in following table.
Table 3.3-2 Contents of the option Software Version
Function
Standard 1
Standard 2
Busbar differential protection
BC/BS dead zone fault protection
3-9

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
BC/BS breaker failure protection
BC/BS pole disagreement protection
BC/BS overcurrent protection
BC/BS switch-onto-fault protection
Feeder breaker failure protection
Feeder dead zone fault protection
Feeder pole disagreement protection
Feeder overcurrent protection
Configurable I/O, LED and programmable logic
CT and VT circuit failure supervision (CTS, VTS)
Timing standard: PPS, PPM, IRIG-B, SNTP
NOTICE!
If Standard 1 is selected for Software Version, feeder dead zone fault protection,
feeder pole disagreement protection and feeder overcurrent protection are disabled,
and all the related settings and information are hidden.
3.4 Function Configuration

The ancillary protection functions also can be configured via the PCS-Explorer software (Please
refer to Chapter 9 for detailed configuration method).
Table 3.4-1 Function configuration table in PCS-Explorer software
Basic information configuration
1
All protective function
Enable/Disable
Phase-segregated breaker position
Enable/Disable
Phase-segregated binary input for initiating BFP
Enable/Disable
Enforced disconnector position
Enable/Disable
BC/BS breaker substitution
Enable/Disable
6
7
Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured

according to each bay
Logic setting of a protective element is configured according to each bay
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
Protective function configuration

8
Breaker failure protection re-tripping function
Enable/Disable
Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection
Enable/Disable
10
IDMT overcurrent characteristic
Enable/Disable
DNP3.0
11
TCP1
Enable/Disable
12
TCP2
Enable/Disable
13
TCP3
Enable/Disable
14
TCP4
Enable/Disable
3-10

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
1)
If it is set as Enable, the binary input [BI_En_Prot] and the function link [Link_Prot] are enabled.
All the protective function will be controlled by [BI_En_Prot], [Link_Prot], their respective enabling
binary input and function link. If [BI_En_Prot] is de-energized or [Link_Prot] is set as 0, all the
protective functions are disabled.
If it is set as Disable, the binary input [BI_En_Prot] and the function link [Link_Prot] are not
configured. All the protective function will only be controlled by their respective enabling binary
input and function link.
Takes BBP as an example, if All protective function is set as Enable, BBP can be enabled only
if [BI_En_Prot] and [87B.BI_En] are all energized and the function links [87B.Link] and [Link_Prot]
are set as 1. If any condition is not met, BBP is disabled. If All protective function is set as
Disable, the binary input [BI_En_Prot] and the function link [Link_Prot] are not configured, and all
the protective functions will not be controlled by them.
2)
If it is set as Enable, phase-segregated breaker position binary input is configured, if it is set as

Disable, three-phase breaker position binary input is configured.
3)
If it is set as Enable, phase-segregated tripping contact and three-phase tripping contact for
initiating breaker failure protection are configured, if it is set as Disable, only three-phase tripping
contact for initiating breaker failure protection is configured.
4)
If it is set as Enable, and the corresponding enforced disconnector position link [@Bayn.Link_DS]
is set as 1, the disconnector position of bay n will be decided by function link(s)
[@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBx] (x=1, 2 ..), if [@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBx] is set as 1, BBx disconnector
of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly, When [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as 1, if
[@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBn] and [@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBm] are set as 1 at the same time (nm),
the corresponding alarm signal [Alm_IntLinkx] will be issued. If the enforced disconnector position
link [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as 1, [@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBx] (x=1, 2 ..) are all set as 0, but
current is detected in bay n, disconnector position alarm [@Bayn.Alm_DS] will be issued
simultaneously.
If it is set as Disable, the position status of disconnector is identified according to normally open
auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of disconnector.
5)
BC/BS breaker substitution
For the busbar system arrangement that BC/BS breaker can be used temporarily to substitute one
of feeder breakers through transfer bus, it should be set as Enable, otherwise it should be set as
Disable.
6)
Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according
to each bay
3-11

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
When it is set as Enable, the enabling binary inputs and function links of feeder dead zone fault
protection, switch-onto-fault protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection
are configured according to each bay. For each bay, disabling binary input is not configured.
When it is set as Disable, there is only one enabling binary input and function link of feeder dead
zone fault protection, switch-onto-fault protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement
protection for all bays.
Takes overcurrent protection as an example, if it is set as Enable, the enabling binary input and
function link of overcurrent protection is [@Bayn.50/51.BI_En] and [@Bayn.50/51.Link]
respectively (one for per bay); if it is set as Disable, the enabling binary input and function link of
overcurrent protection is [50/51.BI_En] and [50/51.Link] respectively (one for all bays).
7)
Logic setting of a protective element is configured according to each bay
When it is set as Enable, the logic setting of feeder dead zone fault protection, switch-onto-fault
protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection are configured according to
each bay.
When it is set as Disable, there is only one logic setting of feeder dead zone fault protection,
switch-onto-fault protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection for all bays.
Takes overcurrent protection as an example, if it is set as Enable, the logic setting of overcurrent
protection is [@Bayn.50/51P.En] (phase overcurrent protection) and [@Bayn.50/51G.En] (ground
overcurrent protection) (one for per bay); if it is set as Disable, the logic setting of overcurrent
protection is [50/51P.En] (phase overcurrent protection) and [50/51G.En] (one for all bays).
8)
When it is set as Enable, breaker failure protection re-tripping function will be enabled, once BFP
operates, it will operate to re-trip concerned breaker after the time delay of [50BF.t_ReTrp]. If it is
set as Disable, breaker failure protection re-tripping function will be disabled and the time setting
for BFP [50BF.t_ReTrp] will be hidden.
9)
Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection
When it is set as Enable, the binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker
failure protection is enabled. Then if the releasing voltage controlled element binary input is
energized and the corresponding logic setting [Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE] is set as 1, the
voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection for the bay will be released. If the
releasing voltage controlled element binary input is energized for over 10s, it will be invalid and an
alarm signal will be issued.
When it is set as Disable, the binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker
failure protection is disabled.
10) IDMT overcurrent characteristic
When IDMT overcurrent characteristic is set as Enable, there will be an option of IDMT
characteristic for both BC/BS overcurrent protection and feeder overcurrent protection. When
IDMT overcurrent characteristic is set as Disable, all settings related to IDMT characteristic will
3-12

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
be hidden.
11) TCPx
When it is set as Enable, network No.x DNP client is enabled, then the related DNP
communication settings correspond to network No.x will be released. When it is set as Disable,
network No.x DNP client is disabled, then the related DNP communication settings correspond to
network No.x will be hidden.
If DNP3.0 protocol is not adopted, TCPx (x=1, 2, 3 and 4) should be set as disable.
3.5 Busbar Differential Protection

NOTICE!
In Section 3.5, @BBx is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar and
@Bayn is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay. For a bus coupler
bay, @BCy is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus coupler. For
a bus section bay, @BSz is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus
section.
The primary protection of PCS-915 is phase-segregated percentage restraint differential
protection. The differential circuits include check zone differential circuit and discriminating zone
differential circuits of each busbar zone. The check zone differential element is used to distinguish
between internal and external fault of the overall busbar system, it measures the current from all
the circuits connected to the busbar system except BC and BS (For the occasion that BS is at the
edge of the protected zone, BS will be taken as an feeder bay, such as BS1 and BS2 in Figure
3.2-9, the BS current will be included in check zone differential element). The discriminating zone
differential elements are used to select faulty zone by measuring the current of all the circuits
connected to individual zones of the busbar system separated by BC and BS.
Figure 3.5-1 shows a primary power system of double busbars with one BC (single CT)
arrangement, the two busbars are defined as busbar No.1 (BB1) and busbar No.2 (BB2)
respectively. The polarity mark of feeder CT is on the busbar side, and the polarity mark of BC CT
is on BB1 side.
For usual busbar system arrangement, the polarity mark definition are shown in Figure 3.2-1 to
Figure 3.2-11.
3-13

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Discriminative
zone No.1
Discriminative
zone No.2
Check zone
BB1
*
BC1
BB2
Figure 3.5-1 Sketch diagram of double busbars with one BC (single CT) arrangement
NOTICE!
The protective device ONLY identifies the physical position of busbar, ignoring the
number of busbar, takes the busbar arrangement in Figure 3.5-1 as an example, if only
one CT is available at BC1, the protective device will refer the busbar of which the
polarity of BC1 CT is towards as BB1.
Discriminative zone No.1 is defined as discriminative differential element of BB1. Discriminative
zone No.2 is defined as discriminative differential element of BB2.
3.5.1 Fault Detector (FD) Element
PCS-915 provides three independent FD elements for busbar differential protection, which are
DPFC voltage FD element, DPFC current FD element and differential current FD element. If any of
these three elements picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait
for the tripping signal from busbar differential protection. The fault detector output signal will last
for 500ms after the corresponding fault detector element drop off.
1.
DPFC voltage FD element
When DPFC voltage of any phase of any busbar is larger than the threshold, DPFC voltage FD
element picks up, the operating criterion is:
u>UFloat+0.05Un
Equation 3.5-1
Where:
u: Instantaneous value of phase-to-ground DPFC voltage
UFloat: Float threshold value, automatically varied with the gradually voltage changing
3-14

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
0.05Un: Fixed threshold value, Un is the rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage.

If B: Without voltage concerned functions is selected for Voltage Concerned Functions during
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3) or the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as 0 or VT
circuit failure is detected, DPFC voltage FD element will quit automatically.
2.
DPFC current FD element
If DPFC check zone restraint current is larger than the threshold, DPFC current fault detector
element will operate, the operating criterion is:
si>SIFloat+0.5In
Equation 3.5-2
Where:
si: Instantaneous value of DPFC check zone restraint current of any phase (scalar sum of current
change of all circuits/bays for check zone)
SIFloat: Float threshold value, automatically varied with the gradually current changing
0.5In: Fixed threshold value, In is the rated secondary current of reference CT.
3.
Differential current FD element
When any phase of the check zone differential current is larger than the setting, this element will
operate. The operating criterion is:
ID> [87B.I_Pkp]
Equation 3.5-3
Where:
ID: Differential phase current of check zone
[87B.I_Pkp]: Current setting of busbar differential protection
3.5.2 Function Description
3.5.2.1 Percentage Restraint Differential Element
The percentage restraint differential element includes steady-state percentage restraint differential
element and DPFC percentage restraint differential element.
Steady-state percentage restraint differential element

m
The differential current: ID =
I
j1
The restraint current: IR =
I
j1
3-15

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
The operating criterion is:
I D [87B.I _ Pkp]
I D KI R
Equation 3.5-4
Where:
K: Restraint coefficient of steady-state differential element
Ij: The current of the j-th feeder (Feeder j) connected
[87B.I_Pkp]: Current setting of busbar differential protection
The operation characteristic is shown as Figure 3.5-2.
ID
ID=IR
Operation region
ID=kIR
[87B.I_Pkp]
IR
Figure 3.5-2 Operation characteristic of steady-state percentage restraint differential element
Take into consideration both the CT anti-saturation capability and the sensitivity of steady-state
check zone differential element for a fault occurred in the weak source bus zone when the BC
breaker is open, dual restraint coefficients [87B.SlopeH_CZ, 87B.SlopeL_CZ] and
[87B.SlopeH_DZ, 87B.SlopeL_DZ] are adopted for steady-state check zone and discriminative
zones respectively.
When one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the busbar steady-state percentage restraint
differential protection will operate.
1.
Steady-state check zone differential element with high restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeH_CZ],
0.5 is recommended) operates and steady-state discriminative zone differential element with
low restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeL_DZ], 0.5 is recommended) operates.
2.
Steady-state check zone differential element with low restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeL_CZ],
0.3 is recommended) operates and steady-state discriminative zone differential element with
3-16

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
high restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeH_DZ], 0.6 is recommended) operates.
DPFC percentage restraint differential element
The DPFC percentage restraint differential element is adopted to enhance the performance of
busbar protection against high impedance fault and the influence of heavy loading condition. The
busbar DPFC differential protection is formed by DPFC percentage restraint differential element
and steady-state check zone percentage restraint differential element with fixed restraint
coefficient 0.2.
m
The DPFC differential current: ID =
I
j1
The DPFC restraint current: IR =
I
j1
The operating criterion is:
ID IDFloat I DP ickup
I D 0.2I R
ID K / IR
Equation 3.5-5
Where:
K': DPFC restraint coefficient
Ij: DPFC current of the j-th feeder (Feeder j) connected
IDFloat: Float threshold value of DPFC check zone differential current
IDPickup: Fixed threshold value of DPFC check zone differential current, which derives from the
setting of [87B.I_Pkp]
The operation characteristic is shown as Figure 3.5-4.
3-17

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
ID
ID=IR
Operation region
ID=k'IR
[87B.I_Pkp]
IR
IRSet
Figure 3.5-3 Operation characteristic of DPFC percentage restraint differential element
Similar to steady-state percentage restraint differential element, dual restraint coefficients are also
introduced to DPFC differential element. The restraint coefficients are fixed at [0.65, 0.3] and [0.65,
0.5] for DPFC check zone and discriminating zones respectively.
When the steady-state check zone percentage restraint differential element with fixed restraint
coefficient of 0.2 operates, if one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the busbar DPFC
percentage restraint differential protection will operate.
1.
DPFC check zone percentage restraint differential element with high restraint coefficient (0.65)
operates and DPFC discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element with low
restraint coefficient (0.5) operates.
2.
DPFC check zone percentage restraint differential element with low restraint coefficient (0.3)
operates and DPFC discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element with high
restraint coefficient (0.65) operates.
Following table shows the restraint coefficients for DPFC differential element.
Table 3.5-1 Restraint coefficients of DPFC BBP
PCS-915IC
DPFC differential element
Check Zone
High
0.65
Low
0.3
Discriminative Zone
High
Low
0.65
0.5
3.5.2.2 Voltage Controlled Element of Busbar Differential Protection (VCE_BBP)

Voltage controlled element is used as an auxiliary condition.
The operating criteria are:
UP [87B.VCE.U_Set]
Equation 3.5-6
3-18

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3U0 [87B.VCE.3U0_Set]
Equation 3.5-7
U2 [87B.VCE.U2_Set]
Equation 3.5-8
Where:
UP: Phase voltage
3U0: Residual voltage (calculated internally)
U2: Negative sequence voltage
[87B.VCE.U_Set]: Phase voltage setting for blocking BBP
[87B.VCE.3U0_Set]: Residual voltage setting for blocking BBP
[87B.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative voltage setting for blocking BBP
When the protective device is applied to an unearthed system, i.e. the system setting
[Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as 1, the criteria of voltage control element will change.
UPP [87B.VCE.U_Set]
Equation 3.5-9
U2 [87B.VCE.U2_Set]
Equation 3.5-10
Where:
UPP: Phase-to-phase voltage
[87B.VCE.U_Set]: Phase-to-phase voltage setting for blocking BBP
[87B.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative voltage setting for blocking BBP
VCE_BBP will be controlled by the logic setting [87B.VCE.En], if it is set as 0, VCE_BBP will be
disabled and busbar differential protection will not controlled by VCE_BBP
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), VCE_BBP will quit and related settings will be hidden,
busbar differential protection will not controlled by voltage element.
If the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as 0 (refer to Section 7.1), VCE_BBP is invalid no matter
the logic setting [87B.VCE.En] is set as 1 or not, busbar differential protection will not controlled
by voltage element.
Only if A: With voltage concerned functions is selected for Voltage Concerned Functions during
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as 1 and the logic
setting [87B.VCE.En] is set as 1, VCE_BBP is enabled.
If VCE_BBP (or VCE_BFP) of BBx operates for over 3s, an alarm [@BBx.Alm_VCE] will be
3-19

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
issued.
3.5.2.3 Faulty Busbar Zone Discrimination
The check zone differential element calculates the current from all circuits connected to the entire
busbar system except BC and BS to distinguish between internal and external fault. The
discriminating zone differential elements calculate the current of all the circuits connected to
individual zones via replica image of disconnector position to determine faulty zone.
When the operation criterion of check zone differential element (steady-state check zone
differential element is supervised by CT saturation detector 2 and DPFC check zone differential
element is supervised by CT saturation detector 1, to be described in the following section) and
any discriminating zone differential element is fulfilled, voltage controlled element of BBP of any
connected busbar is released, the busbar differential protection will operate to trip all bays
connected to the faulty busbar.
The protection has a feature of inter-connection operation mode, the feature will be effective
automatically under the following conditions.
1. A binary input [BI_En_IntLinkx] (x=1, 2, ) is energized, it should be energized when two
bus zones are coupled together and unable to detach for a particular system operation
condition.
2. On-load transfer condition (when two busbar disconnectors of one feeder are closed at the
same time).
Under the inter-connection operation mode, the discriminating zone differential elements measure
the current signals are the same as that of check zone differential element. The coupled busbars
will be tripped simultaneously when there is a fault.
3.5.2.4 Backup Busbar Differential Elements
If only the check zone percentage restraint differential element (supervised by CT saturation
detector 2) operates, two stages of backup protection with fixed time delay are applied to trip the
corresponding circuit breakers (controlled by the logic setting [87B.En_Dly_Biased]). Stage 1 of
backup protection will trip BC/BS (when voltage controlled element of any busbar connected with
the BC/BS is released or voltage controlled element is disabled) and the feeders of which current
is larger than 0.04*In and does not have disconnector position after 240ms. Stage 2 of backup
protection will trip the feeders connected to the busbar of which voltage controlled element has
been released (or voltage controlled element is disabled) and the feeders with current larger than
2*In (In: the rated secondary current of reference CT) after 480ms.
3.5.2.5 Detection of CT Saturation
Two detectors are used to prevent unwanted tripping caused by severe CT saturation during
external close up fault. If the differential current is determined to be caused by CT saturation, the
device will block busbar differential protection to prevent mal-operation.
CT saturation detector 1
When DPFC voltage or current FD element operates, the adaptive weighted algorithm for CT
3-20

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
saturation detector will be activated. In case of busbar fault occurs, DPFC differential element will
operate almost at the same time with DPFC voltage FD element or DPFC current FD element,
whereas for external fault, DPFC differential element will not operate before CT saturation at the
fault incipient stage, it will only operate after DPFC voltage element and DPFC current element in
case CT is saturated. Adaptive weighted algorithm for CT saturation detector is derived from the
difference of operating time among these DPFC elements. In coordination with DPFC differential
element, it has performed excellently to distinguish between internal and external fault with CT
saturation.
CT saturation detector 2
Harmonic restraint element is used in CT saturation detector 2 by analyzing the waveforms of

differential current harmonics. The detector enables the busbar differential element to remain
stable for an external fault with CT saturation while to maintain fast tripping for the external fault
evolved to internal fault on the same phase.
The blocking signal of CT saturation detector 2 will only last for 500ms. After that the busbar
differential element is released to operate for complicated fault conditions and minimized affected
area. In practical cases, CT transient saturation will not be more than 500ms.
Figure 3.5-4 Waveform of CT saturation during external fault
Figure 3.5-4 shows the current waveforms recorded in dynamic simulation with heavy CT
saturation during external phase-to-phase fault. Protection stability is well achieved in this extreme
case.
3.5.2.6 External Block Signal
PCS-915 provides a binary input [87B.BI_ExtBlk] to block BBP through external binary signal
(controlled by the logic setting [87B.En_BI_ExtBlk]). If [87B.En_BI_ExtBlk] is set as 1, BBP will
be blocked if the binary input [87B.BI_ExtBlk] is energized. However, if the binary input
[87B.BI_ExtBlk] is energized for over 1 second, PCS-915IC will issue an alarm
3-21

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
[87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk] and the blocking for BBP is released.

3.5.2.7 Closing Binary Input
If feeder dead zone fault protection is enabled, in order to prevent BBP from mal-operation when
closing onto the fault, when breaker of a feeder is open, the feeder current is included in
differential circuit instantaneously if the closing binary input of the feeder [@Bayn.BI_Cls] changes
from 0 to 1. However, if the binary input [@Bayn.BI_Cls] is energized for over 10s, an alarm
[@Bayn.Alm_Cls] will be issued.
3.5.3 Function Block Diagram
87B
87B.BI_ExtBlk
87B.BI_En
87B.BI_Blk
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn
Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx
@Bayn.BI_52a
@Bayn.BI_52b
@Bayn.BI_A_52a
@Bayn.BI_B_52a
@Bayn.BI_C_52a
@Bayn.BI_A_52b
@Bayn.BI_B_52b
@Bayn.BI_C_52b
AlmH_CTS
@BBx.AlmH_Diff
@BCy.AlmH_CTS
@BSz.AlmH_CTS
@Bayn.BI_Cls
87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC
87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Biased
87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_DPFC
87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_DPFC
87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_DPFC
87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_Biased
87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_Biased
87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_Biased
87B.Op_Trp@BCy
87B.Op_A_Trp@BCy
87B.Op_B_Trp@BCy
87B.Op_C_Trp@BCy
87B.Op_DPFC
87B.Op_Biased
87B.Op_Trp@BBx
87B.Op
87B.Op_Dly1_Biased
87B.Op_A_Dly1_Biased
87B.Op_B_Dly1_Biased
87B.Op_C_Dly1_Biased
87B.Op_Dly2_Biased
87B.FD
87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk
87B.Alm_Pkp_Biased
@BBx.Alm_VCE
87B.Alm_Off
@Bayn.Alm_Cls
For a BS, Just use BSz to instead of BCy in the above function block diagram.
3.5.4 Logic
BB1 logic is shown as follows as an example, logic of other bus zone(s) is(are) similar.
3-22

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SIG
Disconnector position abnormality
EN
[87B.En_DSAlm_Blk]
EN
[87B.En_BI_ExtBlk]
&
1s
&
BI
[87B.BI_ExtBlk]
SIG
CT circuit failure
EN
[87B.En_CTS_Blk]
SIG
DPFC DIF
SIG
DPFC DIF 1
SIG
DPFC current FD element
&
CT saturation
detector 1
&
1
SIG
DPFC voltage FD element
SIG
SP DIF (K=0.2)
SIG
SP DIF 1 (K=0.2)
SIG
HM REL 1
&
87B.Op_Trp@BB1_DPFC
&
87B.Op_Trp@BB1_Biased
&
1
500ms
0
&
SIG
SIG
SP DIF 1
&
HM REL
1
500ms
Diff_BB1
0
&
SIG
SP DIF
SIG
87B is enabled
SIG
Voltage_Rls_BBP 1
SIG
Voltage_Rls_BBP x
SIG
SP DIF x
&
&
SIG
Voltage_Rls_BBP x & BBx is

in service
SIG
si>SIFloat+0.5In
SIG
u>UFloat+0.05Un
SET
ID>[87B.I_Pkp]
&
240ms
480ms
87B.Op_Trp@BC1
87B.Op_Dly1
87B.Op_Dly2
87B.FD
Figure 3.5-5 Logic of busbar differential protection
Where:
Disconnector position abnormality: if current is detected in a bay but the bay has no disconnector
positions for any busbars.
3-23

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
DPFC current FD element: please refer to Section 3.5.1.

DPFC voltage FD element: please refer to Section 3.5.1.
DPFC DIF: DPFC percentage restraint differential element for check zone.
DPFC DIF1: DPFC percentage restraint differential element for bus zone No.1.
SP DIF: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for check zone.
SP DIF 1: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for bus zone No.1.
SP DIF x: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for any bus zone.
HM REL: Harmonic release element for check zone.
HM REL1: Harmonic release element for bus zone No.1.
87B is enabled: busbar differential protection is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input
[87B.BI_En] is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input [87B.BI_Blk] is de-energized
and the corresponding enabling function link [87B.Link] and logic setting [87B.En] are set as 1).
Voltage_Rls_BBP 1: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by VCE_BBP or voltage
controlled element of BBP of BB1 operates, please refer to Section 3.5.2.2 for details.
Voltage_Rls_BBP x: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by VCE_BBP or voltage
controlled element of BBP of any busbar operates, please refer to Section 3.5.2.2.
Voltage_Rls_BBP x & BBx is in service: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by
VCE_BBP or voltage controlled element of BBP of any energized busbar operates, please refer to
Section 3.5.2.2.
Diff_BB1: Differential element of BB1 (not controlled by voltage controlled element) operates.
u>UFloat+0.05Un si>SIFloat+0.5In ID> [87B.I_Pkp]: Please refer to Section 3.5.1.
87B.FD: Any FD element for busbar differential protection picks up.
Different from BC, busbar differential protection operating to trip BS is not controlled by VCE_BBP.
3-24

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SIG
BBx is in service
SIG
Ua<87B.VCE.U_Set
SIG
Ub<87B.VCE.U_Set
BBx is in service
&
3s
@BBx.Alm_VCE
VCE_BBP x
SIG
UC<87B.VCE.U_Set
SIG
3U0>87B.VCE.3U0_Set
SIG
U2>87B.VCE.U2_Set
SIG
Ua<50BF.VCE.U_Set
SIG
Ub<50BF.VCE.U_Set
SIG
UC<50BF.VCE.U_Set
SIG
3U0>50BF.VCE.3U0_Set
SIG
U2>50BF.VCE.U2_Set
SIG
50BF is enabled
VCE_BFP x
&
Figure 3.5-6 Logic diagram of voltage controlled element
Where:
BBx is in service: Please refer to Figure 3.14-1.
50BF is enabled: Please refer to Section 3.12.4.
VCE_BBP x: Voltage controlled element of busbar differential protection of BBx operates.
VCE_BFP x: Voltage controlled element of breaker failure protection of BBx operates.
@BBx.Alm_VCE: VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx picks up for over 3s
3.5.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.5-2 Input signals of busbar differential protection
No.
Signal
Description
87B.BI_En
Binary input of enabling BBP
87B.BI_Blk
Binary input of disabling BBP
BI_En_IntLinkx
87B.BI_ExtBlk
External binary input of blocking BBP
AlmH_CTS
CT circuit failure
@BCy.AlmH_CTS
BCy CT circuit failure
@BSz.AlmH_CTS
BSz CT circuit failure
@BBx.AlmH_Diff
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx
Normally open auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n
10
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx
Normally closed auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n
11
@Bayn.BI_52a
Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n
12
@Bayn.BI_52b
Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n
Binary input indicating that two busbars are under the inter-connected
operation mode
Differential current high value alarm signal of BBx, discriminating zone

differential current of BBx is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS] for over 5s.
3-25

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay
13
@Bayn.BI_A_52a
14
@Bayn.BI_B_52a
15
@Bayn.BI_C_52a
16
@Bayn.BI_A_52b
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n
17
@Bayn.BI_B_52b
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n
18
@Bayn.BI_C_52b
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n
19
@Bayn.BI_Cls
Binary input of closing circuit breaker of bay n
n
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay
n
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of
bay n
Table 3.5-3 Output signals of busbar differential protection

No.
Signal
Description
87B.Op_Dly1_Biased
Stage 1 of backup protection operates
87B.Op_Dly2_Biased
Stage 2 of backup protection operates
Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC
DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
Phase-A stage 1 of backup protection operates
Phase-B stage 1 of backup protection operates
Phase-C stage 1 of backup protection operates
Phase-A stage 2 of backup protection operates
Phase-B stage 2 of backup protection operates
10
Phase-C stage 2 of backup protection operates
11
12
13
14
Phase-A DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
15
Phase-B DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
16
Phase-C DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
17
87B.Op_Trp@BCy
Busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy
18
87B.Op_Trp@BSz
Busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz
19
87B.Op_A_Trp@BCy
Phase-A busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy
20
87B.Op_B_Trp@BCy
Phase-B busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy
21
87B.Op_C_Trp@BCy
Phase-C busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy
22
87B.Op_A_Trp@BSz
Phase-A busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz
Phase-A steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip

BBx
Phase-B steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip
BBx
Phase-C steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip
BBx
3-26

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
23
87B.Op_B_Trp@BSz
Phase-B busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz
24
87B.Op_C_Trp@BSz
Phase-C busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz
25
87B.Op_Biased
Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar
26
87B.Op_DPFC
DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar
27
87B.Op_Trp@BBx
28
87B.Op
29
87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk
30
87B.Alm_Pkp_Biased
31
@BBx.Alm_VCE
DPFC busbar differential protection or steady-state busbar differential

protection operates to trip BBx
protection operates to trip any busbar
External binary input of blocking BBP is energized for over 1s
Alarm signal indicating that differential current FD element picks up for
over 10s
VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx picks up for over 3s
Alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled. If the logic setting
[87B.En_Alm_Off] is set as 1, once BBP is disabled (BBP can be
32
87B.Alm_Off
disabled by the corresponding enabling binary input, function link or

enabling logic setting), the alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled will
be issued
33
@Bayn.Alm_Cls
Closing binary input [BI_Cls_@Bayn] is energized for over 10s
3.5.6 Settings
Busbar Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsBBP Settings

Table 3.5-4 Busbar differential protection settings
No.
Name
Range
Step
87B.I_Pkp
0.05In ~20.00In
0.01A
87B.SlopeH_CZ
0.50-0.80
0.01
Remark
Pickup value of differential current
High restraint coefficient for steady-state
check zone, 0.5 is recommended, less
than 0.3 is not recommended
Low restraint coefficient for steady-state
87B.SlopeL_CZ
0.30-0.80
0.01
check zone, 0.3 is recommended, less

than 0.3 is not recommended
High restraint coefficient for steady-state
87B.SlopeH_DZ
0.50-0.80
0.01
discriminative zone, 0.6 is recommended,

less than 0.3 is not recommended
Low restraint coefficient for steady-state
87B.SlopeL_DZ
0.50-0.80
0.01
discriminative zone, 0.5 is recommended,

less than 0.3 is not recommended
I_AlmH_CTS
0.05In ~20.00In
0.01A
Current setting of CT circuit failure
I_AlmL_CTS
0.05In ~20.00In
0.01A
Current setting of CT circuit abnormality

3-27

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
8
87B.VCE.U_Set
0~Un
0.01V
Under voltage setting of VCE for BBP
87B.VCE.3U0_Set
0~Un
0.01V
Residual voltage setting of VCE for BBP
10
87B.VCE.U2_Set
0~Un
0.01V
11
87B.En
0,1
Negative-sequence voltage setting of

VCE for BBP
1: Enabling busbar differential protection
0: Disabling busbar differential protection
1: Alarm signal will be issued if BBP is
12
87B.En_Alm_Off
0,1
disabled
0: Alarm signal will not be issued if BBP is
disabled
1: two stages of backup busbar differential
13
87B.En_Dly_Biased
0,1
protection is enabled
0: two stages of backup busbar differential
protection is disabled
1: breaker failure protection is initiated if
busbar differential protection operates to
14
87B.En_Init50BF
0,1
trip
0: breaker failure protection can not be
initiated by busbar differential protection
1: BBP is controlled by the binary input
[87B.BI_ExtBlk], once [87B.BI_ExtBlk] is
15
87B.En_BI_ExtBlk
0,1
energized, BBP will be blocked.

0: BBP will not be controlled by the binary
input [87B.BI_ExtBlk]
1: the CT circuit failure alarm signal can
be reset automatically after the CT circuit
16
En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS
0,1
returns to normal condition

0: the CT circuit failure alarm signal can
not be reset automatically after the CT
circuit returns to normal condition
1: the CT circuit abnormality alarm signal
can be reset automatically after the CT
17
En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS
0,1
circuit returns to normal condition

0: the CT circuit abnormality alarm signal
can not be reset automatically since the
CT circuit returns to normal condition
1: If any disconnector position alarm is
issued,
18
En_AutoRecov_DS
0,1
once
the
abnormality
of
disconnector position disappears, the

alarm will be reset automatically.
0: If any disconnector position alarm is
issued, the alarm can not be reset unless
3-28

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
energizing
the
disconnector
position
confirm binary input [BI_ConfirmDS]

Enabling busbar differential protection
being blocked by disconnector position
abnormality.
1: if current is detected in a feeder but the
feeder has no disconnector positions for
19
87B.En_DSAlm_Blk
0,1
any busbars, busbar differential protection

will be blocked.
0: busbar differential protection will not be
blocked for the disconnector position
abnormality condition.
0 is recommended. If it is not configured
for a project, its default value is 0.
1: busbar differential protection is blocked
if CT circuit fails
20
87B.En_CTS_Blk
0,1
0: busbar differential protection is not

controlled by CT circuit failure
If it is not configured for a project, its
default value is 0.
21
87B.VCE.En
0,1
1: BBP is controlled by VCE

0: BBP will not be controlled by VCE
Un: Rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT.

1.
[87B.I_Pkp]
It should ensure busbar differential protection sensitive enough under minimum fault level
condition and should be larger than maximum load current of its outlets (in order to prevent BBP
from mal-operation when CT secondary circuit fails).
2.
[I_AlmL_CTS]
This setting is applied to better identifying the abnormality of CT circuit of light load feeder and
shunt of CT circuit, etc. It should be smaller than [I_AlmH_CTS] and can be set as
0.75*[I_AlmH_CTS].
3.
[I_AlmH_CTS]
It should be larger than unbalance current in normal operation mode. The recommended value is
0.06In~0.1In.
4.
[87B.VCE.U_Set]
It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is a symmetric fault occurring in the busbar zone.
The recommended value is 0.7Un (Un: Rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT). If the
system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as 1, the setting should be set as
phase-to-phase voltage. Please refer to Section System Settings in Chapter 7.
3-29

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
5.
[87B.VCE.3U0_Set]
It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is an unsymmetrical fault occurring in the busbar
zone and it should be larger than maximum residual voltage in normal operation mode. It is invalid
if the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as 1.
6.
[87B.VCE.U2_Set]
It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is an unsymmetrical fault occurring in the busbar
zone and it should be larger than the maximum negative sequence voltage in normal operation
mode.
Function Link
Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links

Table 3.5-5 Function links of busbar differential protection
No.
Symbol
87B.Link
Link_IntLinkx
Remark
1: Two busbars are under inter-connected operation mode
0: Two busbars are not under inter-connected operation mode
For BBP, the relation is AND among the function link [87B.Link], the corresponding enabling
binary input [87B.BI_En] and the corresponding logic setting [87B.En].
For [Link_IntLinkx], the relation is OR among the function link and the corresponding enabling
binary input [BI_En_IntLinkx].
3.6 BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection

NOTICE!
In Section 3.6, for a bus coupler bay, @BCy is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus coupler, for a bus section bay, @BSz is used to refer to the label
setting of corresponding bus section.
One CT or two CTs can be configured for BC/BS. BC/BS dead zone fault protection can operate
under two conditions: BC/BS breaker is open or BC/BS breaker is closed.
3.6.1.1 One CT BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection
For BC/BS that only one CT is available, there will be a blind spot for a fault occurs between
BC/BS breaker and BC/BS CT, the fault can not be cleared after busbar on the breaker side is
3-30

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
tripped. In order to clear the fault quickly, BC/BS dead zone fault protection is provided.
Under the condition that BC/BS breaker is closed
After busbar differential protection sends the command to trip BC/BS, if the BC/BS breaker has
been tripped but the BC/BS current is still detected, then after a time delay of [BC.50DZ.t_Op], the
BC/BS dead zone fault protection will operate to issue a signal and the BC/BS current will be
excluded from discriminating zone percentage restraint differential elements of the two connected
busbars.
Under the condition that BC/BS breaker is open
If the two connected busbars are in service and BC/BS breaker is open, in order to prevent both
busbars from tripping for an dead zone fault, the BC/BS current will be excluded from
discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element of the connected two busbars, busbar
differential protection will operate to trip the busbar directly connected to the CT to clear the dead
zone fault.
3.6.1.2 Two CTs BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection
For BC/BS that double CTs are available, if BC/BS breaker is closed, there is no blind spot for a
internal fault, so BC/BS dead zone fault protection will not function.
If BC/BS breaker is open, BC/BS dead zone fault protection will function as same as that of one
CT BC/BS under the condition that BC/BS is open.
3.6.1.3 Special Situation
If BS current can affect the check zone differential current (such as BS in Figure 3.2-9, the BS
current will be calculated in check zone and discriminating zone differential current), dead zone
fault protection is not configured for the BS (the fault can be cleared by BS breaker failure
protection, refer to Section 3.11). The reason is: if the load current of BS CT is small, and the
breaker position of BS is abnormal (the actual breaker position is closed, but it is identified as open
for the device), then if dead zone fault protection is configured (the BS current is excluded from
discriminating zone percentage restraint differential elements of the two connected busbars), it will
lead the busbar differential protection mal-operate for an external fault.
3-31

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
BB1
BC/BS CT
Dead zone fault
BC/BS Breaker
BB2

BC/BS 50DZ
87B.Op_Trp@BCy
50DZ.Op_@BCy

@BCy.BI_52a
@BCy.BI_52b
@BCy.BI_A_52a
@BCy.BI_B_52a
@BCy.BI_C_52a
@BCy.BI_A_52b
@BCy.BI_B_52b
@BCy.BI_C_52b
87B.Op_Trp@BBx
3.6.3 Logic
The logic of BC/BS dead zone fault protection is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as
an example).
3-32

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SIG
BB1 is in service
SIG
BB2 is in service
SIG
Ia_BC1<0.04In
&
SIG
Ib_BC1<0.04In
SIG
Ic_BC1<0.04In
0 400ms
&
&
&
Breaker of BC1 is open
SIG
1
SIG
87B.Op_Trp@BC1
SIG
DIF_CZ
SIG
Ia_BC1>[BC.50DZ.I_Set]
SIG
Ib_BC1>[BC.50DZ.I_Set]
SIG
Ic_BC1>[BC.50DZ.I_Set]
SIG
87B.Op_Trp@BBx
BC1 current is excluded from discriminating

zone percentage differential circuit
&
BC.50DZ.t_Op
&
&
@BC1.50DZ.Op
Figure 3.6-1 Logic of BC/BS dead zone fault protection
BBx is in service: Please refer to Figure 3.14-1;

Breaker of BC1 is open: please refer to Section 0;
DIF_CZ: Check zone percentage restraint differential element with low restraint coefficient.
3.6.4 I/O Signal
Table 3.6-1 Input signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection
No.
Signal
Description
87B.Op_Trp@BCy
87B.Op_Trp@BSz
87B.Op_Trp@BBx
Busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
Table 3.6-2 Output signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection

No.
Signal
Description
@BCy.50DZ.Op
Dead zone fault protection of BCy operates
@BSz.50DZ.Op
Dead zone fault protection of BSz operates
3.6.5 Settings
BC Dead Zone Fault Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt Settings50DZ Settings
3-33

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.6-3 BC dead zone fault protection settings
No.
Name
Range
Step
BC.50DZ.I_Set
0.05In ~20.00In
0.01A
BC.50DZ.t_Op
0.00~10.00s
0.01s
Remark
Current setting for BC/BS dead zone fault
protection, 0.1In is recommended.
Time delay for BC/BS dead zone fault
protection, 150ms is recommended.
3.7 Feeder Dead Zone Fault Protection (DZP)

NOTICE!
and sampled values related with each bay will change with the corresponding label
settings.
In Section 3.7, @Bayn is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding feeder bay.
3.7.1 Fault Detector Element
Feeder dead zone fault protection is provided for each feeder bay. PCS-915 provides independent
FD element for feeder DZP ([50DZ.FD]), as shown in Figure 3.7-1, if any phase current of feeder
bay n is larger than [Fdr.50DZ.I_Set] and current of feeder bay n is excluded from differential
current, FD element for feeder DZP picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then
available and wait for the tripping signal from feeder DZP. The fault detector output signal will last
for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off.
If a fault occurs between breaker and busbar CT of a feeder bay, the fault can not be cleared even
the breaker is tripped. In order to clear the fault quickly, dead zone fault protection for each feeder
bay is provided.
If the breaker of a feeder is open, and three phase currents of the feeder are all smaller than 0.04I n,
then the feeder current will be excluded from differential elements which prevent BBP from
mal-operation for the fault in the dead zone. For a fault occurred between circuit breaker and CT,
FD element of feeder DZP picks up for over 20ms, dead zone fault protection will operates and
initiates transfer trip to trip remote circuit breaker.
In order to prevent BBP from mal-operation when closing onto the fault, when breaker of a feeder
is open, the feeder current is included in differential circuit instantaneously if the closing binary
input of the feeder [@Bayn.BI_Cls] changes from 0 to 1. However, if the binary input
[@Bayn.BI_Cls] is energized for over 10 second, an alarm [@Bayn.Alm_Cls] will be issued.
3-34

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Busbar
Feeder breaker
Dead zone fault
Feeder CT

Feeder 50DZ
@Bayn.50DZ.Op
@Bayn.BI_52a
@Bayn.Op_TT
@Bayn.BI_52b
@Bayn.Alm_Cls
@Bayn.BI_A_52a
@Bayn.BI_B_52a
@Bayn.50DZ.Alm_Pkp
@Bayn.BI_C_52a
@Bayn.BI_A_52b
@Bayn.BI_B_52b
@Bayn.BI_C_52b
@Bayn.Alm_52b
@Bayn.BI_Cls
Fdr.50DZ.BI_En or @Bayn.50DZ.BI_En
Fdr.50DZ.BI_Blk
3.7.4 Logic
The logic of dead zone fault protection is shown as Figure 3.7-1.
3-35

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SIG
Ia_Bayn<0.04In
SIG
Ib_Bayn<0.04In
SIG
Ic_Bayn<0.04In
BI
1
&
[@Bayn.BI_Cls]
SIG
[@Bayn.Alm_52b]
SIG
TBD of bay n is closed
SIG
Breaker of bay n is open
SIG
Ia_Bayn>[Fdr.50DZ.I_Set]
SIG
Ib_Bayn>[Fdr.50DZ.I_Set]
SIG
Ic_Bayn>[Fdr.50DZ.I_Set]
SIG
Bayn.50DZ is enabled
1s
&
Bay n current is not included in differential current
@Bayn.50DZ.FD
1
&
Fdr.50DZ.t_Op 0
[@Bayn.50DZ.Op]
[@Bayn.Op_TT]
Figure 3.7-1 Logic of feeder dead zone fault protection
Where:
@Bayn.50DZ.FD: FD element for feeder bay n dead zone fault protection picks up.
TBD of bay n is closed: transfer bus disconnector (TBD) of bay n is closed.
Bayn.50DZ is enabled: dead zone fault protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding enabling
binary input ([Fdr.50DZ.BI_En] or [@Bayn.50DZ.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding disabling
binary input [50DZ.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link
([Fdr.50DZ.Link] or [@Bayn.50DZ.Link]) and logic setting ([Fdr.50DZ.En] or [Bayn.50DZ.En]) are
set as 1).
3.7.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.7-1 Input signals of feeder dead zone fault protection
No.
Signal
Description
Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is
Fdr.50DZ.BI_En
configured when the basic information configuration Enabling binary

input and function link of a protective element is configured according to
each bay is set as Disable (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n (it is
@Bayn.50DZ.BI_En

each bay is set as Enable (refer to Section 3.4))
Fdr.50DZ.BI_Blk
@Bayn.Alm_52b
Binary input of disabling feeder dead zone fault protection

Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n breaker is energized but
current can still be detected in bay n
3-36

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
5
@Bayn.BI_Cls

Table 3.7-2 Output signals of feeder dead zone fault protection
No.
Signal
Description
@Bayn.50DZ.Op
@Bayn.Op_TT
@Bayn.50DZ.Alm_Pkp
@Bayn.Alm_Cls
DZP of bay n operates

DZP or BFP of bay n operates to initiate transfer trip to remote circuit
breaker
Alarm signal indicating that feeder DZP FD element of bay n picks up for
over 10s
Closing binary input [@Bayn.BI_Cls] is energized for over 10s
3.7.6 Settings
Dead Zone Fault Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt Settings50DZ Settings

Table 3.7-3 Feeder dead zone fault protection settings
No.
Name
Range
Step
Fdr.50DZ.I_Set
0.05In ~20.00In
0.01A
Fdr.50DZ.t_Op
0.00~4.90s
0.01s
Remark
Current setting for feeder dead zone fault
protection, 0.1In is recommended.
Time delay for feeder dead zone fault
protection, 20ms is recommended.
Logic setting of feeder dead zone fault
protection of bay n, it is configured when the
basic information configuration Logic setting
of
Bayn.50DZ.En
0,1
protective element
is configured
according to each bay is set as Enable

(refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection
of bay n
0:
Disabling
feeder
dead
zone
fault
protection of bay n
Logic setting of feeder dead zone fault
protection, it is configured when the basic
information configuration Logic setting of a
protective element is configured according to
4
Fdr. 50DZ.En
0,1
each bay is set as Disable (refer to Section

3.4)
0:
Disabling
feeder
dead
zone
fault
protection
Function Link
3-37

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Table 3.7-4 Function links of feeder dead zone fault protection
No.
Symbol
Remark
Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is
configured when the basic information configuration Enabling
Fdr.50DZ.Link
binary input and function link of a protective element is configured

according to each bay is set as Disable (refer to Section 3.4))
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection
Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay
n (it is configured when the basic information configuration
Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is
@Bayn.50DZ.Link
configured according to each bay is set as Enable (refer to

Section 3.4))
1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n
For feeder dead zone fault protection, the relation is AND among the enabling function link, the
corresponding enabling binary input and the corresponding logic setting.
3.8 BC/BS Switch-onto-fault (SOTF) Protection

NOTICE!
In Section 3.8, for a bus coupler bay, @BCy is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus coupler, for a bus section bay, @BSz is used to refer to the label
setting of corresponding bus section.
PCS-915 provides independent FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection, if any phase current of
BC/BS is larger than the current setting [50SOTF.I_Set], FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection
(@BCy.50SOTF.FD or @BSz.50SOTF.FD) picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is
then available and wait for the tripping signal from BC/BS SOTF protection. The fault detector
output signal will last for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off.
If a busbar is first energized via a BC or BS after maintenance or newly installed, a feature of
BC/BS SOTF is incorporated in the PCS-915 to trip the BC/BS immediately when it is closed on to
a fault.
SOTF protection is enabled if the following conditions are met.
3-38

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
1.
The BC/BS CB status is in open position
2.
BC/BS three phase-currents are smaller than 0.04In.
3.
Any of the two connected busbars is out of service.
If any of the following conditions is met, SOTF protection will be disabled after 300ms
1.
The position status of BC/BS breaker changes from open to closed.
2.
BC current changes from being smaller than 0.04In to being larger than 0.04In.
3.
Both connected busbars are in service.
If FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection picks up in the duration when SOTF protection is
enabled, BC/BS SOTF protection will operate to trip BC/BS breaker without controlled by voltage
controlled element.
50SOTF
@BCy.50SOTF.Op_Trp
@BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp
@BCy.BI_52a
@BCy.BI_52b
@BCy.BI_A_52a
@BCy.BI_B_52a
@BCy.BI_C_52a
@BCy.BI_A_52b
@BCy.BI_B_52b
@BCy.BI_C_52b
50SOTF.BI_Blk
50SOTF.BI_En or @BCy.50SOTF.BI_En
3.8.4 Logic
The logic of BC/BS SOTF protection is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an
example).
3-39

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SIG
Breaker of BC1 is open
SIG
BB1 is in service
&
SIG
BB2 is in service
SIG
Ia_BC1>0.04In
SIG
Ib_BC1>0.04In
SIG
Ic_BC1>0.04In
&
0 300ms
&
&
&
@BC1.50SOTF.Op_Trp
SIG
@BC1.50SOTF is enabled
SET
Ia_BC1>[50SOTF.I_Set]
SET
Ib_BC1>[50SOTF.I_Set]
SET
Ic_BC1>[50SOTF.I_Set]
&
@BC1.50SOTF.FD
Figure 3.8-1 Logic of SOTF protection
Where:
@BC1.50SOTF.FD: FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection picks up
BBx is in service: Please refer to Figure 3.14-1.
@BC1.50SOTF is enabled: SOTF protection of BC1 is enabled (the corresponding enabling
binary input ([50SOTF.BI_En] or [@BC1.50SOTF.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding
disabling binary input [50SOTF.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function
link ([50SOTF.Link] or [@BC1.50SOTF.Link]) and logic setting ([50SOTF.En] or
[@BC1.50SOTF.En]) are set as 1).
3.8.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.8-1 Input signals of BC/BS SOTF protection
No.
Signal
Description
Binary input of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured when
50SOTF.BI_En
the basic information configuration Enabling binary input and function

link of a protective element is configured according to each bay is set
as Disable (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling SOTF of BCy (it is configured when the basic
@BCy.50SOTF.BI_En
information configuration Enabling binary input and function link of a

protective element is configured according to each bay is set as
Enable (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling SOTF of BSz (it is configured when the basic
@BSz.50SOTF.BI_En

3-40

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
4
50SOTF.BI_Blk
Binary input of disabling BC/BS SOTF protection

Table 3.8-2 Output signals of BC/BS SOTF protection
No.
Signal
Description
@BCy.50SOTF.Op_Trp
SOTF protection of BCy operates
@BSz.50SOTF.Op_Trp
SOTF protection of BSz operates
@BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp
@BSz.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for SOTF protection of BCy

picks up for over 10s
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for SOTF protection of BSz
3.8.6 Settings
Switch-onto-fault Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsSOTF Settings

Table 3.8-3 Switch-onto-fault protection settings
No.
1
Name
50SOTF.I_Set
Range
Step
0.05In ~20.00In
0.01A
Remark
Current setting for BC/BS SOTF protection
Logic setting of SOTF protection of bay n
(only for BC/BS bay), it is configured when
the basic information configuration Logic
setting
Bayn.50SOTF.En
0,1
of
protective
element
is
configured according to each bay is set as

Enable (refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only
for BC/BS bay)
0: Disabling SOTF protection of bay n (only
for BC/BS bay)
Logic setting of BC/BS SOTF protection, it
is configured when the basic information
configuration Logic setting of a protective
50SOTF.En
0,1
element is configured according to each

bay is set as Disable (refer to Section
3.4)
1: Enabling BC/BS SOTF protection
0: Disabling BC/BS SOTF protection
Function Link
3-41

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.8-4 Function links of BC/BS SOTF protection
No.
Symbol
Remark
Function link of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured
when the basic information configuration Enabling binary input and
50SOTF.Link
function link of a protective element is configured according to each

bay is set as Disable (refer to Section 3.4))
Function link of enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS
bay) (it is configured when the basic information configuration
@Bayn.50SOTF.Link
configured according to each bay is set as Enable (refer to Section

3.4))
1: Enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay)
0: Disabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay)
For BC/BS SOTF protection, the relation is AND among the enabling function link, the
3.9 Overcurrent (OC) Protection

NOTICE!
settings.
In Section 3.9, @Bayn is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay.
PCS-915 provides two independent FD elements for OC protection of each bay (includes BC/BS
and each feeder), which are phase overcurrent FD element and ground overcurrent FD element. If
any of the two elements picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait
for the tripping signal from OC protection element. The fault detector output signal will last for
500ms after the corresponding fault detector element drop off.
Phase overcurrent FD element
When any phase current of bay n is larger than the threshold, phase overcurrent FD element
(@Bayn.50/51P.FD) picks up, the operating criterion is:
Max(Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn) > [Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]
Ground overcurrent FD element
When residual current of bay n is larger than the threshold, ground overcurrent FD element
(@Bayn.50/51G.FD) picks up, the operating criterion is:
3-42

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3I0_Bayn > [Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set]

Overcurrent protection (50/51) includes phase overcurrent element (50/51P) and ground
overcurrent element (50/51G), if IDMT overcurrent characteristic in protective function
configuration is set as Enable (refer to Section 3.4), the setting [Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]/
[Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve] is released, each overcurrent element can be configured as
inverse-time overcurrent protection (IDMT) or definite-time overcurrent protection by the setting
[Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]/ [Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve] (0: definite-time characteristic, 1: normal
inverse-time characteristic, 2: very inverse-time characteristic, 3: extremely inverse-time
characteristic, 4: long-time inverse-time characteristic, 5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic).
For overcurrent protection, the inverse-time characteristic complies with the following formula
(based on IEC60255-3 standard).
t(I )
Kt
I
( ) 1
Ib
TMS
Where:
Ib
is
current
setting.
For
ground
overcurrent
protection,
it
is
the
setting
[Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set]. For phase overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.I_Set].
K t is time constant. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51G.K]. For
phase overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.K]. When inverse-time characteristic is
chosen as user-defined inverse-time characteristic, user has to input the setting according to
the application.
TMS is time multiplier. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51G.TMS].
For phase overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.TMS].
is exponent. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51G.Alpha]. For phase
overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.Alpha]. when inverse-time characteristic is
chosen as user-defined inverse-time characteristic, user has to input the setting according to the
application.
I for ground overcurrent protection, it is actual value of calculated residual current of bay n. For
phase overcurrent protection, it is actual value of measured maximum phase current of bay n.
t (I ) is calculated operating time of inverse-time overcurrent protection.

For phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent protection, definite-time, four IEC
inverse-time characteristics and one user-defined inverse-time characteristic are available for
selection. It can be shown in the following table.
3-43

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve
Kt
(Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve)
0: definite-time characteristic
1: normal inverse-time characteristic
0.14
0.02
2: very inverse-time characteristic
13.5
3: extremely inverse-time characteristic
80
4: long-time inverse-time characteristic
120
Bayn.50/51P.K
Bayn.50/51P.Alpha
(Bayn.50/51G.K)
(Bayn.50/51G.Alpha)
5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic
50/51
@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp
@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp
50/51.BI_Blk
@Bayn.50/51P.Alm_Pkp
50/51.BI_En or (@Bayn.50/51P.BI_En
@Bayn.50/51G.Alm_Pkp
and @Bayn.50/51G.BI_En)
3.9.4 Logic
The logic of overcurrent protection is shown as bellow.
3-44

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
&
@Bayn.50/51P.FD
SET
SET
SET
[Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]=0
&
[Bayn.50/51P.t_Op]
&
[Bayn.50/51P.t_Op]
[Bayn.50/51P.t_Op]
Ia_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]
Ib_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]
&
SET
Ic_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]
SIG
Bayn.50/51P is enabled
1
&
@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp
IDMT (Ia_Bayn)
&
[Bayn.50/51P.tmin]
&
IDMT (Ib_Bayn)
&
[Bayn.50/51P.tmin]
&
IDMT (Ic_Bayn)
&
[Bayn.50/51P.tmin]
SIG
Bayn.50/51G is enabled
SET
3I0_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set]
&
[Bayn.50/51G.t_Op] 0
1
&
SET
@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp
IDMT (3I0_Bayn)
&
[Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve]=0
[Bayn.50/51G.tmin]
&
@Bayn.50/51G.FD
Figure 3.9-1 Logic of overcurrent protection
Where:
Bayn.50/51P.FD: Bay n phase overcurrent FD element picks up
Bayn.50/51G.FD: Bay n ground overcurrent FD element picks up
Bayn.50/51P is enabled: phase overcurrent protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding
enabling binary input ([50/51.BI_En] or [@Bayn.50/51P.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding
disabling binary input [50/51.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link
([50/51.Link] or [@Bayn.50/51P.Link]) and logic setting ([50/51.En] or [Bayn.50/51P.En]) are set as
1).
Bayn.50/51G is enabled: ground overcurrent protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding
enabling binary input ([50/51.BI_En] or [@Bayn.50/51G.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding
disabling binary input [50/51.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link
3-45

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
([50/51.Link] or [@Bayn.50/51G.Link]) and logic setting ([50/51.En] or [Bayn.50/51G.En]) are set

as 1).
3.9.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.9-1 Input signals of overcurrent protection
No.
Signal
Description
Binary input of enabling overcurrent protection (it is configured when the
basic information configuration Enabling binary input and function link of
50/51.BI_En
a protective element is configured according to each bay is set as

Disable (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it is
@Bayn.50/51P.BI_En

Binary input of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it is
@Bayn.50/51G.BI_En

50/51.BI_Blk
Binary input of disabling overcurrent protection

Table 3.9-2 Output signals of overcurrent protection
No.
Signal
Description
@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp
phase overcurrent protection of bay n operates
@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp
ground overcurrent protection of bay n operates
Alarm signal indicating that phase overcurrent FD element of bay n

Alarm signal indicating that ground overcurrent FD element of bay n
3.9.6 Settings
Overcurrent Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsOC Settings

Table 3.9-3 Overcurrent protection settings
No.
Name
Range
Step
Bayn.50/51P.I_Set
0.05In~20.00In
0.01A
Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set
0.05In~20.00In
0.01A
Bayn.50/51P.t_Op
0.00~10.00s
0.01s
Remark
Current
setting
for
phase
overcurrent
for
ground
overcurrent
delay
setting
for
protection of bay n
Current
setting
protection of bay n
Definite
3-46
time
phase

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
No.
Name
Range
Step
Remark
overcurrent protection of bay n
Bayn.50/51G.t_Op
0.00~10.00s
0.01s
Definite time delay setting for ground

overcurrent protection of bay n
Operating characteristic selection for phase
overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting
0~5
is
displayed
characteristic
if
IDMT
in
protective
overcurrent
function
configuration is set as Enable (refer to

Section 3.4).
Minimum time delay for inverse-time phase
6
Bayn.50/51P.tmin
0.00~10.00s
0.01s
is
displayed
characteristic
if
IDMT
in
protective
overcurrent
function

Section 3.4).
Time
constant
for
inverse-time
phase

7
Bayn.50/51P.K
0~10000
0.01
is
displayed
characteristic
if
IDMT
in
protective
overcurrent
function

Section 3.4).
Time multiplier
for
inverse-time
phase

8
Bayn.50/51P.TMS
0.01~200
0.01
is
displayed
characteristic
if
IDMT
in
protective
overcurrent
function

Section 3.4).
Exponent for inverse-time phase overcurrent
protection of bay n. This setting is displayed
9
Bayn.50/51P.Alpha
0.01~200
0.01
if
IDMT
overcurrent
characteristic
in
protective function configuration is set as

Enable (refer to Section 3.4).
Operating characteristic selection for ground
10
Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve
0~5
is
displayed
characteristic
if
IDMT
in
protective
overcurrent
function

Section 3.4).
Minimum time delay for inverse-time ground
11
Bayn.50/51G.tmin
0.00~10.00s
0.01s

is
displayed
if
IDMT
overcurrent
3-47

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
No.
Name
Range
Step
Remark
characteristic
in
protective
function

Section 3.4).
Time constant
for
inverse-time ground

12
Bayn.50/51G.K
0~10000
0.01
is
if
IDMT
in
protective
displayed
characteristic
overcurrent
function

Section 3.4).
Time multiplier for inverse-time ground
13
Bayn.50/51G.TMS
0.01~200
0.01
is
if
IDMT
in
protective
displayed
characteristic
overcurrent
function

Section 3.4).
Exponent
for
inverse-time
ground

14
Bayn.50/51G.Alpha
0.01~200
0.01
is
if
IDMT
in
protective
displayed
characteristic
overcurrent
function

Section 3.4).
1: Enabling overcurrent protection operates
15
50/51.En_Init50BF
0,1
to initiate BFP
0: Disabling overcurrent protection operates
to initiate BFP
Logic setting of phase overcurrent protection
and ground overcurrent protection, it is
configured
when
the basic information

16
50/51.En
0,1
element is configured according to each bay

is set as Disable (refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection and
ground overcurrent protection
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection
and ground overcurrent protection
Logic setting of phase overcurrent protection
of bay n, it is configured when the basic
information configuration Logic setting of a
17
Bayn.50/51P.En
0,1
protective element is configured according to

each bay is set as Enable (refer to Section
3.4)
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection of
3-48

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
No.
Name
Range
Step
Remark
bay n
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection of
bay n
Logic
setting
of
ground
overcurrent
protection of bay n, it is configured when the

basic information configuration Logic setting
of
18
Bayn.50/51G.En
0,1
a protective element
is configured
according to each bay is set as Enable
(refer to Section 3.4)

1: Enabling ground overcurrent protection of
bay n
0: Disabling ground overcurrent protection of
bay n
In: Rated secondary current of reference CT

1.
[Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]
The parameters of each characteristic are listed in the following table.
Kt
0: definite-time
0.14
0.02
13.5
80
120
Bayn.50/51P.K
Bayn.50/51P.Alpha
2.
[Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve]
The parameters of each characteristic are listed in the following table.
Kt
Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve
0: definite-time
0.14
0.02
13.5
80
120
Bayn.50/51G.K
Bayn.50/51G.Alpha
3.
[Bayn.50/51P.tmin]/[Bayn.50/51G.tmin]
3-49

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
This is the minimum delay of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection.

Recommended value: 0.1s.
4.
[Bayn.50/51P.TMS]/[Bayn.50/51G.TMS]
This is the time multiplier setting ( TMS ) of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection.
If inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection coordinates with a line, the setting should be
graded with the inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection of the line.
If inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection is used independently, it can be set according
to the actual requirement.
5.
[Bayn.50/51P.K]/[Bayn.50/51G.K], [Bayn.50/51P.Alpha]/[Bayn.50/51G.Alpha]
[Bayn.50/51P.K]/[Bayn.50/51G.K] and [Bayn.50/51P.Alpha]/[Bayn.50/51G.Alpha] are respectively

the time constant ( K t ) and the exponent ( ) of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection,
which are set according to the model of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection. They
are valid only when the setting [Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]/[Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve] is set as 5
(i.e. user-defined inverse-time characteristic is selected).
Function Link

Table 3.9-4 Function links of overcurrent protection
No.
Symbol
Remark
Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground
overcurrent protection (it is configured when the basic information
configuration Enabling binary input and function link of a
50/51.Link

1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection
Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it
is configured when the basic information configuration Enabling
@Bayn.50/51P.Link

according to each bay is set as Enable (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n
Function link of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it
@Bayn.50/51G.Link

1: Enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n
3-50

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
No.
Symbol
Remark
0: Disabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n
For overcurrent protection, the relation is AND among the enabling function link, the
3.10 Pole Disagreement (PD) Protection

NOTICE!
settings.
PCS-915 provides independent pole disagreement FD element for PD protection of each bay
(includes BC/BS and each feeder). If pole disagreement binary input of bay n
[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD] is energized, FD element for PD protection of bay n (@Bayn.62PD.FD)
picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait for the tripping signal
from PD protection element. The fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after the fault
detector element drop off.
For each bay, PD protection is necessary when pole disagreement of corresponding breaker is
detected due to three phases not in same status.
Pole disagreement protection is initiated by series-parallel connected auxiliary contacts of breaker
i.e. the binary input [@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD].
In addition to series-parallel connected auxiliary contacts of breaker, residual and negative
sequence current are used as auxiliary criteria.
62PD
@Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp
@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD
@Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp
62PD.BI_En or @Bayn.62PD.BI_En
62PD.BI_Blk
3.10.4 Logic
The logic of pole disagreement protection is shown as follows.
3-51

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
BI
SET
[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD]
&
3I0_Bayn>[Bayn.62PD.3I0_Set]
1
SET
I2_Bayn>[Bayn.62PD.I2_Set]
SIG
Bayn.62PD is enabled
&
&
52b_A
52a_A
52b_B
52a_B
52b_C
52a_C
[@Bayn.62PD.t_Op] 0
@Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp
@Bayn.62PD.FD
[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD]
Figure 3.10-1 Logic of pole disagreement protection
Where:
@Bayn.62PD.FD: FD element for PD protection of bay n picks up.
3I0_Bayn, I2_Bayn: residual and negative sequence current of bay n.
Bayn.62PD is enabled: PD protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input
([62PD.BI_En] or [@Bayn.62PD.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input
[62PD.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link ([62PD.Link] or
[@Bayn.62PD.Link]) and logic setting ([62PD.En] or [Bayn.62PD.En]) are set as 1).
3.10.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.10-1 Input signals of pole disagreement protection
No.
1
Signal
@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD
Description
Binary input indicating breaker of bay n is in pole disagreement status
Binary input of enabling PD protection (it is configured when the basic
62PD.BI_En

Binary input of enabling PD protection of bay n (it is configured when the
@Bayn.62PD.BI_En
basic information configuration Enabling binary input and function link

of a protective element is configured according to each bay is set as
62PD.BI_Blk
Binary input of disabling PD protection
3-52

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.10-2 Output signals of pole disagreement protection
No.
1
Signal
Description
@Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp
PD protection of bay n operates

Alarm signal indicating that PD protection FD element of bay n picks up
@Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp
for over 10s (i.e. pole disagreement binary input of bay n

[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD] is energized for over 10s)
3.10.6 Settings
Protection Settings
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsPD Settings

Table 3.10-3 PD protection settings
No.
Name
Range
Remark
Step
Bayn.62PD.3I0_Set
0.05In~20.00In
0.01A
Bayn.62PD.I2_Set
0.05In~20.00In
0.01A
Bayn.62PD.t_Op
0.00~10.00s
0.01s
Residual current setting for PD protection

Negative-sequence current setting for PD
protection
Time delay of PD protection
Logic setting of PD protection of bay n, it is
configured
when
the
basic
information

4
Bayn.62PD.En
0, 1
element is configured according to each bay

is set as Enable (refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling PD protection of bay n
0: Disabling PD protection of bay n
Logic setting of PD protection, it is configured
when the basic information configuration
Logic setting of a protective element is
62PD.En
0, 1
configured according to each bay is set as

Disable (refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling PD protection
0: Disabling PD protection
1: Enabling PD protection operates to initiate
62PD.En_Init50BF
0,1
BFP
0: Disabling PD protection operates to initiate
BFP

1.
[Bayn.62PD.3I0_Set]
It should be larger than maximum residual current under maximum fault level condition.
2.
[Bayn.62PD.I2_Set]
3-53

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
It should be greater than maximum unbalance negative sequence current under maximum fault
level condition.
3.
[Bayn.62PD.t_Op]
It should be greater than maximum inconsistent time of three phase interrupters when breaker is in
the process of being closed.
Function Link

Table 3.10-4 Function links of pole disagreement protection
No.
Symbol
Remark
Function link of enabling PD protection (it is configured when the
basic information configuration Enabling binary input and
62PD.Link
function link of a protective element is configured according to

each bay is set as Disable (refer to Section 3.4))
Function link of enabling PD protection of bay n (it is configured
when the basic information configuration Enabling binary input
@Bayn.62PD.Link
and function link of a protective element is configured according

to each bay is set as Enable (refer to Section 3.4))
For pole disagreement protection, the relation is AND among the enabling function link, the
3.11 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection (BFP)

NOTICE!
In Section 3.11, @BBx is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar.
For a bus coupler bay, @BCy is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus
coupler. For a bus section bay, @BSz is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus section.
PCS-915 provides independent FD element for BC/BS BFP, if any of the following conditions is
fulfilled, FD element for BC/BS BFP (@BCy.50BF.FD or @BSz.50BF.FD) picks up, the positive
supply to the output relays is then available and wait for the tripping signal from BC/BS BFP. The
3-54

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off.
1.
BBP operates to trip BC/BS
2.
Breaker failure initiating (BFI) binary inputs [@BCy.BI_BFI]/[@BSz.BI_BFI] and common BFI
binary input [@BCy.BI_ChkBFI]/[@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] are energized at the same time
3.
BC/BS overcurrent protection operates (controlled by the logic setting [50/51.En_Init50BF])
4.
BC/BS pole disagreement

[62PD.En_Init50BF])
protection
operates
(controlled
by
the
logic
setting
BFI binary input [@BCy.BI_BFI]/[@BSz.BI_BFI] can be connected to an external tripping contact.

[@BCy.BI_ChkBFI]/[@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] is a common BFI binary input, it will be energized if
[@BCy.BI_BFI]/[@BSz.BI_BFI] is energized.
When tripping signal has been delivered to BC/BS breaker, while the breaker is failed to open
checked by the BC/BS current check element setting [BC.50BF.I_Set], BFP will operate to trip all
feeders connected to the two busbars (connected with the faulty BC/BS) after time delay of
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]. BC/BS breaker failure protection is controlled by voltage controlled element of
BBP (Please refer to Section 3.5.2.2) if busbar voltage is available and applied.
For the occasion that BS is at the edge of the protected zone, such as BS1 and BS2 in Figure
3.2-9, BS breaker failure initiating (BFI) logic is applied and it can output a contact to energize the
breaker failure initiating binary inputs [@BSz.BI_BFI] and [@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] of another PCS-915.
Takes BS1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example, for PCS-915-A, if differential element of BB1 operates
and BS current of any phase is larger than 0.04In, the BS breaker failure initiating contact will
operate and it can energize the binary inputs [@BSz.BI_BFI] and [@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] of
PCS-915-B.
Ia_BS1>0.04In
1
Ib_BS1>0.04In
Ic_BS1>0.04In
&
@BS1.BO_BFI
Diff_BB1
Figure 3.11-1 The logic scheme of BFI of BS
Where:
[@BSz.BO_BFI]: BS1 breaker failure initiating contact operates, it can be used to energize the
binary input [@BSz.BI_BFI] and [@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] of another PCS-915.
Ia_BS1: Phase A current of BS1.
Ib_BS1: Phase B current of BS1.
3-55

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Ic_BS1: Phase C current of BS1.

Diff_BB1: Differential element of BB1 (not controlled by VEC_BBP) operates, please refer to
Figure 3.5-5.
The logic scheme of BFI of BS2 is similar to it.
BC/BS 50BF
@BCy.BI_BFI
@BCy.50BF.Op_TrpBB
@BCy.BI_ChkBFI
50BF.Op_Trp@BBx
@BCy.Alm_BI_BFI
@BCy.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
87B.Op_Trp@BCy
@BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp
@BCy.50/51P.Op_Trp
BO_BFI_@BSz
@BCy.50/51G.Op_Trp
50BF.Op
@BCy.62PD.Op_Trp
3.11.4 Logic
The logic of BC BFP is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an example).
SIG
Voltage_Rls_BBP 1
SET
Ia_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]
SET
Ib_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]
SET
Ic_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]
SIG
87B.Op_Trp@BC1
EN
[62PD.En_Init50BF]
SIG
@BC1.62PD.Op_Trp
EN
[50/51.En_Init50BF]
&
@BC1.50BF.Op_TrpBB
&
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
50BF.Op_Trp@BB1
&
SIG
BI
@BC1.50/51.Op_Trp
&
@BC1.50BF.Op_TrpBB
[@BC1.BI_BFI]
&
BI
[@BC1.BI_ChkBFI]
SIG
Voltage_Rls_BBP 2
&
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
50BF.Op_Trp@BB2
@BC1.50BF.FD
Figure 3.11-2 Logic of BC/BS BFP
Where:
@BC1.50BF.FD: FD element for BC1 BFP picks up
3-56

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
@BC1.50/51.Op_Trp: Phase overcurrent protection or ground overcurrent protection of BC1
operates ([@BC1.50/51P.Op_Trp] or [@BC1.50/51G.Op_Trp]).
For the occasion that BS is at the edge of the protected zone, such as BS1 and BS2 in Figure
3.2-9, the logic of BS BFP is shown as follows (Takes BS1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example).
SIG
Voltage_Rls_BBP 1
SET
Ia_BS1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]
SET
Ib_BS1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]
SET
Ic_BS1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]
SIG
87B.Op_Trp@BS1
EN
[62PD.En_Init50BF]
SIG
@BS1.62PD.Op_Trp
EN
[50/51.En_Init50BF]
&
@BS1.50BF.Op_TrpBB
&
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
50BF.Op_Trp@BB1
&
SIG
@BS1.50/51.Op_Trp
&
1
BI
[@BS1.BI_BFI]
BI
[@BS1.BI_ChkBFI]
&
@BS1.50BF.FD
Figure 3.11-3 Logic of BS BFP (BS is at the edge of the protected zone)
Where:
@BS1.50BF.FD: FD element for BS1 BFP picks up
@BS1.50/51.Op_Trp: Phase overcurrent protection or ground overcurrent protection of BSz
operates ([@BS1.50/51P.Op_Trp] or [@BS1.50/51G.Op_Trp]).
3.11.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.11-1 Input signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection
No.
Signal
Description
87B.Op_Trp@BCy
87B.Op_Trp@BSz
@BCy.50/51P.Op_Trp
Phase overcurrent protection of BCy operates
@BCy.50/51G.Op_Trp
Ground overcurrent protection of BCy operates

3-57

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
5
@BSz.50/51P.Op_Trp
Phase overcurrent protection of BSz operates
@BSz.50/51G.Op_Trp
Ground overcurrent protection of BSz operates
@BCy.62PD.Op_Trp
Pole disagreement protection of BCy operates
@BSz.62PD.Op_Trp
Pole disagreement protection of BSz operates
@BCy.BI_BFI
BFI binary input of BCy
10
@BCy.BI_ChkBFI
Common BFI binary input of BCy
11
@BSz.BI_BFI
BFI binary input of BSz
12
@BSz.BI_ChkBFI
Common BFI binary input of BSz
Table 3.11-2 Output signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection

No.
Signal
Description
@BCy.50BF.Op_TrpBB
BCy BFP operates to trip busbar zone
@BSz.50BF.Op_TrpBB
BSz BFP operates to trip busbar zone
50BF.Op_Trp@BBx
BFP operates to trip BBx
50BF.Op
BC/BS BFP or feeder BFP operates
@BCy.Alm_BI_BFI
@BSz.Alm_BI_BFI
@BCy.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
@BSz.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
@BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp
10
@BSz.50BF.Alm_Pkp
11
@BSz.BO_BFI
Binary input of initiating BCy BFP (@BCy.BI_BFI) is energized for over

10s.
Binary input of initiating BSz BFP (@BSz.BI_BFI) is energized for over
10s.
The common initiating contact of BFP of BCy (@BCy.BI_ChkBFI) is
continually energized for over 10s
The common initiating contact of BFP of BSz (@BSz.BI_ChkBFI) is
continually energized for over 10s
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BCy BFP picks up for over
10s
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BSz BFP picks up for over
10s
BSz breaker failure initiating contact operates
3.11.6 Settings
BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsBC BFP Settings

Table 3.11-3 BC/BS breaker failure protection settings
No.
Name
Range
Step
Remark
BC.50BF.I_Set
0.05In ~20.00In
0.01A
Current setting for BC/BS BFP
BC.50BF.t_TrpBB
0.00~10.00s
0.01s
Time delay of BC/BS BFP

3-58

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
1.
[BC.50BF.I_Set]
It should be set as minimum fault current flowing through BC breaker. The change of power
system topology can influence the fault current after BBP operating.
2.
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
It should be larger than the maximal arc-extinguishing time of BC breaker.
3.12 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection (BFP)

NOTICE!
settings.
In Section 3.12, for a feeder bay, @Bayn is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding feeder bay.
Feeder breaker failure protection is provided for each feeder bay. PCS-915 provides independent
FD element for feeder BFP, if any of the following conditions is fulfilled, FD element for feeder bay
n BFP picks up (@Bayn.50BF.FD), the positive supply to the output relays is then available and
wait for the tripping signal from feeder BFP. The fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after
the fault detector element drop off.
1.
BBP operates to trip feeder bay n (controlled by the logic setting [87B.En_Init50BF])
2.
Breaker failure initiating (BFI) binary input (Phase-segregated or three-phase tripping contact)
and common BFI binary input [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] of feeder bay n are energized.
3.
Overcurrent protection of feeder bay n operates (controlled by the logic setting

[50/51.En_Init50BF])
4.
Pole disagreement protection of feeder bay n operates (controlled by the logic setting
[62PD.En_Init50BF])

Breaker failure protection is available for each feeder bay. When a breaker is determined failure to
trip, the BFP will operate to re-trip the breaker after time delay of [50BF.t_ReTrp] (If Breaker
failure protection re-tripping function in protective function configuration is set as Enable (refer to
Section 3.4) and the logic setting [50BF.En_ReTrp] is set as 1). If the fault is still existed, the
breaker failure protection will trip BC after time delay of [50BF.t_TrpBC] and all feeders after time
delay of [50BF.t_TrpBB]. BFP also provides the function to transfer trip the breaker of the remote
end of a line or intertrip the breakers on other sides of a main-transformer with the time delay of
[50BF.t_TrpBB].
3-59

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.12.2.1 BFI Binary Input

For each feeder bay, BFP can be initiated externally via binary inputs by phase-segregated
tripping contacts or three-phase tripping contacts of protective device for the corresponding feeder
bay.
1.
Phase-segregated tripping contact
[@Bayn.BI_A_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase A of feeder bay n
[@Bayn.BI_B_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase B of feeder bay n
[@Bayn.BI_C_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase C of feeder bay n
2.
Three-phase tripping contact
[@Bayn.BI_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of three phases of feeder bay n.
For a main-transformer bay, only three-phase breaker failure initiating (BFI) contact is provided.
3.12.2.2 Configuration of BFI Binary Input
If any BFI binary input (of BC/BS or any feeder bay) is configured for a binary input (BI) module,
binary inputs for other functions can not be configured for the BI module. BFI binary inputs of the
same bay must be configured for one BI module (i.e. [@Bayn.BI_A_BFI], [@Bayn.BI_B_BFI],
[@Bayn.BI_C_BFI] and [@Bayn.BI_BFI] can not be configured for two or more BI module).
[BI_COMMON] of BI module is an internal binary input, it will be energized if any other binary input
of the BI module is energized. [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] is the common BFI binary input. When users
configure BFI binary input via PCS-Explorer auxiliary software by themselves, all the common BFI
binary inputs of related bays must be configured to [BI_COMMON] of the BI module, so if any BFI
binary input of a BI module is energized, the common BFI binary inputs of related bays are
energized (refer to Section 9.5.2.1).
For example, if BFI binary inputs of bay 02~06 ([@Bayn.BI_A_BFI], [@Bayn.BI_B_BFI],
[@Bayn.BI_C_BFI] and [@Bayn.BI_BFI], n=02~06) are configured for one BI module, all the
common BFI binary inputs of related bays ([@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] (n=02~06)) must be configured to
[BI_COMMON] of the BI module, then if any BFI binary input of the BI module is energized, the
common BFI binary inputs of bay 02~06 [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] (n=02~06) will be energized.
3.12.2.3 Current Criterion
1.
Current criterion 1
Phase current is greater than the setting [Bayn.50BF.I_Set]

2.
Current criterion 2
Residual current is greater than the setting [Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set]

3.
Current criterion 3
Negative sequence current is greater than the setting i.e. [Bayn.50BF.I2_Set]
3-60

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
All these current criteria are controlled by the logic setting [50BF.En_Current_Ctrl], if this logic
setting is set as 0, it can be regarded as that all these current criteria are met.
Current criterion 2 and current criterion 3 are also controlled by the logic setting of
[Bayn.50BF.En_3I0] and [Bayn.50BF.En_I2] respectively.
NOTICE!
When calculating all the current setting of each bay, the primary current should be
converted to the secondary value according to the reference CT ratio instead of the
actual CT ratio of each bay.
3.12.2.4 Voltage Control Element of Breaker Failure Protection (VCE_BFP)
Voltage control element is used as an auxiliary condition.
The criteria are:
UP[50BF.VCE.U_Set]
Equation 3.12-1
3U0[50BF.VCE.3U0_Set]
Equation 3.12-2
U2[50BF.VCE.U2_Set]
Equation 3.12-3
Where:
UP: Phase voltage
3U0: Residual voltage
[50BF.VCE.U_Set]: Phase voltage setting for blocking BFP
[50BF.VCE.3U0_Set]: Residual voltage setting for blocking BFP
[50BF.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative sequence voltage setting for blocking BFP
When the protective device is applied to an unearthed system, i.e. the system setting
[Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as 1, the criteria of voltage control element will change.
UPP [50BF.VCE.U_Set]
Equation 3.12-4
U2 [50BF.VCE.U2_Set]
Equation 3.12-5
Where:
UPP: Phase-to-phase voltage
3-61

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
[50BF.VCE.U_Set]: Phase-to-phase voltage setting for blocking BFP

[50BF.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative voltage setting for blocking BFP
VCE_BFP will be controlled by the logic setting [50BF.VCE.En], if it is set as 0, VCE_BFP will be
disabled and feeder breaker failure protection will not controlled by VCE_BFP
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), VCE_BFP will quit and related settings will be hidden,
feeder breaker failure protection will not controlled by voltage element.
If the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as 0 (refer to Section 7.1), VCE_BFP is invalid no matter
the logic setting [50BF.VCE.En] is set as 1 or not, feeder breaker failure protection will not
controlled by voltage element.
Only if A: With voltage concerned functions is selected for Voltage Concerned Functions during
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as 1 and the logic
setting [50BF.VCE.En] is set as 1, VCE_BFP is enabled.
If the protective function configuration Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for
breaker failure protection is set as Enable (refer to Section 3.4), then if the logic setting
[Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE] is set as 1 and the releasing voltage controlled element binary input
[50BF.BI_RlsVCE] is energized, the voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection for
bay n will operate.
Feeder 50BF
@Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp
50BF.Op_@TrpBCy
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx
50BF.Op_@TrpBSz
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx
@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB
@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp
@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC
@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp
50BF.Op_Trp@BBx
@Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp
@Bayn.Op_TT
@Bayn.BI_BFI
@Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI
@Bayn.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI
@Bayn.BI_A_BFI
50BF.Alm_BI_RlsVCE
@Bayn.BI_B_BFI
50BF.Alm_Pkp
@Bayn.BI_C_BFI
50BF.Alm_Off
50BF.BI_RlsVCE
50BF.Op
87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC
50BF.BI_En
50BF.BI_Blk
3-62

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.12.4 Logic
The logic of feeder BFP is shown as follows.
EN
[87B.En_Init50BF]
SIG
BBP operates to trip bay n
EN
[62PD.En_Init50BF]
SIG
@Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp
EN
[50/51.En_Init50BF]
SIG
@Bayn.50/51.Op_Trp
BI
[@Bayn.BI_BFI]
BI
[@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI]
&
&
>=1
&
&
&
>=1
SET
Ia_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set]
BI
[@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI]
BI
[@Bayn.BI_A_BFI]
SET
&
&
Ib_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set]
BI
[@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI]
BI
[@Bayn.BI_B_BFI]
SET
>=1
&
&
Ic_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set]
BI
[@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI]
BI
[@Bayn.BI_C_BFI]
EN
[50BF.En_Current_Ctrl]
&
&
&
>=1
>=1
&
EN
[Bayn.50BF.En_3I0]
SET
3I0_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set]
EN
[Bayn.50BF.En_I2]
SET
I2_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I2_Set]
&
>=1
&
&
@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB
&
@Bayn.50BF.FD
&
@Bayn.Op_TT
[50BF.t_TrpBB]
50BF.Op_Trp@BBx
[50BF.t_TrpBC]
50BF.Op_Trp@BC
&
SIG
50BF is enabled
SIG
VCE_BFP x
SIG
VCE_BFP is disabled
BI
[50BF.BI_RlsVCE]
EN
Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE
SIG
Disconnector position of BBx
EN
[50BF.En_ReTrp]
@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC
&
1
[50BF.t_ReTrp]
@Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp
&
&
Figure 3.12-1 Logic of feeder BFP
Where:
@Bayn.50/51.Op_Trp: Phase overcurrent protection or ground overcurrent protection of bay n
3-63

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
operates ([@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp] or [@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp]).

50BF is enabled: busbar differential protection is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input
[50BF.BI_En] is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input [50BF.BI_Blk] is de-energized
and the corresponding enabling function link [50BF.Link] and logic setting [50BF.En] are set as
1).
VCE_BFP x: Voltage controlled element for BFP of any connected BBx, please refer to Section
3.12.2.4.
VCE_BFP is disabled: B: Without voltage concerned functions is selected for Voltage Concerned
Functions during MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3) or the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is
set as 0 or the logic setting [50BF.VCE.En] is set as 0.
Disconnector position of BBx: which busbar the bay is connected to (according to disconnector
position of the bay).
@Bayn.50BF.FD: FD element for feeder bay n BFP picks up.
3I0_Bayn: The residual current of bay n.
I2_Bayn: The negative sequence current of bay n.
Ia_Bayn: The phase A current of bay n.
Ib_Bayn: The phase B current of bay n.
Ic_Bayn: The phase C current of bay n.
3.12.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.12-1 Input signals of feeder breaker failure protection
No.
Signal
Description
50BF.BI_En
Binary input of enabling feeder BFP
50BF.BI_Blk
Binary input of disabling feeder BFP
@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp
Phase overcurrent protection of bay n operates
@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp
Ground overcurrent protection of bay n operates
@Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp
Pole disagreement protection of bay n operates
@Bayn.BI_BFI
Three-phase BFI binary input of bay n
@Bayn.BI_A_BFI
Phase-A BFI binary input of bay n
@Bayn.BI_B_BFI
Phase-B BFI binary input of bay n
@Bayn.BI_C_BFI
Phase-C BFI binary input of bay n
10
@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI
Common BFI binary input of bay n
11
50BF.BI_RlsVCE
Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker

failure protection
3-64

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.12-2 Output signals of feeder breaker failure protection
No.
Signal
Description
@Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp
BFP of bay n operates to re-trip the feeder breaker
50BF.Op_Trp@BCy
BFP operates to trip BCy breaker
50BF.Op_Trp@BSz
BFP operates to trip BSz breaker
50BF.Op_Trp@BBx
BFP operates to trip BBx
@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB
BFP of bay n operates to trip busbar zone
@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC
BFP of bay n operates to trip BC/BS
50BF.Op
BC/BS BFP or feeder BFP operates
@Bayn.Op_TT
DZP or BFP of bay n operates to initiate transfer trip to remote

circuit breaker
Binary
@Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI
input
of
initiating
contact
of
BFP
of
bay
(BI_A_BFI_@Bayn, BI_B_BFI_@Bayn, BI_C_BFI_@Bayn or

BI_BFI_@Bayn) is energized for over 10s.
10
@Bayn.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
11
50BF.Alm_BI_RlsVCE
12
50BF.Alm_Pkp
The
common
initiating
contact
of
BFP
of
bay
(@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI) is continually energized for over 10s

Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker
failure protection is energized for over 10s.
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BFP of any bay picks
up for over 10s
Alarm signal indicating feeder BFP is disabled. If the logic setting
[50BF.En_Alm_Off] is set as 1, once feeder BFP is disabled
13
50BF.Alm_Off
(feeder BFP can be disabled by the corresponding enabling

binary input, function link or enabling logic setting), the alarm
signal indicating feeder BFP is disabled will be issued
3.12.6 Settings
Feeder Breaker Failure Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsFdr BFP Settings

Table 3.12-3 Feeder breaker failure protection settings
No.
Name
Range
Step
50BF.t_ReTrp
0.00~10.00s
0.01s
50BF.t_TrpBC
0.00~10.00s
0.01s
50BF.t_TrpBB
0.00~10.00s
0.01s
50BF.VCE.U_Set
0~Un
0.01V
Remark
Time delay of feeder BFP operating
to re-trip breaker
to trip BC breaker
to trip busbar zone
Under voltage setting of VCE of
3-65

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
No.
Name
Range
Step
Remark
BFP
50BF.VCE.3U0_Set
0~Un
0.01V
50BF.VCE.U2_Set
0~Un
0.01V
Bayn.50BF.I_Set
0.05In ~20.00In
0.01A
Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set
0.05In ~20.00In
0.01A
Bayn.50BF.I2_Set
0.05In ~20.00In
0.01A
10
Bayn.50BF.En_3I0
0, 1
11
Bayn.50BF.En_I2
0, 1
Residual voltage setting of VCE of

BFP
Negative-sequence voltage setting
of VCE of BFP
Phase current setting of BFP of bay
n
Residual current setting of BFP of
bay n
Negative sequence current setting
of BFP of bay n
Residual current criterion of BFP of
bay n is enabled or not
Negative sequence current criterion
of BFP of bay n is enabled or not
1: the binary input of releasing
voltage
controlled
element
for
breaker failure protection is enabled

12
Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE
0, 1
0: the binary input of releasing

voltage
controlled
breaker
failure
element
for
protection
is
disabled
Logic setting of breaker failure
protection
13
50BF.En
0, 1
1: Enabling feeder breaker failure

protection
0: Disabling feeder breaker failure
protection
1: Alarm signal will be issued if
14
50BF.En_Alm_Off
0,1
feeder BFP is disabled

0: Alarm signal will not be issued if
feeder BFP is disabled
15
50BF.En_Current_Ctrl
0, 1
Current criterion of BFP is enabled

or not
1: Enabling re-tripping function for
16
50BF.En_ReTrp
0,1
feeder breaker failure protection

0: Disabling re-tripping function for
feeder breaker failure protection
17
50BF.VCE.En
0, 1
3-66
1: BFP is controlled by VCE of BFP

0: BFP is not controlled by VCE of

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
No.
Name
Range
Step
Remark
BFP

1.
[50BF.t_ReTrp]
It should be larger than 100ms and smaller than the setting [50BF.t_TrpBC]. The recommended
value is 0.15s. The function of re-tripping target breaker can be disabled if it is set the same as
[50BF.t_TrpBC].
2.
[50BF.t_TrpBC]
It should be larger than the sum of operating time of breaker and reset time of protective device
with certain margin. The recommended value is 250ms~350ms.
3.
[50BF.t_TrpBB]
On the premise that BC breaker is tripped, the value of [50BF.t_TrpBB] should be greater than the
sum of operating time of BC breaker and reset time of protective device with certain margin. It
should be as short as possible on the premise of losing selectivity. The recommended value is
500ms~600ms.
4.
[50BF.VCE.U_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when a symmetrical fault occurs at the remote
end of the longest feeder but not operate in the lowest operation voltage. After the fault is cleared,
the protective device can reset reliably. If the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as
1, the setting should be set as phase-to-phase voltage. Please refer to Section System Settings
in Chapter 7
5.
[50BF.VCE.3U0_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when an unsymmetrical fault occurs at the
remote end of the longest line. It should be larger than maximum residual voltage in normal
operation mode. It is invalid if the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as 1.
6.
[50BF.VCE.U2_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when an unsymmetrical fault occurs at the
remote end of the longest line. It should be larger than maximum negative sequence voltage in
normal operation mode.
7.
[Bayn.50BF.I_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is a fault occurring at the remote end
of feeder or in LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be greater than
maximum load under maximum fault level condition. In case of complying maximum load current
will not meet the sensitivity requirement, sensitivity requirement has the priority.
8.
[Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set]
3-67

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is an earth fault occurring at the
remote end of line or LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be greater
than the maximum residual current in normal operation mode.
9.
[Bayn.50BF.I2_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is a phase-to-phase fault occurring at
the remote end of line or LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be
greater than the maximum negative sequence current in normal operation mode.
10.
[Bayn.50BF.En_3I0]
In order to improve the sensitivity of current criterion for asymmetric fault, this setting should be set
as 1. Especially for transformer or transmission line adopting phase-segregated tripping logic.
11.
[Bayn.50BF.En_I2]
In order to improve the sensitivity of current criterion for asymmetric fault, this setting should be set
as 1. Especially for transformer or transmission line adopting phase-segregated tripping logic.
Function Link

Table 3.12-4 Function links of feeder breaker failure protection
No.
1
Symbol
50BF.Link
Remark
1: Enabling feeder breaker failure protection
0: Disabling feeder breaker failure protection
For feeder breaker failure protection, the relation is AND among the function link [50BF.Link], the
corresponding enabling binary input [50BF.BI_En] and the corresponding logic setting [50BF.En].
3.13 CT Circuit Supervision

3.13.1.1 CT Circuit Failure
1.
If the check zone differential current of one phase is larger than the setting [I_AlmH_CTS], CT
circuit failure alarm of corresponding phase [AlmH_CTS_X] (X=A, B or C) will be issued and
BBP of corresponding phase will be blocked (if the logic setting [87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as
1) with a time delay of 5s. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as 1, the
alarm can be reset automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition. If the logic
setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as 0, the alarm can not be reset automatically
after the CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset by energizing the resetting
binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing ESC first then ENT simultaneously (ESC and ENT
are two keypads on the front of the device) after the CT circuit returns to normal condition.
2.
For the BC/BS that only one CT is available, if the check zone differential current of one phase
is smaller than the setting [I_AlmH_CTS] and both discriminating zone differential currents of
3-68

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
the phase of the two connected busbars are larger than [I_AlmH_CTS], BC/BS CT circuit
failure alarm signal of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmH_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmH_CTS_X] will
be issued with a time delay of 5s and BBP will not be blocked, but the inter-connected
operation mode will be enabled automatically. Under this situation, if any internal fault occurs
on any of the two connected busbars, the device will not identify the faulty busbar. If the logic
setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as 1, the alarm can be reset automatically after
the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition. If the logic setting
[En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as 0, the alarm can not be reset automatically after the
BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset only by energizing the resetting
binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing ESC first then ENT simultaneously (ESC and ENT
are two keypads on the front of the device) after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal
condition.
3.
For the BC/BS that double CTs are available, if the check zone differential current of one
phase is smaller than the setting [I_AlmH_CTS] and discriminating zone differential current of
the phase of any connected busbar is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS], if the discriminating zone
differential current equals to the difference of current between the two CTs, BC/BS CT circuit
failure alarm signal of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmH_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmH_CTS_X] will
be issued with a time delay of 5s and BBP of the busbar (of which the discriminating zone
differential current of the phase is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS]) of corresponding phase will be
blocked.
When A: With voltage concerned functions is selected for Voltage Concerned Functions during
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3) and VT circuit failure is not detected, CT circuit
supervision will cease if VCE of any busbar operates. If B: Without voltage concerned functions
is selected for Voltage Concerned Functions during MOT configuration, CT circuit supervision will
not be affected by voltage.
3.13.1.2 CT Circuit Abnormality
1.
If the check zone differential current of one phase is larger than the setting i.e. [I_AlmL_CTS],
CT circuit abnormality alarm of corresponding phase [AlmL_CTS_X] (X=A, B or C) will be
issued with a time delay of 5s. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as 1,
the alarm can be reset automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition. If the
logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as 0, the alarm can not be reset
automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset only by energizing
the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing ESC first then ENT simultaneously
(ESC and ENT are two keypads on the front of the device) after the CT circuit returns to
normal condition.
2.
For the BC/BS that only one CT is available, if the check zone differential current of one phase
is smaller than the setting [I_AlmL_CTS] and both discriminating zone currents of the phase
of the two connected busbars are larger than [I_AlmL_CTS], BC/BS CT circuit abnormality
alarm of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmL_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmL_CTS_X] will be issued
with a time delay of 5s. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as 1, BC/BS
CT circuit abnormality can be reset automatically after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal
condition. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as 0, the alarm can not be
3-69

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
reset automatically after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset only
by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing ESC first then ENT
simultaneously (ESC and ENT are two keypads on the front of the device) after the BC/BS
CT circuit returns to normal condition.
3.
For the BC/BS that double CTs are available, if the check zone differential current of one
phase is smaller than the setting [I_AlmL_CTS] and discriminating zone differential current of
the phase of any connected busbar is larger than [I_AlmL_CTS], if the discriminating zone
differential current equals to the difference of current between the two CTs, BC/BS CT circuit
abnormality alarm of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmL_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmL_CTS_X] will
be issued with a time delay of 5s.
4.
BBP will not be blocked when CT circuit is abnormal.
3.13.1.3 Discriminating Zone Differential Current High/Low Value Alarm (When Double CTs
are Available for BC/BS)
1.
If discriminating zone differential current of BBx is larger than [I_AlmL_CTS], BBx differential
current low value alarm signal [@BBx.AlmL_Diff] will be issued with a time delay of 5s. If the
logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as 1, the alarm can be reset automatically
after the discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition. If the logic setting
[En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as 0, the alarm can not be reset automatically after the
discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition, it can be reset only by
energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing ESC first then ENT
simultaneously (ESC and ENT are two keypads on the front of the device) after the
discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition.
2.
If discriminating zone differential current of BBx is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS], BBx differential
current high value alarm signal [@BBx.AlmH_Diff] will be issued with a time delay of 5s and
discriminating zone differential circuit of BBx will be blocked (if the logic setting
[87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as 1). If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as 1,
the alarm can be reset automatically after the discriminating zone differential current returns
to normal condition. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as 0, the alarm
can not be reset automatically after the discriminating zone differential current returns to
normal condition, it can be reset by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or
pressing ESC first then ENT simultaneously (ESC and ENT are two keypads on the
front of the device) after the discriminating zone differential current returns to normal
condition.
NOTICE!
Logic execution priority: check zone CT circuit failure alarm logic > single-CT BC/BS CT
circuit failure alarm to enable inter-connected operation mode logic > discriminating
zone differential current high value alarm logic.
3-70

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

CTS
AlmH_CTS_X
@BCy.AlmH_CTS_X
AlmL_CTS_X
@BCy.AlmL_CTS_X
@BBx.AlmH_Diff
@BBx.AlmL_Diff
@BSz.AlmH_CTS_X
@BSz.AlmL_CTS_X
X=A, B or C
3.13.3 Logic
SET
Ida_CZ>[I_AlmH_CTS]
SET
Idb_CZ>[I_AlmH_CTS]
SET
Idc_CZ>[I_AlmH_CTS]
5000ms 0
5000ms 0
5000ms 0
AlmH_CTS_A
AlmH_CTS_B
AlmH_CTS_C
Figure 3.13-1 Logic of CT circuit failure
Where:
Ida_CZ: Phase-A check zone differential current
Idb_CZ: Phase-B check zone differential current
Idc_CZ: Phase-C check zone differential current
I_AlmH_CTS: Current setting of CT circuit failure
AlmH_CTS_A: Phase-A CT circuit failure alarm signal, BBP of phase-A will be blocked by it if the
logic setting [87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as 1.
AlmH_CTS_B: Phase-B CT circuit failure alarm signal, BBP of phase-B will be blocked by it if the
AlmH_CTS_C: Phase-C CT circuit failure alarm signal, BBP of phase-C will be blocked by it if the
When double CTs are available for BC/BS, the following logic will be enabled.
3-71

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SET
Ida_BBx>[I_AlmH_CTS]
SET
Idb_BBx>[I_AlmH_CTS]
SET
Idc_BBx>[I_AlmH_CTS]
5000ms 0
@BBx.AlmH_Diff
Figure 3.13-2 Logic of BBx differential current high value alarm
Where:
Ida_BBx: Phase-A discriminative differential current of BBx
Idb_BBx: Phase-B discriminative differential current of BBx
Idc_BBx: Phase-C discriminative differential current of BBx
@BBx.AlmH_Diff: BBx differential current high value alarm signal, individual zones of busbar
differential protection will be blocked by differential current high value alarm of respective zones.
The logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available) is shown as
follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an example).
SET
Ida_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
SET
Ida_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS]
&
5000ms 0
@BC1.AlmH_CTS_A
&
SET
SET
Idb_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
SET
Idb_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS]
&
5000ms 0
@BC1.AlmH_CTS_B
&
SET
SET
Idc_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
SET
Idc_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS]
&
5000ms 0
@BC1.AlmH_CTS_C
&
SET
Figure 3.13-3 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available)
Where:
Ida_BB1: Phase-A discriminative differential current of BB1
Idb_BB1: Phase-B discriminative differential current of BB1
Idc_BB1: Phase-C discriminative differential current of BB1
3-72

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

@BC1.AlmH_CTS_A: BC1 phase-A CT circuit failure.
@BC1.AlmH_CTS_B: BC1 phase-B CT circuit failure.
@BC1.AlmH_CTS_C: BC1 phase-C CT circuit failure.
The logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available) is shown as
follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example).
SET
Ida_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
SET
&
SIG
Ida_BB1=Ia_BC1_CT1-Ia_BC1_CT2
&
5s
5s
5s
@BC1.AlmH_CTS_A
1
SET
&
SIG
SET
Idb_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
SET
&
SIG
Idb_BB1=Ib_BC1_CT1-Ib_BC1_CT2
&
@BC1.AlmH_CTS_B
1
SET
SIG
SET
Idc_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
SET
&
&
SIG
Idc_BB1=Ic_BC1_CT1-Ic_BC1_CT2
&
@BC1.AlmH_CTS_C
1
SET
SIG
&
Figure 3.13-4 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available)
Where:
Ia_BC1_CT1: Phase-A current of CT1 of BC1
Ib_BC1_CT1: Phase-B current of CT1 of BC1
Ic_BC1_CT1: Phase-C current of CT1 of BC1
Ia_BC1_CT2: Phase-A current of CT2 of BC1
3-73

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Ib_BC1_CT2: Phase-B current of CT2 of BC1

Ic_BC1_CT2: Phase-C current of CT2 of BC1
SET
Ida_CZ>[I_AlmL_CTS]
SET
Idb_CZ>[I_AlmL_CTS]
SET
Idc_CZ>[I_AlmL_CTS]
5000ms 0
5000ms 0
5000ms 0
AlmL_CTS_A
AlmL_CTS_B
AlmL_CTS_C
Figure 3.13-5 Logic of CT circuit abnormality
Where:
I_AlmL_CTS: Current setting of CT circuit abnormality
AlmL_CTS_A: Phase-A CT circuit abnormality
AlmL_CTS_B: Phase-B CT circuit abnormality
AlmL_CTS_C: Phase-C CT circuit abnormality
The logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available) is shown
as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an example).
3-74

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SET
Ida_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
SET
Ida_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS]
&
5000ms 0
@BC1.AlmL_CTS_A
&
SET
SET
Idb_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
SET
Idb_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS]
SET
SET
Idc_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
SET
Idc_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS]
&
5000ms 0
@BC1.AlmL_CTS_B
&
&
5000ms 0
@BC1.AlmL_CTS_C
&
SET
Figure 3.13-6 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available)
Where:
@BC1.AlmL_CTS_A: BC1 phase-A CT circuit abnormality
@BC1.AlmL_CTS_B: BC1 phase-B CT circuit abnormality
@BC1.AlmL_CTS_C: BC1 phase-C CT circuit abnormality
The logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available) is shown
as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example).
3-75

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SET
Ida_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
SET
&
SIG
&
5s
5s
5s
@BC1.AlmL_CTS_A
1
SET
&
SIG
SET
Idb_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
SET
SIG
&
&
@BC1.AlmL_CTS_B
1
SET
SIG
SET
Idc_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
SET
SIG
&
&
&
@BC1.AlmL_CTS_C
1
SET
SIG
&
Figure 3.13-7 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available)
3.13.4 I/O Signal

Table 3.13-1 Output signal of CT circuit supervision
No.
Signal
Description
AlmH_CTS
CT circuit failure
AlmH_CTS_A
Phase-A CT circuit failure
AlmH_CTS_B
Phase-B CT circuit failure
AlmH_CTS_C
Phase-C CT circuit failure
@BCy.AlmH_CTS
BCy CT circuit failure
@BCy.AlmH_CTS_A
BCy phase-A CT circuit failure
@BCy.AlmH_CTS_B
BCy phase-B CT circuit failure
@BCy.AlmH_CTS_C
BCy phase-C CT circuit failure
@BSz.AlmH_CTS
BSz CT circuit failure
10
@BSz.AlmH_CTS_A
BSz phase-A CT circuit failure
11
@BSz.AlmH_CTS_B
BSz phase-B CT circuit failure
12
@BSz.AlmH_CTS_C
BSz phase-C CT circuit failure
3-76

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
13
AlmL_CTS
CT circuit abnormality
14
AlmL_CTS_A
Phase-A CT circuit abnormality
15
AlmL_CTS_B
Phase-B CT circuit abnormality
16
AlmL_CTS_C
Phase-C CT circuit abnormality
17
@BCy.AlmL_CTS
BCy CT circuit abnormality
18
@BCy.AlmL_CTS_A
BCy phase-A CT circuit abnormality
19
@BCy.AlmL_CTS_B
BCy phase-B CT circuit abnormality
20
@BCy.AlmL_CTS_C
BCy phase-C CT circuit abnormality
21
@BSz.AlmL_CTS
BSz CT circuit abnormality
22
@BSz.AlmL_CTS_A
BSz phase-A CT circuit abnormality
23
@BSz.AlmL_CTS_B
BSz phase-B CT circuit abnormality
24
@BSz.AlmL_CTS_C
BSz phase-C CT circuit abnormality
25
@BBx.AlmH_Diff
BBx differential current high value alarm
26
@BBx.AlmL_Diff
BBx differential current low value alarm
3.14 VT Circuit Supervision

1.
If negative sequence voltage (U2) of BBx is larger than 0.04Unn (Unn: secondary rated
phase-to-phase voltage of VT) and fault detector element does not pick up, an alarm
[@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be issued with a time delay of 1.25s.
2.
If BBx is in service and the scalar sum of three phase-voltage (|UA|+|UB|+|UC|) of BBx is
smaller than Un (Un: secondary rated phase-to-ground voltage of VT) and fault detector
element does not pick up, an alarm [@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be issued with a time delay of
1.25s.
3.
When the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as 1, if busbar negative

sequence voltage (U2) is larger than 0.04Unn, or any phase-to-phase voltage is smaller than
0.7Unn, an alarm [Alm_VTS_BB1] or [Alm_VTS_BB2] will be issued with a time delay of 1.25s.
If VT circuit failure is detected, DPFC voltage FD element will be disabled. When the three
phase-voltage returns to normal condition, the alarm [@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be reset automatically
with a time delay of 10s.
If the fault detector element picks up due to a disturbance in the system (DPFC current is
detected), the VT circuit supervision will be disabled for 3s.
3-77

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

VTS
@BBx.Alm_VTS
3.14.3 Logic
SIG
Ua>0.7Un
SIG
Ub>0.7Un
SIG
Uc>0.7Un
SIG
I_Bayn>0.04In
SIG
EN
BBx is in service
&
Ua + Ub + Uc <
Un
[Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode]
SIG
Uab<0.7Unn
SIG
Ubc<0.7Unn
SIG
Uca<0.7Unn
SIG
U2>0.04Unn
SIG
1.25s 10s
&
&
@BBx.Alm_VTS
Any FD element picks up
Figure 3.14-1 Logic of VT circuit failure
Where:
Ua: Phase-A voltage of BBx
Ub: Phase-B voltage of BBx
Uc: Phase-C voltage of BBx
Uab, Ubc, Uca: Phase-to-phase voltage of BBx
U2: Negative-sequence voltage of BBx
Un: The rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT
Unn: The rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage of VT
I_Bayn: Any phase current of any feeder bay connected to BBx
In: The rated secondary current of reference CT
Any FD element picks up: Any fault detector element picks up
@BBx.Alm_VTS: BBx VT circuit failure
3-78

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.14.4 I/O Signal

Table 3.14-1 Output signal of VT circuit supervision
No.
1
Signal
@BBx.Alm_VTS
Description
BBx VT circuit failure
3.15 Position of Disconnector and Circuit Breaker

NOTICE!
In Section 3.15, @BBx is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar
and @Bayn is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay.
In a substation with double-busbar layout, feeders may be switched from one busbar to the other
busbar during operation. Thus it is necessary to identify the real time topology of busbar correctly.
PCS-915 offers disconnector positions element and self-diagnosis function to assist in identifying
the real time busbar topology.
If BBn disconnector and BBm disconnector of the same feeder are closed at the same time (nm),
an alarm signal [Alm_IntLink] will be issued simultaneously. If the two disconnectors returns to
normal condition, the alarm will reset automatically.
If an abnormality of disconnector position of bay n is detected, the disconnector position alarm
[@Bayn.Alm_DS] will be issued simultaneously in any of the following cases.
1.
Current is detected in a feeder but the feeder has no disconnector positions for dual busbars
(the two disconnectors that the feeder connect to the two busbar are open). In this case, the
protective device will use the latest disconnector position instead and its validity will be
checked based on the current distribution of the system.
2.
The discriminating zone differential current is larger than 0.08In and the check zone
differential current is smaller than 0.06In (In: the rated secondary current of reference CT) due
to one feeder of which the disconnector position is wrong, disconnector position alarm will be
issued and the device can identify the correct disconnector position based on the current
distribution of system. The logic diagram is shown in Figure 3.15-3.
If any disconnector position alarm is issued, if the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_DS] is set as 1
(refer to Section 3.5.6), once the abnormality of disconnector position disappears, the alarm will be
reset automatically. if the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_DS] is set as 0, the alarm can not be
reset unless energizing the disconnector position confirm binary input [BI_ConfirmDS] or carry out
the disconnector position confirming command by navigating the path Local Cmd->Confirm
Disconnector.
3-79

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Besides, in order to prevent the feeder from miss-operation caused by the lost of feeder
disconnector position, regardless which busbar zone does the fault occur in, the feeders of which
current is larger than 0.04*In (In: the rated secondary current of reference CT) but no disconnector
position can be detected will be tripped.
If dual-position BI for disconnector is disabled (refer to Section 3.3), only normally open auxiliary
contact of disconnector is used to identify the position status. If dual-position BI for circuit breaker
is disabled (refer to Section 3.3), only normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is used to
identify the position status. If dual-position BI for disconnector (circuit breaker) is enabled (refer to
Section 3.3), both normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of
disconnector (circuit breaker) are used to identify the position status.
If only normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is used to identify the position status,
once normally closed auxiliary contact connected binary input is energized, the corresponding
circuit breaker will be identified as open, otherwise it is closed.
If only normally open auxiliary contact of disconnector is used to identify the position status, once
normally open auxiliary contact connected binary input is energized, the corresponding
disconnector will be identified as closed, otherwise it is open.
If both normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of disconnector or
circuit breaker are used to identify the position status, the following tables show the principle.
Table 3.15-1 Position status of disconnector
Normally open auxiliary contact
Normally closed auxiliary
position status
contact
Open
Closed
the last valid memorized position
Closed
Table 3.15-2 Position status of circuit breaker
Normally open auxiliary contact
Normally closed auxiliary

contact
position status
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
If normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n circuit breaker is energized but current is still be
detected in corresponding bay n, an alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_52b] will be issued without blocking
the protective device.
If the enforced disconnector position link [@Bayn.Link_DS] is configured and it is set as 1, the
disconnector position will be decided by [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] and [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2], if
3-80

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
[@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] is set as 1, BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly, if

[@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2] is set as 1, BB2 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly.
When [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as 1, if [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] and [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2] are
set as 1 at the same time, an alarm signal [Alm_IntLink] will be issued.
If the enforced disconnector position link [@Bayn.Link_DS] is configured and it is set as 1,
[@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] and [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2] are all set as 0, but current is detected in
bay n, disconnector position alarm [@Bayn.Alm_DS] will be issued simultaneously.
If dual-position BI for circuit breaker is enabled (refer to Section 3.3), when circuit breaker of bay n
is in maintenance, the corresponding function link [@Bayn.Link_Maintenance] should be set as 1
and the circuit breaker will be regarded as open, otherwise the alarm signal
[@Bayn.Alm_52a&52b] will be issued once circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance. If
dual-position BI for circuit breaker is disabled, the function link [@Bayn.Link_Maintenance] is not
configured.
3.15.2 Logic
3.15.2.1 Inter-connection Mode Alarm Logic
BI
Bay n is connected to BB1
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1
&
BI
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1
&
SIG
&
Dual-position DS
BI
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BB2
BI
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BB2
Alm_IntLink1
&

&
Figure 3.15-1 Logic of inter-connection mode alarm
Where:
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1: Normally open auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector of bay n
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1: Normally closed auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector of bay n
Dual-position DS: Dual-position for disconnector status, it can be configured during MOT
configuration via PCS-Explorer software (refer to Section 3.3).
Alm_IntLink1: BB1 disconnector and BB2 disconnector of the same feeder are closed at the same
time
3-81

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.15.2.2 Disconnector Position Alarm Logic
SIG
Bayn DS position changes
EN
En_AutoRecov_DS
&
SIG
Bayn.Alm_DS
&
SIG
&
SIG
I_Bayn>0.04In
Figure 3.15-2 Logic of disconnector position alarm
Where:
Bayn DS position changes: Disconnector position of bay n changes (from open change to closed
or from closed change to open)
En_AutoRecov_DS: 1: Logic setting of busbar differential protection. When it is set as 1, if any
disconnector position alarm is issued, once the abnormality of disconnector position disappears,
the alarm will be reset automatically. When it is set as 0, if any disconnector position alarm is
issued, the alarm can not be reset unless energizing the disconnector position confirm binary input
[BI_ConfirmDS]
Bay n is connected to BB1, Bay n is connected to BB2: Please refer to the inter-connection mode
alarm logic
I_Bayn: Any phase current of feeder bay n
@Bayn.Alm_DS: Disconnector position of bay n is abnormal.
3.15.2.3 Disconnector Position Automatic Correction Logic
Takes BB1 as an example
3-82

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SIG
SIG
Ida_CZ<0.06In
SIG
Idb_CZ<0.06In
SIG
Idc_CZ<0.06In
SIG
Ida_BB1>0.08In
SIG
Idb_BB1>0.08In
SIG
Idc_BB1>0.08In
SIG
Ida_BB2<0.08In
SIG
Idb_BB2<0.08In
SIG
Idc_BB2<0.08In
SIG
Ia_Bayn=Ida_BB1
SIG
Ib_Bayn=Idb_BB1
SIG
Ic_Bayn=Idc_BB1
&
&
1
&
Bay n is identified connected to BB1
&
&
SIG
SIG
Figure 3.15-3 Logic of automatic correction of disconnector position
Where:
Ida_BB1 (Ida_BB2): Phase-A discriminating zone differential current of BB1 (BB2)
Idb_BB1 (Idb_BB2): Phase-B discriminating zone differential current of BB1 (BB2)
Idc_BB1 (Idc_BB2): Phase-C discriminating zone differential current of BB1 (BB2)
Ia_Bayn: Phase-A current of feeder bay n
Ib_Bayn: Phase-B current of feeder bay n
Ic_Bayn: Phase-C current of feeder bay n
Bay n is connected to BB1, Bay n is connected to BB2: Please refer to the inter-connection mode
alarm logic
3.15.2.4 Dual-Position Alarm Logic
Takes BB1 as an example
3-83

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SIG
BI
Dual-position DS
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1
&
BI
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1
BI
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1
BI
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1
SIG
Dual-position CB
BI
@Bayn.BI_52a
&
@Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BB1
&
@Bayn.Alm_52a&52b
&
&
BI
@Bayn.BI_52b
BI
@Bayn.BI_52a
&
BI
@Bayn.BI_52b
EN
@Bayn.Link_Maintenance
Figure 3.15-4 Logic of dual-position alarm
Where:
Dual-position DS: Dual-position for disconnector status, it can be configured during MOT
Dual-position CB: Dual-position for circuit breaker status, it can be configured during MOT
@Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BBx: Dual-position alarm for BB1 disconnector of bay n
@Bayn.BI_52a: Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n
@Bayn.BI_52b: Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n
@Bayn.Link_Maintenance: Logic link to indicate circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance
@Bayn.Alm_52a&52b: Dual-position alarm for circuit breaker of bay n
3.15.3 I/O Signal
Table 3.15-3 Input signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker
No.
Signal
Description
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx
3-84

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n. The input
3
@Bayn.BI_52a
signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker is enabled

(refer to Section 3.3) and Phase-segregated breaker position in basic
information configuration is set as disable (refer to Section 3.4).
Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n. The input
@Bayn.BI_52b
signal is only configured if Phase-segregated breaker position in basic

information configuration is set as disable (refer to Section 3.4).
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n.
@Bayn.BI_A_52a
The input signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker is

enabled (refer to Section 3.3) and Phase-segregated breaker position
in basic information configuration is set as Enable (refer to Section 3.4).
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n.
@Bayn.BI_B_52a
The input signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker is

enabled (refer to Section 3.3) and Phase-segregated breaker position
in basic information configuration is set as Enable (refer to Section 3.4).
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay
n. The input signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker
@Bayn.BI_C_52a
is enabled (refer to Section 3.3) and Phase-segregated breaker

position in basic information configuration is set as Enable (refer to
Section 3.4).
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n.
@Bayn.BI_A_52b
The input signal is only configured if Phase-segregated breaker

Section 3.4).
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n.
@Bayn.BI_B_52b

Section 3.4).
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n.
10
@Bayn.BI_C_52b

Section 3.4).
11
BI_ConfirmDS
Disconnector position confirm binary input
Table 3.15-4 Output signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker

No.
Signal
Description
@Bayn.Alm_DS
Disconnector position of bay n is abnormal.
Alm_DS
Disconnector position of any bay is abnormal.
Alm_IntLink
@Bayn.Alm_52b
BBn disconnector and BBm disconnector of the same feeder are

closed at the same time
Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n breaker is energized but
3-85

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
current can still be detected in bay n
Normally closed and normally open auxiliary contact of bay n breaker
5
are energized or de-energized simultaneously for over 5s (if both
@Bayn.Alm_52a&52b
normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact

of circuit breaker are used to identify the position status)
Normally closed and normally open auxiliary contact of BBx
@Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BBx
disconnector of bay n is energized or de-energized simultaneously for

over s 5s
3.15.4 Settings
Function Link

Table 3.15-5 Function link of circuit breaker
No.
1
Symbol
Remark
1: Circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance.
0: Circuit breaker of bay n is not in maintenance.
1: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is enabled. The
disconnector position will be decided by [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1]
@Bayn.Link_DS
and [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2].
0: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is disabled. The
disconnector position will be decided by disconnector position
binary input.
1: BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly if
@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1
[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as 1.
0: BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as open enforcedly if
@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2
3.16 BC/BS Breaker Substitution and Bypass Breaker Substitution

NOTICE!
In Section 3.16, @BBx is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar.
3-86

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

3.16.1.1 BC/BS Breaker Substitution
If BC/BS breaker is used temporarily to substitute one of feeder breakers through transfer bus, the
binary input [BI_En_BC_Byp] should be energized. The binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should
be energized or de-energized according to the busbar arrangement. The polarity mark of feeder
CT is on the busbar side, if the polarity mark of the substituted BC/BS CT is on the busbar side,
the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should be de-energized and BC/BS current will be
calculated in discriminating zone differential current. If the polarity mark of the substituting BC/BS
CT is on the feeder side, the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should be energized and negative
value of BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminating zone differential current.
If BC/BS breaker is used temporarily to substitute one of feeder breakers, whether the positive
value or the negative value of the substituting BC/BS current is calculated in discriminating zone
differential current depends on the status of the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp].
If substituting disconnector of BBx [BI_89a_@BBx_Byp] is closed, the BC/BS breaker is
substituting through BBx, and the BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminating zone
differential current of BBx.
When BC/BS breaker is used to substitute any of feeder breakers, the BC/BS bay will be treated
as a feeder bay, BC/BS SOTF protection will quit and the DZP and BFP logic of the BC/BS bay will
be changed to feeder DZP and BFP logic, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement
protection are still reserved, which can be used as the protection function of the substituted feeder.
In addition, some functions for BC/BS breaker is used as a tie breaker connecting two busbars are
also quit (such as: tripping BC/BS breaker when busbar internal fault happens).
NOTICE!
[BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should be energized PRIOR to [BI_En_BC_Byp].
1.
Energizing the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp]
3-87

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Transfer bus
disconnector
Transfer Busbar
Protected
zone
BB1
BC/BS
BB2
Figure 3.16-1 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB2
The polarity mark of BC/BS CT is on the feeder side, the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should
be energized. Negative value of BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminative zone differential
current of BB2.
2.
De-energizing the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp]
Transfer bus
disconnector
Transfer Busbar
Protected
zone
BB2
BC/BS
BB1
Figure 3.16-2 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB1
The polarity mark of BC/BS CT is on the busbar side, the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should
not be energized. Positive value of BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminative zone
differential current of BB1.
3-88

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.16.1.2 Bypass Breaker Substitution

If dedicated bypass breaker is used to substitute one of feeder breakers through transfer bus, the
polarity mark of bypass breaker CT should be on the busbar side. The CT of the substituted feeder
can be located at the outside of the transfer bus disconnector (shown in Figure 3.16-3) or inside of
the transfer bus disconnector (shown in Figure 3.16-4). The protected zone of the device is
different due to the CT location is different (shown in the corresponding figure).
If the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the outside of the transfer bus disconnector, the
transfer busbar is in the protected zone. If bypass disconnector of BBx is closed, bypass breaker
current will be calculated in discriminating zone differential current of BBx (bypass breaker current
will not be calculated in check zone differential current). If bypass disconnector of BB1 and BB2
are closed at the same time, the alarm signal [Alm_IntLink1] will be issued. If transfer bus
disconnector of bay n is closed, BB1 disconnector or BB2 disconnector of bay n is closed, and
circuit breaker of bay n is closed, the alarm signal [Alm_IntLink2] or [Alm_IntLink3] will be issued. If
feeder breaker of bay n is open and transfer bus disconnector of bay n is closed, feeder breakers
of bay n is under substituted status, the current of bay n will only be calculated in check zone
differential current and discriminating zone differential current of transfer busbar, no matter BB1
disconnector or BB2 disconnector of the bay is closed or open, the current of bay n will not be
calculated in discriminating zone differential current of BB1 and BB2.
Protected zone
*
*
Transfer bus
disconnector
Transfer Busbar
Bypass breaker
Bypass
disconnector
BB2
*
BC/BS
BB1
Figure 3.16-3 Bypass breaker substitution (the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the inside of the
transfer bus disconnector)
If the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the inside of the transfer bus disconnector, the
transfer busbar is not in the protected zone, the substituted feeder will be treated as same as other
feeder bays.
3-89

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Transfer bus
disconnector
Transfer Busbar
Protected
zone
Bypass breaker
Bypass
disconnector
BB2
*
BC/BS
BB1
Figure 3.16-4 Bypass breaker substitution (the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the outside of the
transfer bus disconnector)
3.16.2 I/O Signal

If feeder breaker of bay n is open and transfer bus disconnector of bay n is closed, feeder
breakers of bay n is under substituted status, then if the transfer bus disconnector is open,
substituted status alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_Byp] will be issued. The alarm signal is reset if the
transfer bus disconnector is closed or feeder breaker of bay n is closed.
Table 3.16-1 Input signal of breaker substitution
No.
Signal
Description
@Bayn.BI_89a_Byp_@BBx
BI_En_BC_Byp
BI_En_RevCT_Byp
Normally open auxiliary contact of transfer bus disconnector of bay n

Binary input indicating BC/BS breaker is used to substitute one of
feeder breakers
Reverse the polarity mark of BC/BS CT when BC/BS breaker is used
to substitute one of feeder breakers
Table 3.16-2 Output signal of breaker substitution

No.
Signal
Description
If feeder breaker of bay n is open and transfer bus disconnector of bay n
@Bayn.Alm_Byp
is closed, feeder breakers of bay n is under substituted status, then if the

transfer bus disconnector is open, substituted status alarm signal
[@Bayn.Alm_Byp] will be issued.
3.17 GOOSE and SV Function

NOTICE!
3-90

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
@SVLink_Bm_n is used to refer to the label setting of the SV communication link n of
the GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.m. @GLink_Bm_n is used to refer
to the label setting of the GOOSE communication link n of the GOOSE and SV module
that located in slot No.m.
PCS-915 can accomplish the control of primary equipment, status exchange of each protection
device and acquisition of binary inputs via GOOSE network. GOOSE receiving links and GOOSE
sending links are provided for each bay which is used to control the GOOSE binary input and
output.
GOOSE and SV module (NR1136A) can be used for GOOSE & SV message transmission by
point-to-point connection or via LAN. It can receive the sampled values (SV) from merging unit
(MU), and it can also receive GOOSE signals from or send GOOSE signals to intelligent terminal
unit.
3.17.1 The Effect of Data Abnormality
In order to prevent the whole protection device from being blocked for abnormality of any data
channel, only some relevant protection elements is blocked selectively according to the different
abnormalities, the specific principle is as follows:
1)
If the SV message is invalid, the invalid SV message will be displayed and it will not be
cleared.
2)
If any voltage channel is abnormal, the protection will not be blocked and the corresponding
voltage controlled element will be released.
3)
If current channel of feeder m is abnormal, busbar differential protection will be disabled, the
integrated protections (such as feeder breaker failure protection, overcurrent protection and
pole disagreement protection) of concerned bay will be disabled automatically whereas the
protections of other healthy bays remains available.
4)
If current channel of BC/BS is abnormal, BC/BS protection will be blocked and

inter-connection operation mode will be enabled automatically.
3.17.2 Out of Service of a Bay

If bay n is in service, set the function link [@Bayn.Link_On] as 1. if bay n is out of service, set the
function link [@Bayn.Link_On] as 0, the current of the corresponding bay will be excluded for
differential protection calculation but the actual sampling data can still be displayed, all the
GOOSE sending and receiving of bay n will be interrupted and all the GOOSE and SV alarm
signals of bay n will be shielded. If bay n is out of service ([@Bayn.Link_On]=0) and current is still
detected (larger than 0.04In) in bay n, an alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_Out] will be issued and the
current will be included for differential protection calculation.
3-91

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.17.3 Maintenance Binary Input
GOOSE signal
If the status of the maintenance binary input [BI_Maintenance] of the sending end does not equals
to that of the receiving end, the received GOOSE signal is invalid.
SV sampling
When bay n is in service, if the status of the maintenance binary input [BI_Maintenance] of the
device does not equals to that of the MU of corresponding bay, the received sampling data is
invalid, alarm signal will be issued and current differential protection and other protections of the
bay will be blocked.
3.17.4 I/O Signal
Table 3.17-1 Output signal of GOOSE and SV function
No.
Signal
@SVLink_Bm_n.Alm_Off_SV
@SVLink_Bm_nAlm_Maintenance_SV
@GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_ADisc
@GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_BDisc
Description
Corresponding bay is out of service, but current is still detected
(larger than 0.04In)
Corresponding bay is in servicebut the corresponding MU is in
maintenance state
Network A of corresponding GOOSE link is disconnected, the
protection will not be blocked
Network B of corresponding GOOSE link is disconnected, the
protection will not be blocked
The alarm signal will be issued if any of the following conditions
is satisfied.
Configuration version of two ends (the GOOSE receiving end
and the GOOSE sending end) are inconsistent.
@GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_Cfg
The number of data of received message is not equal to that

configured in the receiving control block.
Failed to analyze the data segment of received message. For
example, the data type of received message is mismatch with
that configured in the receiving control block.
Bx.GAlm_CfgFile_PL
Bx.GAlm_AStorm_PL
Bx.GAlm_BStorm_PL
Bx.SVAlm_CfgFile
10
@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_ADisc
Internal GOOSE configuration file of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and

SV module that located in slot No.x) is wrong
Network storm occurs on GOOSE network A of Bx (Bx means
GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x)
Network storm occurs on GOOSE network B of Bx (Bx means
GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x)
Internal SV configuration file of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV
module that located in slot No.x) is wrong
Network A of MU of corresponding bay is disconnected
3-92

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
11
@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_BDisc
Network B of MU of corresponding bay is disconnected
12
@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_Data
13
@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_SynLoss
The MU of corresponding bay lose synchronism signal
14
@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_InvalidSample
the sampled data from MU of corresponding bay is invalid
15
@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_Jitter_Ch
Sampling frame jittering alarm signal
16
@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_TimeLag_Ch
Channel delay of corresponding bay changes or out of range
17
Bx.SVAlm_Overall_PL
18
Bx.GAlm_Overall_PL
Sampled values of corresponding bay n error (time over,

decoding error or interpolation time scale error)
The overall SV alarm signal of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV

module that located in slot No.x)
The overall GOOSE alarm signal of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and
SV module that located in slot No.x)
3.17.5 Settings
Function Link

Table 3.17-2 Function link
No.
Symbol
Remark
1: Bay n is put into service.
@Bayn.Link_On
0: Bay n is out of service.

It is configured when digital sampling mode is adopted.
GOOSE Sending Link
Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Send Links

Table 3.17-3 GOOSE sending link
No.
Symbol
Remark
@Bayn.GLink_Send_Trp
GOOSE sending link of tripping of bay n
@Bayn.GLink_Send_TT
GOOSE sending link of transfer tripping of bay n
GOOSE Receiving Link
Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Recv Links

GOOSE receiving links will changed according to the specific project, so it is not listed here. Users
can see the GOOSE receiving links of each project via the PCS-Explorer software).
3-93

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3-94

Date: 2015-07-13
4 Supervision
4 Supervision
Table of Contents
4 Supervision ........................................................................................ 4-a
4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Protective Device Supervision ....................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 Hardware Supervision ......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.2 Opto-coupler Supply Supervision ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2.3 Binary Output Supervision ................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.4 Setting Supervision .............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.5 Hardware Configuration Supervision................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 AC Circuit Supervision ................................................................................... 4-2

4.3.1 Voltage and Current Drift Supervision and Auto-adjustment............................................... 4-2
4.3.2 Sample Supervision ............................................................................................................. 4-2
4.4 Secondary Circuit Supervision ...................................................................... 4-2

4.4.1 Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) .............................................................................. 4-2
4.4.2 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS).............................................................................. 4-2
4.4.3 Disconnector Position Supervision ...................................................................................... 4-2
4.5 Handle Alarm ................................................................................................... 4-3
List of Tables
Table 4.5-1 Self-supervision report ........................................................................................... 4-3
4-a
Date: 2015-03-07
4 Supervision
4-b

Date: 2015-03-07
4 Supervision
4.1 Overview
PCS-915 is a microprocessor based busbar protection which can provide successive automatic
supervision to the protected object to ensure the power system can quickly restore from any fault
to normal state. When the device is in energizing process before the LED HEALTHY is lightened,
the equipment needs to be checked to ensure no errors. Therefore, the automatic supervision
function, which checks the health of the protection system when startup and during normal
operation, plays an important role.
A minor abnormality may block a certain number of protections functions while the other functions
can still work and alarm output contacts [BO_ALM] in PWR module will be given. However, if
severe hardware failure or abnormality are detected, all protection functions will be blocked and
the LED HEALTHY will be extinguished and blocking output contacts [BO_FAIL] in PWR module
will be given. The protective device then cannot work normally and maintenance is required to
eliminate the failure.
When an abnormality or a failure is detected by automatic supervision, besides alarm output
contacts or blocking output contacts are energized, it is also followed with an LCD message and
LED indication, at the same time event recording will record the failure alarm which can be viewed
in event recording report and be printed.
4.2 Protective Device Supervision

4.2.1 Hardware Supervision
The automatic supervision function can provide monitoring of all chips on DSP module to ensure
they are healthy. Corresponding alarm signal [Bx.Fail_DSP] will be issued with the device being
blocked if any damages or errors are detected.
4.2.2 Opto-coupler Supply Supervision

The automatic supervision can continuously monitor the positive power supply of opto-coupler, if a
failure or damage is detected, the alarm signal [Bx.Alm_OptoDC] will be issued (x is the slot No. of
corresponding binary input module).
4.2.3 Binary Output Supervision

The state of binary outputs of each BO module is continuously monitored. If any abnormality is
detected, the alarm signals [Bx.Fail_Output] will be issued with device being blocked (x is the slot
No. of corresponding BO module).
4.2.4 Setting Supervision

The relay has 10 setting groups, while only one is active at the same time. The settings of active
setting group are checked, if any is out of setting scopes, a corresponding alarm signal
[Fail_Setting_OvRange] will be issued with the protective device be blocked.
If the EEPROM on DSP module is damaged, it will lead to any summation error of all setting
groups, the alarms [B02.Fail_Settings] (protection DSP module) or [B03.Fail_Settings] (fault
4-1
Date: 2015-03-07
4 Supervision
detector DSP module) will be issued with the protective device blocked.
4.2.5 Hardware Configuration Supervision

Module configuration is checked automatically during device initialization, if the plug-in module
configuration is not consistent with the design drawing of a specific project, the alarm signal
[Fail_BoardConfig] is issued with the device being blocked.
4.3 AC Circuit Supervision

4.3.1 Voltage and Current Drift Supervision and Auto-adjustment
The voltage and current drift are influenced by the variation of temperature or other environment
factors. PCS-915 can continually and automatically trace the drift value and adjust it to normal
value.
4.3.2 Sample Supervision

The device can provide monitoring of AC current and voltage samplings for protection DSP
module and fault detector DSP module. If the detected values of bay n are wrong or inconsistent,
an alarm [@Bayn.Fail_Sample] will be issued and the relay will be blocked.
4.4 Secondary Circuit Supervision

4.4.1 Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS)
The VTS logic in the relay is used to detect the VT secondary circuit to ensure that voltage
measured is the actual value of power system. When VT failure is detected, device can
automatically adjust the configuration of protective elements of which the stability would be
affected and might lead to mal-operation. Please refer to Section 3.14 for detail.
4.4.2 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS)

The CTS logic can detect the CT secondary circuit to ensure the measured current is the actual
value of power system. The main purpose of CTS is to ensure the integrity of the CT circuits
maintaining the performance of protective equipment. Please refer to Section 3.13 for details.
4.4.3 Disconnector Position Supervision

Disconnector position is monitored by the automatic supervision function to ensure the correct
operation of protective device. Please refer to Section Position of disconnector and circuit
breaker in Chapter 3 for details.
4-2

Date: 2015-03-07
4 Supervision
4.5 Handle Alarm

PCS-915 can provide self-supervision of hardware circuit and device operation status. When any unnormal condition is detected, the fault information
or report can be displayed and a corresponding alarm will be issued.
NOTICE!
If alarm signal is issued with equipment being blocked, please try to make a fault diagnosis by referring the issued alarm messages BUT
NOT simply reboot or re-power the relay. If user cannot find the failure reason on site, please inform the manufacturer or the agent for
maintenance.
Table 4.5-1 Self-supervision report
Indicator LED
No.
Alarm Message
Repairmen
Meaning Description
HEALTHY
MISC ALM
CT/VT ALM
suggestion
DS ALM
The signal is issued

with
other
alarm
1
Fail_Device
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
The device fails.
specific
signals,
please refer
handling
other
and
to the
suggestion
specific
alarm
signals.
The signal is issued
with
other
alarm
2
Alm_Device
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
The device is abnormal.
signals,
please refer
handling
other
specific
and
to the
suggestion
specific
alarm
signals.
PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Protection
4-3
4 Supervision
Indicator LED
No.
Alarm Message
Repairmen
Meaning Description
HEALTHY
MISC ALM
CT/VT ALM
suggestion
DS ALM
Users may
pay
no
attention to the alarm

signal in the project
commissioning stage,
but it is needed to
download
the
latest
package file (including

correct
version
checksum
file)
provided
3
Alm_Version
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
by
R&D
The error is found during checking the
engineer to make the
version of software downloaded to the
alarm signal disappear.
device.
Then users get the

correct
version.
software
It
is
not
allowed that the alarm

signal is issued on the
device
already
has
been put into service.

the
devices
having
being put into service

so that the alarm signal
disappears.
4
4-4
Alm_Insuf_Memory
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
The memory of MON plug-in module is
Please replace MON
insufficient.
plug-in module.
4 Supervision
Indicator LED
No.
Alarm Message
Repairmen
Meaning Description
HEALTHY
MISC ALM
CT/VT ALM
suggestion
DS ALM
Please
check
the
settings mentioned in
the prompt message
on the LCD, and go to
5
Fail_SettingItem_Chgd
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
After configure file is updated, settings
the menu Settings
of the file and settings saved on the
and select Confirm
device are not matched.
Settings
item
to
confirm settings. Then,

the device will restore
to
normal
operation
stage.
Please
reset
setting
values according to the

range described in the
instruction
then
6
Fail_Setting_OvRange
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Setting value is out of setting scope.
manual,
re-power
or
reboot the equipment

and
the
alarm
message
disappear
will
and
the
equipment will restore

to
normal
operation
state.
7
Alm_Settings_MON
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Management procedure will upload and
Put
the
protective
check the parameters and settings of
device out of service at
4-5
4 Supervision
Indicator LED
No.
Alarm Message
Repairmen
Meaning Description
HEALTHY
MISC ALM
CT/VT ALM
suggestion
DS ALM
each protection plug-in module
once.
Inform
the
regularly, if the parameters and settings
factory or agency to
are inconsistent, the alarm signal will be
maintain it.
issued.
8
Process_Exit
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Alm_MON
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
System process of MON module exits.

MON
module
is
under
abnormal
condition.
Mismatch between the configuration of
10
Fail_BoardConfig
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
plug-in
boards
and
the
designing
drawing of a specific project.

11
Bx.Fail_Board
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
12
@Bayn.Fail_Sample
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Binary output or input module located in

slot No.x works abnormally.
Sampled value of bay n is different
between two DSP modules.
Sampled value of CT1 of bay n is
13
@Bayn.Fail_Sample_CT1
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
different between two DSP modules (for

double-CT BC/BS).
Sampled value of CT2 of bay n is
14
@Bayn.Fail_Sample_CT2
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
different between two DSP modules (for

double-CT BC/BS).
15
@BBx.Fail_VoltSample
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
16
Fail_Sample
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
4-6
Sampling value of voltage of BBx is

different between two DSP modules.
Sampled value of
protection DSP
module or fault detector DSP module
4 Supervision
Indicator LED
No.
Alarm Message
Repairmen
Meaning Description
HEALTHY
MISC ALM
CT/VT ALM
suggestion
DS ALM
errors.
Driving transistors of binary output
17
Bx.Fail_Output
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
module
located
in
slot
No.x
are
damaged.
18
B02.Fail_Settings
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
19
B03.Fail_Settings
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
20
Bx.Fail_DSP
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
The EEPROM in the DSP module

located in slot No.2 is damaged.
The EEPROM in the DSP module
located in slot No.3 is damaged.
DSP chip of the DSP module located in
slot No.x is under abnormal condition.
No special treatment is
21
Alm_CommTest
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
needed, and only wait
The relay is in test mode.
for the completion of

testing.
Step1: check whether
the
selected
clock
synchronization mode
matches
22
Alm_TimeSyn
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Time
alarm.
synchronization
abnormality
the
clock
synchronization
source;
Step 2: check whether
the wiring connection
between
equipment
clock
the
and
the
synchronization
4-7
4 Supervision
Indicator LED
No.
Alarm Message
Repairmen
Meaning Description
HEALTHY
MISC ALM
CT/VT ALM
suggestion
DS ALM
source is correct;
Step 3: check whether
the setting for selecting
clock
synchronization
(i.e. [Opt_TimeSyn]) is
set correctly. If there is
no
clock
synchronization,
please set the setting
[Opt_TimeSyn] as No
TimeSyn.
Please refer to other
23
Fail_Pkp
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Device is blocked for over 10s.
alarm signal to confirm

the blocking reason.
Alarm
24
Alm_Maintenance
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
signal
indicating
that
the
equipment is in maintenance state (the
Check the binary input
binary
[BI_Maintenance].
input
[BI_Maintenance]
is
energized.
25
Bx.Alm_OptoDC
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Power supply of the opto-couplers for
Check the power circuit
binary input module located in slot No.x
of the DC module and
is abnormal.
I/O module.
External binary input of blocking BBP

26
87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
[87B.BI_ExtBlk] is energized for over

1s.
27
4-8
87B.Alm_Pkp_Biased
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Alarm signal indicating that differential
Check the binary input

of blocking BBP.
Check CT secondary
4 Supervision
Indicator LED
No.
Alarm Message
Meaning Description
HEALTHY
MISC ALM
CT/VT ALM
DS ALM
Repairmen
suggestion
current FD element picks up for over
circuit
10s.
polarity.
includes
CT
CT circuit failure, refer to Section
28
AlmH_CTS
GREEN
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
29
AlmH_CTS_A
GREEN
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
Phase-A CT circuit failure
30
AlmH_CTS_B
GREEN
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
Phase-B CT circuit failure
31
AlmH_CTS_C
GREEN
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
Phase-C CT circuit failure
32
AlmL_CTS
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
33
AlmL_CTS_A
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Phase-A CT circuit abnormality
34
AlmL_CTS_B
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Phase-B CT circuit abnormality
35
AlmL_CTS_C
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Phase-C CT circuit abnormality
Check CT secondary
@BCy.AlmH_CTS
GREEN
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
BCy CT circuit failure, refer to Section
circuit.
36
37
@BCy.AlmH_CTS_A
GREEN
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
BCy phase-A CT circuit failure
38
@BCy.AlmH_CTS_B
GREEN
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
BCy phase-B CT circuit failure
39
@BCy.AlmH_CTS_C
GREEN
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
BCy phase-C CT circuit failure
40
@BCy.AlmL_CTS
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
41
@BCy.AlmL_CTS_A
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
BCy phase-A CT circuit abnormality
42
@BCy.AlmL_CTS_B
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
BCy phase-B CT circuit abnormality
43
@BCy.AlmL_CTS_C
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
BCy phase-C CT circuit abnormality
3.13.1.1
CT circuit abnormality, refer to Section

3.13.1.2.
3.13.1.1.
BCy CT circuit abnormality, refer to

Section 3.13.1.2.
4-9
4 Supervision
Indicator LED
No.
Alarm Message
Meaning Description
HEALTHY
MISC ALM
CT/VT ALM
DS ALM
Repairmen
suggestion
BSz CT circuit failure, refer to Section
44
@BSz.AlmH_CTS
GREEN
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
45
@BSz.AlmH_CTS_A
GREEN
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
BSz phase-A CT circuit failure
46
@BSz.AlmH_CTS_B
GREEN
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
BSz phase-B CT circuit failure
47
@BSz.AlmH_CTS_C
GREEN
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
BSz phase-C CT circuit failure
48
@BSz.AlmL_CTS
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
49
@BSz.AlmL_CTS_A
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
BSz phase-A CT circuit abnormality
50
@BSz.AlmL_CTS_B
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
BSz phase-B CT circuit abnormality
51
@BSz.AlmL_CTS_C
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
BSz phase-C CT circuit abnormality
3.13.1.1.
BSz CT circuit abnormality, refer to

Section 3.13.1.2.
Differential current high value alarm

52
@BBx.AlmH_Diff
GREEN
OFF
YELLOW
OFF
signal of BBx, please refer to Section

3.13.1.3.
Differential current low value alarm
53
@BBx.AlmL_Diff
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
signal of BBx, please refer to Section

3.13.1.3.
54
55
@BBx.Alm_VTS
@BBx.Alm_VCE
GREEN
GREEN
OFF
YELLOW
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
OFF
BBx VT circuit failure, refer to Section

3.14.1.
Check VT secondary
VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx picks up
circuit.
for over 3s.

Alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled.
56
87B.Alm_Off
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
If the logic setting [87B.En_Alm_Off] is

set as 1, once BBP is disabled (BBP
4-10
Check whether BBP is

disabled.
4 Supervision
Indicator LED
No.
Alarm Message
Repairmen
Meaning Description
HEALTHY
MISC ALM
CT/VT ALM
suggestion
DS ALM
can be disabled by the corresponding
enabling binary input, function link or
enabling logic setting), the alarm signal
indicating BBP is disabled will be
issued.
57
@Bayn.Alm_Cls
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Closing binary input [@Bayn.BI_Cls] is

energized for over 10s.
Check whether binary

input of closing of bay
n is always energized
Check
58
@Bayn.50DZ.Alm_Pkp
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
whether
the
Alarm signal indicating that feeder DZP
measured
current
FD of bay n picks up for over 10s.
equals to the actual

current.
59
@BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Alarm signal indicating that FD element
Check
for SOTF protection of BCy picks up for
setting [50SOTF.I_Set]
over 10s.
is
reasonable
check
60
@BSz.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
for SOTF protection of BSz picks up for

over 10s.
61
62
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
whether
and
whether
measured
the
the
current

current.
Alarm signal indicating that phase
Check
overcurrent FD element of bay n picks
corresponding current
up for over 10s.
setting is reasonable
Alarm signal indicating that ground
and check whether the
overcurrent FD element of bay n picks
measured
up for over 10s.
whether
the
current
4-11
4 Supervision
Indicator LED
No.
Alarm Message
Repairmen
Meaning Description
HEALTHY
MISC ALM
CT/VT ALM
suggestion
DS ALM
current.
Alarm
63
@Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
signal
indicating
that
PD
protection FD element of bay n picks up
Check
for over 10s (i.e. pole disagreement
corresponding
binary
disagreement
input
of
bay
[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD] is energized for
the
pole
binary
input.
over 10s).
64
65
@BCy.Alm_BI_BFI
@BCy.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Binary input of initiating BCy BFP is

Check the contact of
The common initiating contact of BFP of
initiating
BCy is continually energized for over
externally.
BC
BFP
10s.
66
67
@BSz.Alm_BI_BFI
@BSz.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Binary input of initiating BSz BFP is

initiating
BSz is continually energized for over
externally.
BS
BFP
10s.
initiating
68
@BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF

for BCy BFP picks up for over 10s.
BC
BFP
externally and check

whether the protective
element
(which
can
initiate BC BFP) drops

off.
4-12
4 Supervision
Indicator LED
No.
Alarm Message
Repairmen
Meaning Description
HEALTHY
MISC ALM
CT/VT ALM
suggestion
DS ALM

initiating
69
@BSz.50BF.Alm_Pkp
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF

for BSz BFP picks up for over 10s.
BS
BFP

element
(which
can
initiate BS BFP) drops

off.
70
71
@Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI
@Bayn.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Binary input of initiating contact of BFP

of bay n is energized for over 10s.
initiating feeder BFP
bay n is continually energized for over
externally.
10s.
Binary
72
50BF.Alm_BI_RlsVCE
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
input
of
releasing
voltage
releasing
voltage
controlled element of breaker failure
controlled element of
protection is energized for over 10s.
breaker
failure
protection.
initiating feeder BFP
73
50BF.Alm_Pkp
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
for BFP of bay n picks up for over 10s

element
(which
can
initiate BFP) drops off.

74
50BF.Alm_Off
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Alarm signal indicating feeder BFP is
Check whether BFP is
disabled.
disabled.
If
the
logic
setting
4-13
4 Supervision
Indicator LED
No.
Alarm Message
Repairmen
Meaning Description
HEALTHY
MISC ALM
CT/VT ALM
suggestion
DS ALM
[50BF.En_Alm_Off] is set as 1, once
feeder BFP is disabled (feeder BFP can
be disabled by the corresponding
enabling binary input, function link or
enabling logic setting), the alarm signal
indicating feeder BFP is disabled will be
issued.
75
@Bayn.Alm_DS
GREEN
OFF
OFF
YELLOW
Disconnector position of bay n is

abnormal.
Check auxiliary contact
BBn
76
Alm_IntLink
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
disconnector
and
BBm
of disconnector.
disconnector of the same feeder are

closed at the same time.
Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay
77
78
@Bayn.Alm_52b
@Bayn.Alm_52a&52b
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
n breaker is energized but current can

still be detected in bay n.
Normally closed and normally open
of circuit breaker of bay
auxiliary contact of bay n breaker are
n.
energized
or
de-energized
simultaneously for over 5s.

Normally closed and normally open
79
@Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BBx
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of

bay n is energized or de-energized
simultaneously for over 5s.
80
4-14
@Bayn.Alm_Byp
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF

of disconnector of bay
n
If feeder breaker of bay n is open and
Check the transfer bus
transfer bus disconnector of bay n is
disconnector.
4 Supervision
Indicator LED
No.
Alarm Message
Repairmen
Meaning Description
HEALTHY
MISC ALM
CT/VT ALM
suggestion
DS ALM
closed, feeder breakers of bay n is
under substituted status, then if the
transfer bus disconnector is open,
substituted
status
alarm
signal
[@Bayn.Alm_Byp] will be issued.

Following alarm signals are configured only for digital substation
@SVLink_Bm_n is used to refer to the label setting of the SV communication link n of the GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.m. @GLink_Bm_n is used to refer
to the label setting of the GOOSE communication link n of the GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.m.
Corresponding bay is in service but the
81
@SVLink_Bm_n.Alm_Maintenance_SV
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
corresponding MU is in maintenance
state
82
@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_ADisc
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
83
@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_BDisc
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
84
@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_Data
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Network A of MU of corresponding bay

is disconnected
Network B of MU of corresponding bay
is disconnected
Check
Sampled values of corresponding bay n
corresponding
error (time over, decoding error or
check the optical fiber
interpolation time scale error)
connected to it.
MU,
The MU of corresponding bay lose
85
@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_SynLoss
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
86
@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_InvalidSample
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
87
@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_Jitter_Ch
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Sampling frame jittering alarm signal
88
@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_TimeLag_Ch
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Channel delay of corresponding bay
the
synchronism signal
the
sampled
data
from
MU
of
corresponding bay is invalid
4-15
4 Supervision
Indicator LED
No.
Alarm Message
Repairmen
Meaning Description
HEALTHY
MISC ALM
CT/VT ALM
suggestion
DS ALM
changes or out of range
89
Bx.SVAlm_CfgFile
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Internal SV configuration file of Bx (Bx
Inform commissioning
means GOOSE and SV module that
personnel to check the
located in slot No.x) is wrong.
SV configuration file.
Network A of corresponding GOOSE

90
91
@GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_ADisc
@GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_BDisc
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
link is disconnected, the protection will
Check the intelligent
not be blocked
terminal unit, check the
Network B of corresponding GOOSE
optical fiber connected
link is disconnected, the protection will
to them.
not be blocked
The alarm signal will be issued if any of
the following conditions is satisfied.
Configuration version of two ends (the
GOOSE receiving end and the GOOSE
sending end) are inconsistent.
The number
92
@GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_Cfg
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
of
data of received
message is not equal to that configured

in the receiving control block.
Failed to analyze the data segment of
received message. For example, the
Inform commissioning
personnel to check the
GOOSE configuration
file.
data type of received message is

mismatch with that configured in the
receiving control block.
93
4-16
Bx.GAlm_CfgFile_PL
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
Internal GOOSE configuration file of Bx

(Bx means GOOSE and SV module that
4 Supervision
Indicator LED
No.
Alarm Message
Meaning Description
HEALTHY
MISC ALM
CT/VT ALM
DS ALM
Repairmen
suggestion
located in slot No.x) is wrong.

Network storm occurs on GOOSE
94
Bx.GAlm_AStorm_PL
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
network A of Bx (Bx means GOOSE

and SV module that located in slot
No.x).
Check
the
corresponding GOOSE
Network storm occurs on GOOSE
95
Bx.GAlm_BStorm_PL
GREEN
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
network.
network B of Bx (Bx means GOOSE

and SV module that located in slot
No.x).
The overall SV alarm signal of Bx (Bx
96
97
Bx.SVAlm_Overall_PL
Bx.GAlm_Overall_PL
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
means GOOSE and SV module that

located in slot No.x)
Refer to other GOOSE
The overall GOOSE alarm signal of Bx
or SV alarm signal
(Bx means GOOSE and SV module that

located in slot No.x)
4-17
4 Supervision
4-18

Table of Contents
5 Measurement and Recording........................................................... 5-a
5.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 Measurement ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 Analogue Input Quantities of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 ....................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Phase Angle of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 ............................................................. 5-2
5.2.3 Debug Values of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 .......................................................... 5-2
5.3 Event & fault Records ..................................................................................... 5-3

5.3.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.2 Event Recording .................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording ........................................................................................ 5-3
5.3.4 Present Recording ............................................................................................................... 5-5
5-a
Date: 2013-12-13
5-b

Date: 2013-12-13
5.1 General Description

PCS-915 busbar protection can provide auxiliary functions such as on-line data metering, binary
input status, event and disturbance recording, to meet the demands of the modern power grid
requirements.
5.2 Measurement
PCS-915 can provide continuous measurements of analogue input quantities. The measurement
data shown below is displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or by the software interface on
the local or remote PC. The analog quantities will be displayed as RMS values of the secondary
side of CT.
Equipment samples 24 points per cycle. The RMS value is calculated in each interval and the LCD
display will be updated in every 0.5 second.
Users can view the measured data on LCD by navigating the menu Measurements, or by
PCS-Explorer software or substation automatic system (SAS) software. By navigating the path
Settings->Device Setup ->Comm Settings, primary or secondary sampled values can be
selected to display by configuring the setting [Opt_Display_Status].
PCS-915 has two DSP modules that are protection DSP module (DSP module 1) and fault
detector DSP module (DSP module 2), the sampling values of both modules can be displayed on
LCD through different access menu.
NOTICE!
If the communication setting [Opt_Display_Status] is not configured, the sampled
values are displayed as secondary value by default. If the setting is set as 0, the
sampled values are displayed as primary value; if this setting is set as 1, the sampled
values are displayed as secondary value.
NOTICE!
The bay label of displayed sampled values will change according to the label settings of
each bay and busbar. In section 5.2, @BBx is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding busbar and @Bayn is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bay.
5.2.1 Analogue Input Quantities of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2

Item
Rotation
Description
Id_CZ
A,B,C
Three-phase check zone differential currents
@BBx.Id
A,B,C
Three-phase discriminating zone differential currents of BBx
@BBx.UP
A,B,C
Three phase voltages of BBx
@Bayn.IP
A,B,C
Three phase currents of bay n
5-1
Date: 2013-12-13

@Bayn.IP_CT1
A,B,C
Three phase currents of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@Bayn.IP_CT2
A,B,C
Three phase currents of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
Access path:
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Measured Values
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Measured Values
5.2.2 Phase Angle of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2

When voltage is sampled by the device and phase A voltage of BB1 is larger than a certain value,
the phase A voltage of BB1 will be taken as a reference; if the phase A voltage of BB1 is smaller
than the certain value and the phase A voltage of BB2 is larger than the certain value, the phase A
voltage of BB2 will be taken as a reference; and so forth.
When voltage is not sampled by the device, if the currents of some feeder are larger than a
certain value, the phase A current of the feeder (takes the feeder whose number is minimal) will
be taken as a reference.
Item
Rotation
Description
If the phase A voltage of BBx is taken as a reference, the displayed
value ofAngRef is x, If phase A voltage of all busbars are all
smaller than a certain value, the displayed value of AngRef is 0.
AngRef
If the phase A current of feeder m is taken as a reference, the

displayed value of AngRef is m (m=01, 02, 03, ), if all the
currents are smaller than a certain value, the displayed value of
AngRef is 0.
@Bayn.Ang(IP)
A,B,C
The phase angle of current of bay n
@Bayn.Ang(IP_CT1)
A,B,C
The phase angle of current of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@Bayn.Ang(IP_CT2)
A,B,C
The phase angle of current of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@BBx.Ang(UP)
A,B,C
The phase angle of voltage of BBx
Access path:
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Phase Angle
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Phase Angle
5.2.3 Debug Values of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2

The debug values are usually provided for commission person for reference.
Item
Rotation
Description
@Bayn.I2
Negative sequence current of bay n
@Bayn.I2_CT1
Negative sequence current of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@Bayn.I2_CT2
Negative sequence current of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@Bayn.3I0
Residual current of bay n
5-2

Date: 2013-12-13

@Bayn.3I0_CT1
Residual current of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@Bayn.3I0_CT2
Residual current of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@BBx.U2x
Negative sequence voltage of BBx
@BBx.3U0
Residual voltage of BBx
Access path:
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Cal Values
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Cal Values
5.3 Event & fault Records

5.3.1 Introduction
PCS-915 is capable of providing fault and disturbance recording, event recording and present
recording for the protected objects. All the recorded information except for waveform can be
viewed on local LCD or by printing. Waveform must be printed or be extracted using PCS-Explorer
software and a waveform software.
5.3.2 Event Recording

The device can store up to 1024 abnormality alarm reports and 1024 binary input status changing
reports respectively. All the records are stored in non-volatile memory, and when the available
space is fully occupied, the oldest report is automatically overwritten by the latest one.
Abnormality alarm reports
Abnormality detected during relay self-supervision, secondary circuit abnormality or protection

alarm element will be logged as individual events.
Binary input status changing reports
When binary input status changes, the changed information will be displayed on LCD and logged
as binary input change report at the same time.
5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording

5.3.3.1 Application
Users can use the disturbance recorder to achieve a better understanding of the behavior of the
power network and related primary and secondary device during and after a disturbance.
Analyzing on the recorded data can help to resolve practical problem.
5.3.3.2 Design
Disturbance recorder is consisted of tripping report and fault waveform and it is triggered by fault
detector. The device can store 32 pieces of trip reports and waveforms in non-volatile memory.
When protection operates, the operating information will be displayed on LCD and logged as trip
record at same time, which can be viewed in trip report. Here fault recording includes two kinds of
5-3
Date: 2013-12-13
cases:
1)
Only the fault detector element operates.
2)
The fault detector element operates along with the operation of protective elements.
1.
Trip record capacity and information
The device can store 32 pieces of trip reports in non-volatile memory. If a new fault occurs when
the spaces are fully occupied, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one.
A complete trip record includes the following items:
1)
Sequence number
Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the report and displayed on LCD
screen.
2)
Date and time of fault occurrence
The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock. Initiating date and time is when a fault
detector picks up. The relative time is the time when protection element operates to send tripping
signal after fault detector picks up.
3)
Faulty phase
The faulty phase detected by the operating element is shown in the record report.
4)
Operating time
It is the relative time when protection element operates to send tripping signal relative to fault
detector element operating, the operating time of output relay is not included.
5)
Protection element
The protection element that issues the tripping command will be shown. If no protection element
operates to trip but only fault detector element operates, the fault report will record the title of fault
detector element.
6)
Tripping element
The tripped elements (feeder or bus coupler) are also shown.

2.
Fault waveform record capacity and information
MON module of the relay can store 32 pieces of fault waveform in non-volatile memory. Phase
current of each bay, check zone differential current, discriminative zone differential current and
buabar voltages (if voltage is used) will be recorded in waveform. If a new fault occurs when 32
fault waveform recorders have been stored, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one.
Each fault record consists of all analog and digital quantities related to protection, such as original
current and voltage, differential current, alarm elements, and binary inputs and etc.
Each time recording includes 2-cycle pre-fault waveform, and up to 250 cycles can be recorded.
5-4

Date: 2013-12-13
5.3.4 Present Recording

Present recording is used to record the waveform of present operating device which can be
triggered manually on LCD of device or remotely through PCS-Explorer software. Recording
content of present recording is same to that of disturbance recording. Each time recording
includes 2-cycle waveform before triggering, and up to 250 cycles can be recorded.
5-5
Date: 2013-12-13
5-6

Date: 2013-12-13
6 Hardware
6 Hardware
Table of Contents
6 Hardware ............................................................................................ 6-a
6.2 Typical Wiring .................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.1 Typical Wiring of 8U PCS-915 (For reference only) ............................................................ 6-5
6.2.2 Typical Wiring of 8U+4U PCS-915 (For reference only) ..................................................... 6-7
6.2.3 CT Requirement .................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.3 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition ............................................................. 6-10

6.3.1 PWR Module (Slot P1: NR1301) ....................................................................................... 6-10
6.3.2 MON Module (Slot No.01: NR1101 or NR1102) ................................................................ 6-12
6.3.3 DSP Module 1 (Protection Calculation, NR1115C or NR1151D) ...................................... 6-14
6.3.4 DSP Module 2 (Fault Detector Calculation, NR1115C or NR1151D) ................................ 6-14
6.3.5 CAN Module (NR1201B) ................................................................................................... 6-15
6.3.6 NET-DSP Module (GOOSE and SV, Optional) ................................................................. 6-16
6.3.7 Binary Input (BI) Module .................................................................................................... 6-16
6.3.8 Binary Output (BO) Module ............................................................................................... 6-21
6.3.9 Analog Input (AI) Module (NR1401) .................................................................................. 6-23
List of Figures
Figure 6.1-1 Front view of 8U PCS-915 ..................................................................................... 6-2
Figure 6.1-2 Typical rear view of 8U PCS-915 .......................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6.1-3 Typical rear view of 8U+4U PCS-915.................................................................... 6-4
Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of 8U PCS-915................................................................................ 6-6
Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of 8U+4U PCS-915 ......................................................................... 6-8
Figure 6.3-1 View of DC power supply module NR1301 ........................................................ 6-11
Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module........................................................... 6-11
Figure 6.3-3 Rear view of MON modules ................................................................................ 6-13
6-a
Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Figure 6.3-4 Wiring of communication interface.................................................................... 6-14

Figure 6.2-5 Rear view of DSP modules.................................................................................. 6-15
Figure 6.2-6 Rear view of CAN bus extended modules......................................................... 6-15
Figure 6.3-7 View of NET-DSP module .................................................................................... 6-16
Figure 6.3-8 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A ............................................... 6-17
Figure 6.3-9 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS ............................................. 6-20
Figure 6.3-10 Pin definition of BO module NR1521A (Pin definition of NR1521B and 1521C
are similar to it) .................................................................................................................. 6-21
Figure 6.3-11 Pin definition of BO module NR1523A ............................................................. 6-22
Figure 6.3-12 Pin definition of BO module NR1549A ............................................................ 6-23
Figure 6.3-13 Typical pin definition of the first 12-channel current AI module .................. 6-24
Figure 6.3-14 Typical pin definition of 3-channel current and 9-channel voltage AI module
.............................................................................................................................................. 6-24
Figure 6.3-15 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed ..................................... 6-25
Figure 6.3-16 Current connection of AI module ..................................................................... 6-25
Figure 6.3-17 Voltage connection of AI module ..................................................................... 6-26
List of Tables
Table 6.1-1 PCS-915 module configuration .............................................................................. 6-1
Table 6.3-1 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A ................................................. 6-17
Table 6.3-2 Pin definition of binary input module NR1503A ................................................. 6-18
Table 6.3-3 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS............................................... 6-20
6-b

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

PCS-915 adopts 32-bit micro-processor CPU for logic calculations and function management. The
protection calculations are processed by high-speed digital signal processor DSP. System
parameters are sampled at 24 points in every cycle. The sampling data are parallel processed in
each sampling interval to ensure ultrahigh reliability and safety of protection device.
PCS-915 captures current and voltage signal and converts to small signals. These small signals
will be filtered and converted to digital signals by AD converter before being sent to protection
calculation module (DSP module 1) and fault detector calculation module (DSP module 2). When
MON module completes all the protection calculations, the results will be stored in 32-bit CPU on
MON module. DSP module 1 carries out protection logic calculation, tripping output, and MON
module can provide sequence of event (SOE) record, waveform recording, printing,
communication between protection and substation automatic system (SAS) and communication
between HMI and CPU. The operating procedures of fault detector calculation module are similar
to that of protection calculation module, and the only difference is, when fault detector calculation
module decides a fault detector picks up, only the positive power supply of output relay is switched
on.
Table 6.1-1 PCS-915 module configuration
No.
ID
Module Description
NR1101/NR1102
Management module (MON module)
NR1115/NR1151
Protection calculation module (DSP module 1)
NR1115/NR1151
Fault detector calculation module (DSP module 2)
NR1401
Analog input module ( AI module)
NR1501/NR1503/NR1506
Binary input module (BI module)
NR1521/NR1523/NR1549
Binary output module (BO module)
NR1301
Power supply module (PWR module)
NR1136
GOOSE and SV from merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 (NET-DSP module)
NR1201
CAN bus extended module (CAN module)
10
Human machine interface module (HMI module)
MON module provides management function, completed event record, setting management,
and etc.
DSP modules can provide filtering, sampling, protection calculation and fault detector
calculation.
AI module converts AC current and voltage to low voltage signals by current transformers
and voltage transformers respectively.
BI module provides binary inputs that are inputted via 110V/125V/220V/250V opto-coupler
(configurable).
6-1
Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
BO module provides all kinds of binary output contacts, including signal output contacts and
tripping output contacts.
PWR module converts DC 250/220/125/110V to different DC voltage levels on request for

various modules of the device
NET-DSP module (optional) receives and sends GOOSE messages, sampled values (SV)
from merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 protocol.
CAN module (optional) realizes the CAN bus connection between 8U chassis and 4U
extended chassis for 8U+4U PCS-915 device.
HMI module is comprised of LCD, keypad, LED indicator and multiplex RJ45 ports for user as
human-machine interface
Following figure shows typical front view of 8U size PCS-915.
HEALTHY
MISC ALM
PCS-915
11
12
BUSBAR RELAY
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
20
ENT
ES
GR
P
1
2
Figure 6.1-1 Front view of 8U PCS-915
Following figures show typical rear view of 8U size PCS-915.
6-2

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Slot No.
01
02
03
NR1102M
NR1115
NR1115
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1521A
P1
NR1301
5V
BJ
BJJ BSJ
ON
OFF
1
2
BO_COM1
BO_FAIL
BO_ALM
BO_COM2
BO_FAIL
BO_ALM
OPTO+
OPTO-
NR1401
NR1401
DANGER
Slot No.
16
17
NR1401
DANGER
18
19
NR1401
DANGER
20
21
NR1401
DANGER
22
23
10
PWR+
11
PWR-
12
GND
NR1521A
NR1521A
NR1521A
NR1521A
NR1521A
NR1521A
NR1523A
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
DANGER
24
25
Figure 6.1-2 Typical rear view of 8U PCS-915
For a specific project, if more than 16 bays are supported, additional 4U extended chassis is
equipped, the typical rear view of 8U+4U size PCS-915 is shown as follows.
6-3
Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Slot No.
01
02
03
04
NR1102M
NR1115
NR1115
NR1201B
05
06
07
08
09
10
NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1521A
NR1521A
11
12
NR1521A NR1521A
13
14
15
NR1521A
NR1521A
NR1521A
TERM_H
P1
NR1301
5V
BJ
TERM_T
PPS
BJJ BSJ
RESV
ON
OFF
BO_COM1
1
2
BO_FAIL
BO_ALM
BO_COM2
BO_FAIL
NR1401
DANGER
Slot No.
Slot No.
16
17
NR1401
DANGER
18
19
OPTO+
OPTO-
CAN/PPS
NR1401
BO_ALM
NR1401
DANGER
20
21
01
02
03
04
05
06
NR1506AS
NR1505
NR1506AS
NR1505
NR1506AS
NR1505
NR1506AS
NR1505
NR1506AS
NR1505
NR1506AS
NR1505
NR1401
DANGER
22
07
NR1506AS
NR1505
NR1401
DANGER
23
24
08
NR1506AS
NR1505
25
NR1401
DANGER
26
10
PWR+
11
PWR-
12
GND
NR1521A
NR1521A
NR1523A
30
31
32
DANGER
27
28
09
10
11
12
NR1506AS
NR1505
NR1506AS
NR1505
NR1506AS
NR1505
NR1506AS
NR1505
13
NR1506AS
NR1505
29
14
NR1506AS
NR1505
P2
15
NR1201B
TERM_H
NR1301
NR1301A
5V
BJ
TERM_T
PPS
BJJ BSJ
RESV
ON
OFF
1
2
BO_FAIL
BO_ALM
BO_COM2
BO_FAIL
CAN/PPS
BO_COM1
BO_ALM
OPTO+
OPTO-
9
10
11
PWR+
12
GND
PWR-
Figure 6.1-3 Typical rear view of 8U+4U PCS-915
6-4

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
6.2 Typical Wiring

6.2.1 Typical Wiring of 8U PCS-915 (For reference only)
BI module
BI module
06
07
08
09
10
NR1301
PWR module
BI module
05
NR1521A
BO module
BI module
04
BI module
BI module
03
BI module
BI module
02
BI module
BI module
01
BI module
DSP module
NR1115C NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS
DSP module
NR1115C
MON module
NR1102M
11
12
13
14
15
NR1521A
NR1521A
NR1521A
NR1521A
NR1521A
BO module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BO module
AI module
NR1401
AI module
NR1401
AI module
NR1401
AI module
NR1401
AI module
NR1401
BO module
Slot No.
P1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
NR1521A
NR1523A
Slot No.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration
6-5
Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Power supply supervision
0401
1601
Ia_Bay01
1602
BI_01
0402
0421
1603
Ib_Bay01
1604
1605
*BI plug-in modules
Ia_Bay16
2220
2221
Ib_Bay16
2222
0422
2219
BI_20
Current input
Ic_Bay01
1606
BI_01
1401
+
1402
1421
2223
Ic_Bay16
2224
BI_20
1422
2407
Ua_BB1
2408
Ub_BB1
2410
2411
2421
Ub_BB3
2422
2423
1503
1504
BO_11
1521
1522
2601
BO_01
2602
2603
BO_02
2604
Uc_BB3
2424
1502
BO_02
Controlled by fault detector

element
Ua_BB3
2420
BO_01
2419
Voltage input
Uc_BB1
2412
1501

element
2409
BO_11
2621
2622
Power supply for

opto-coupler (24V)
P110
PWR-
P111
OPTO+
P107
OPTO-
P108
Power
Supply
P103
BO_ALM
P101
COM
P105
BO_FAIL
BO_ALM
P104
COM
SYN-
0102
SGND
0103
TXD
0106
SGND
0107
3121
3122
3201
BO_01
3202
BO_06
3211
3212
3213
BO_07
3214
3215
BO_08
3216
3217

element, magnetic latched
0105
PRINT
RTS
3104
BO_11
Not controlled by fault

detector element
0101
Clock SYN
SYN+
0104
PRINTER
To the screen of other coaxial

cable with single point earthing
P106
3103
BO_FAIL
3102
BO_02
Controlled by fault
detector element
P102
3101
BO_01
PWR+

element
External DC power
supply
BO_09
3218
3219
BO_10
3220
3221
BO_11
Multiplex
RJ45 (Front)
3222
0012
0225
Grounding
Bus
Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of 8U PCS-915
6-6

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
6.2.2 Typical Wiring of 8U+4U PCS-915 (For reference only)
BO module
BO module
BO module
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
NR1301
PWR module
BO module
01
NR1521A
BO module
BO module
NR1521A
BO module
NR1521A
BI module
NR1521A
BI module
NR1521A
BI module
NR1521A
BI module
NR1521A
CAN module
NR1201B NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS
DSP module
NR1115C
DSP module
NR1115C
MON module
NR1102M
Slot No.
15
P1
BO module
NR1523A
BO module
NR1521A
BO module
NR1521A
AI module
NR1401
AI module
NR1401
AI module
NR1401
AI module
NR1401
AI module
NR1401
AI module
NR1401
AI module
NR1401
30
31
32
Slot No.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
CAN module
PWR module
NR1301
BI module
NR1201B
BI module
NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
P2
Slot No.
The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration
6-7
Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Ia_Bay01
1602
1603
Ib_Bay01
1604
0901
BO_01
2804
2805
Ic_Bay25
2806
2807
Ub_BB1
2810
2811
2821
Ub_BB3
2822
Not controlled by fault

detector element
2823
Uc_BB3
2824
0501
3002
3021
3022
BO_11

element, magnetic latched
BI_01
*BI plug-in modules
BI_20
0801
BI_20
0822
3102
BO_11
0102
0103
3122
3201
BO_01
3202
BO_06
0105
TXD
0106
SGND
0107
3211
3212
3213
BO_07
3214
3215
BO_08
3216
3217
BO_09
3218
3219
BO_10
3220
3221
BO_11
3222
BO_FAIL
P102
BO_ALM
P103
COM
P101
BO_FAIL
P105
BO_ALM
P106
COM
P104
Power
Supply
Multiplex
RJ45 (Front)
PRINT
RTS
3121
P110
PWR+
P111
PWR-
P107
OPTO+
P108
OPTO-
External DC power
supply
Power supply for
opto-coupler (24V)
CAN/PPS
0101
SYN-
Clock SYN
SYN+
0104
PRINTER

SGND
3101
BO_01
BI_01
0522
0821
3001
BO_01
Controlled by fault
detector element
Ua_BB3
2820
Voltage input
Uc_BB1
2812
0802
1521
1522
Controlled by fault
detector element
2809
0521
BO_11
Ua_BB1
2808
0502
1502
Controlled by fault
detector element
Ib_Bay25
1501
BO_01
2803
Current input
Ia_Bay25
2802
Controlled by fault
detector element
Ic_Bay01
1606
2819
0921
0922
BO_11
1605
2801
0902
8U chassis
Controlled by fault
detector element
1601
0012
CAN bus
extended wire
0225
0401
4U extended chassis
+
0421
BI_01
0402
0422
1401
+
BO_FAIL
P202
BO_ALM
P203
COM
P201
BO_FAIL
P205
BO_ALM
P206
COM
P204
Power
Supply
1402
BI_01
*BI plug-in modules
BI_20
CAN/PPS
Grounding Bus
1421
1422
P210
PWR+
P211
PWR-
P207
OPTO+
P208
OPTO-
BI_20
External DC power
supply
Power supply for
opto-coupler (24V)
0012
0225
Grounding Bus
Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of 8U+4U PCS-915

6-8

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
6.2.3 CT Requirement
-Rated primary current Ipn:
According to the rated current or maximum load current of primary apparatus.
-Rated continuous thermal current Icth:
According to the maximum load current.
-Rated short-time thermal current Ith and rated dynamic current Idyn:
According to the maximum fault current.
-Rated secondary current Isn
-Accuracy limit factor Kalf:
Ipn
Rated primary current (amps)
Icth
Rated continuous thermal current (amps)
Ith
Rated short-time thermal current (amps)
Idyn
Rated dynamic current (amps)
Isn
Rated secondary current (amps)
Kalf
Accuracy limit factor (Kalf=Ipal/Ipn)
IPal
Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)
Performance verification
Esl > Esl
Esl
Rated secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)

Esl = kalfIsn(Rct+Rbn)
Kalf
Accuracy limit factor (Kalf=Ipal/Ipn)
IPal
Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)
Ipn
Isn
Rct
Current transformer secondary winding resistance (ohms)
Rbn
Sbn
Esl
k
Ipcf
Rated resistance burden (ohms)

2
Rbn=Sbn/Isn
Rated burden (VAs)
Required secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)

Esl = kIpcf Isn(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
stability factor = 2
Protective checking factor current (amps)
Same as the maximum prospective fault current
Isn
Rct
Current transformer secondary winding resistance (ohms)
Rb
Real resistance burden (ohms)

Rb=Rr+2RL+Rc
6-9
Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Rc
Contact resistance, 0.05-0.1 ohm (ohms)
RL
Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms)
Rr
Impedance of relay phase current input (ohms)
Ipn
For example:
1.
Kalf=30, Isn=5A, Rct=1ohm, Sbn=60VA
Esl = kalfIsn(Rct+Rbn) = kalfIsn(Rct+ Sbn/ Isn2)

= 305(1+60/25)=510V
2.
Ipcf=40000A, RL=0.5ohm, Rr=0.1ohm, Rc=0.1ohm, Ipn=2000A
Esl = 2IpcfIsn(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
= 2Ipcf Isn(Rct+(Rr+2RL+Rc))/Ipn
= 2400005(1+(0.1+20.5+0.1))/2000=440V
Thus, Esl > Esl
6.3 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition

PCS-915 consists of power supply module, MON module, DSP module, analog input module,
binary input module and binary output module. The definition and application of each module and
its terminals are introduced as follows.
6.3.1 PWR Module (Slot P1: NR1301)

The power supply module is a DC/DC or AC/DC converter with electrical insulation between input
and output. The power supply module has an input voltage range as described in the chapter of
Technical Data. The standard output voltages are +5V and +24V DC. The tolerances of the
output voltages are continuously monitored.
The +5V DC output provides power supply for all the electrical elements that need +5V DC power
supply in this device. The +24V DC output provides power supply for the static relays of this
device.
The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker
must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device is
in cold reserve.
A 12-pin connector is fixed on the front of the power supply module. The pin definition of the
connector is described as below.
6-10

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
NR1301
5V OK
BO_ALM
ALM
BO_FAIL
ON
OFF
BO_COM1
BO_FAIL
BO_ALM
BO_COM2
BO_FAIL
BO_ALM
OPTO+
OPTO-
9
10 PWR+
11 PWR12 GND
Figure 6.3-1 View of DC power supply module NR1301
For some occasions, the power switch in the dotted box of above figure is not existed.
01
BO_FAIL
02
BO_ALM
03
04
BO_FAIL
05
BO_ALM
06
Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module

Pin No.
Symbol
Description
01
BO_COM1
Common terminal 1.
02
BO_Fail_1
Equipment failure output 1 (01-02, NC)
03
BO_Alm_Abnor_1
Equipment abnormality alarm output 1 (01-03, NO)
04
BO_COM2
Common terminal 2.
05
BO_Fail_2
Equipment failure output 2 (04-05, NC)
06
BO_Alm_Abnor_2
Equipment abnormality alarm output 2 (04-06, NO)
07
OPTO+
Pins 07 and 08 are 24V power supply output for the binary input
08
OPTO-
module. Pin 07 is 24V+ and Pin 08 is 24V-, the rated output

current of this power supply is 200mA.
6-11
Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Pin No.
Symbol
09
Description
Not used
10
PWR+
Positive input of power supply for the device
11
PWR-
Negative input of power supply for the device
12
GND
Grounded connection of this device
NOTICE!
The rated voltage of DC power supply module is self-adaptive to 88~300Vdc. Power
supply in other DC voltage levels or AC voltage power supply need to be specially
ordered. It is important to CHECK if the rated voltage of power supply module is the
same as the voltage of external control power supply before the device is put into
service.
NOTICE!
The DC power supply module provides pin 0112 and earth connector for grounding of
device. The pin 0112 shall be connected to earth connector and the earth copper bar of
panel via dedicated grounding wire.
NOTICE!
Effective grounding is the most important measure for device to prevent EMI, so
effective grounding MUST be ensured before the device is put into operation.
6.3.2 MON Module (Slot No.01: NR1101 or NR1102)

The MON module consists of high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM,
Ethernet controller and other peripherals. Its can provide management of the complete device,
human machine interface, communication and waveform recording etc.
The MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It
communicates with the LCD module by RS-485 bus. This module is provided with 100BaseT
Ethernet interfaces, RS-485 communication interfaces, PPS/IRIG-B differential time
synchronization interface and RS-232 printing interface.
The terminals of MON modules and its wiring method are shown in the following figure.
6-12

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
NR1102M
NR1101F
NR1102N
TX
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
RX
TX
RX
ETHERNET
Figure 6.3-3 Rear view of MON modules

Module ID
Memory
Interface
Pin No.
4 RJ45 Ethernet
RS-485
NR1102M
256M DDR
256M DDR
To SCADA
01
SYN+
02
SYN-
To
03
SGND
synchronization
05
RTS
06
TXD
Twisted pair wire
07
SGND
2 RJ45 Ethernet
To SCADA
Twisted pair wire
2 FO Ethernet
To SCADA
Optical fibre ST
RS-485
RS-232
01
SYN+
02
SYN-
To
03
SGND
synchronization
RS-485
clock
Twisted pair wire
05
RTS
06
TXD
07
SGND
3 RJ45 Ethernet
256M DDR
clock
To printer
04
NR1101F
Physical Layer
04
RS-232
NR1102N
Usage
To printer
To SCADA
01
02
03
SGND
To SCADA
Twisted pair wire
04
6-13
Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Module ID
Memory
Interface
RS-485
Pin No.
05
06
07
SGND
Usage
Physical Layer
To SCADA
08
RS-485
09
SYN+
10
SYN-
To
SGND
synchronization
11
clock
12
RS-232
13
RTS
14
TXD
15
SGND
To printer
16
The correct method of connection is shown in Figure 6.3-4. Generally, the shielded cables with two
pairs of twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs is used to connect the +
and terminals of difference signal; the other is used to connect the signal ground of the
interface, i.e. connect the signal groundings of all the devices to a bus through the twisted pair.
The module reserves a free terminal for all the communication ports; the free terminal does not
need to be connected.
Twisted pair wire
01
02
SGND
03
COM
04
Twisted pair wire

SYN+
01
SYN-
02
SGND
03
CLOCK SYN

04
Twisted pair wire

05
TXD
06
SGND
07
PRINT
RTS
Figure 6.3-4 Wiring of communication interface
6.3.3 DSP Module 1 (Protection Calculation, NR1115C or NR1151D)

The DSP Module 1 consists of high-performance digital signal processor and other peripherals.
The functions of this module include analog data acquisition, calculation of protection logic and
tripping output etc.
6.3.4 DSP Module 2 (Fault Detector Calculation, NR1115C or NR1151D)

The DSP Module 2 consists of high-performance digital signal processor and other peripherals.
The functions of this module include analog data acquisition, calculation of fault detector elements
6-14

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
and providing positive power supply to output relay.

DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 have the same hardware configuration. The following figure
shows rear views and terminal definitions for different type of DSP modules; the corresponding
module shall be adopted in accordance with concrete situation.
NR1151D
NR1115C
Figure 6.2-5 Rear view of DSP modules
6.3.5 CAN Module (NR1201B)

The CAN bus extended module NR1201B is only equipped for 8U+4U PCS-915 device, 8U
chassis and 4U extended are equipped with one NR1201B module respectively, the CAN bus of
8U chassis and 4U extended chassis are connected together via a CAN extended wire, then the
8U device can get and control the signal of IO module of the 4U extended device.
NR1201B
TERM-H
TERM-T
PPS
RESV
CAN/PPS
Figure 6.2-6 Rear view of CAN bus extended modules

6-15
Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
6.3.6 NET-DSP Module (GOOSE and SV, Optional)
NR1136A
NR1136C
RX
Figure 6.3-7 View of NET-DSP module
This module consists of high-performance DSP (digital signal processor), up to eight 100Mbit/s
optical-fibre interfaces (LC type) and selectable IRIG-B interface (ST type). It supports GOOSE
and SV by IEC 61850-9-2 protocols and can be used for GOOSE & SV message transmission by
point-to-point connection or via LAN It can receive and send GOOSE messages to intelligent
control device, and receive SV from MU (merging unit). Each interface can be dedicated for
GOOSE or SV message, it can also be shared by GOOSE & SV message.
This module supports IEEE1588 network time protocol, E2E and P2P defined in IEEE1588
protocol can be selected. This module supports Ethernet IEEE802.3 time adjustment message
format, UDP time adjustment message format and GMRP.
6.3.7 Binary Input (BI) Module

NR1501A, NR1503A and NR1506AS modules are three types of standard BI modules. All the
binary inputs can be configured by PCS-Explorer software according to user requirement, please
refer to Chapter 9 about the concrete operation method.
NR1501A
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1501A and 14 configurable high voltage binary inputs
(per two binary inputs share one common negative power input of opto-coupler) are equipped with
it. The inputted voltage can be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and 250V.
6-16

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
NR1501A
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
BI_01
01
BI_02
02
COM1-
03
BI_03
04
BI_04
05
COM2-
06
BI_05
07
BI_06
08
COM3-
09
BI_07
10
11
BI_08
11
12
13
COM4-
12
14
BI_09
13
BI_10
14
COM5-
15
BI_11
16
BI_12
17
COM6-
18
BI_13
19
BI_14
20
COM7-
21
10
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
22
Figure 6.3-8 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A

Table 6.3-1 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A
Pin No.
Symbol
Description
01
BI_01
Configurable binary input 1.
02
BI_02
03
COM1-
Common terminal 1 of negative pole of power supply of the module
04
BI_03
05
BI_04
06
COM2-
07
BI_05
08
BI_06
09
COM3-
10
BI_07
11
BI_08
12
COM4-
13
BI_09
14
BI_10
15
COM5-
16
BI_11
17
BI_12
18
COM6-
6-17
Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Pin No.
Symbol
Description
19
BI_13
20
BI_14
21
COM7-
22
Blank
Blank
NR1503A
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1503A and 11 configurable high voltage binary inputs
are equipped with it, each binary input has independent negative power input of opto-coupler. The
inputted voltage can be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and 250V.
NR1503A
BI_01
01
Opto01-
02
BI_02
03
Opto02-
04
BI_03
05
Opto03-
06
BI_04
07
Opto04-
08
BI_05
09
Opto05-
10
BI_06
11
Opto06-
12
BI_07
13
Opto07-
14
BI_08
15
Opto08-
16
BI_09
17
Opto09-
18
BI_10
19
Opto10-
20
BI_11
21
Opto11-
22
Figure 6.3-4 Pin definition of binary input module NR1503A

Table 6.3-2 Pin definition of binary input module NR1503A
Pin No.
Symbol
Description
01
BI_01
Configurable binary input 1
02
Opto01-
Negative pole of power supply of configurable binary input 1
03
BI_02
04
Opto02-
05
BI_03
06
Opto03-
07
BI_04
08
Opto04-
6-18

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Pin No.
Symbol
Description
09
BI_05
10
Opto05-
11
BI_06
12
Opto06-
13
BI_07
14
Opto07-
15
BI_08
16
Opto08-
17
BI_09
18
Opto09-
19
BI_10
20
Opto10-
21
BI_11
22
Opto11-
NR1506AS
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1506AS and 20 configurable high voltage binary
inputs are equipped with it. The inputted voltage can be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and
250V and the module has opto-coupler power monitor circuit.
An internal binary input [BI_COMMON] is equipped for NR1506AS type BI module, please refer to
Section 3.12.2.2 for details.
6-19
Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Opto+
01
BI_01
02
BI_02
03
BI_03
04
BI_04
05
BI_05
06
BI_06
07
BI_07
08
BI_08
09
BI_09
10
11
BI_10
11
12
13
BI_11
12
14
BI_12
13
BI_13
14
BI_14
15
19
BI_15
16
20
BI_16
17
BI_17
18
BI_18
19
BI_19
20
BI_20
21
COM-
22
NR1506AS
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
15
16
17
18
21
22
BI_COMMON
Figure 6.3-9 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS

Table 6.3-3 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS
Pin No.
Symbol
Description
01
Opto+
Positive pole of power supply of the module
02
BI_01
03
BI_02
04
BI_03
05
BI_04
06
BI_05
07
BI_06
08
BI_07
09
BI_08
10
BI_09
11
BI_10
12
BI_11
13
BI_12
14
BI_13
15
BI_14
6-20

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Pin No.
Symbol
Description
16
BI_15
17
BI_16
18
BI_17
19
BI_18
20
BI_19
21
BI_20
22
COM-
Common terminal of negative pole of power supply of the module
6.3.8 Binary Output (BO) Module

NR1521A, NR1521B, NR1521C, NR1523A and NR1549A are five types of standard BO modules.
All the binary outputs can be configured by PCS-Explorer software according to user requirement,
please refer to chapter 9 about the concrete operation method.
It is recommended that the BO contacts controlled by fault detector is used for tripping or operating
signals BO, and the BO contacts not controlled by fault detector is used for alarm signal and other
signal BO.
NR1521A, NR1521B and NR1521C
NR1521A can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, and each output contact will be
controlled by the fault detector.
NR1521B can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, the first 9 BO contacts will be
controlled by fault detector and the last two BO contacts will not.
NR1521C can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, and each output contact is not
controlled by the fault detector.
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1521A, NR1521B and NR1521C. The pin definition of
the connectors is described as below.
NR1521A
BO_01
BO_ 02
BO_ 03
BO_ 04
BO_ 05
BO_ 06
BO_ 07
BO_ 08
BO_ 09
BO_ 10
BO_ 11
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Figure 6.3-10 Pin definition of BO module NR1521A (Pin definition of NR1521B and 1521C are similar to it)
6-21
Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
NR1523A
NR1523A can provide 11 signal output contacts and all the contacts are normally open (NO)
contacts. Only the last three contacts ([BO_09], [BO_10] and [BO_11]) are magnetic latched NO
contacts defined as protection tripping signal generally. Except for [BO_07] and [BO_08], all the
other contacts will be controlled by positive power supply of fault detector.
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is
described as below.
NR1523A
BO_01
BO_ 02
BO_ 03
BO_ 04
BO_ 05
BO_ 06
BO_ 07
BO_ 08
BO_ 09
BO_ 10
BO_ 11
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Figure 6.3-11 Pin definition of BO module NR1523A
NR1549A
NR1549A can provide 11 output contacts and all the contacts are magnetic latched normally open
(NO) contacts and will be controlled by positive power supply of fault detector.
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is
described as below.
6-22

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
BO_01
NR1549A
BO_ 02
BO_ 03
BO_ 04
BO_ 05
BO_ 06
BO_ 07
BO_ 08
BO_ 09
BO_ 10
BO_ 11
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Figure 6.3-12 Pin definition of BO module NR1549A
6.3.9 Analog Input (AI) Module (NR1401)

AI module is applicable for power plant or substation with conventional VT and CT, the module is
not required if the device is used with ECT/EVT.
The NR1401 module can provide 12-channel analog signal inputs. A 24-pin connector is fixed on
the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is described as below (Take the typical
definition of the first analog input module as an example).
Two kinds of AI modules (12-channel current AI module, 3-channel current and 9-channel voltage
AI module) can be used for PCS-915. If voltage is connected, one 3-channel current and
9-channel voltage AI module should be configured. For current channel, rating 5 A or 1 A can be
selected. Please declare which kind of AI module is needed before ordering. Maximum linear
range of the current converter is 40In.
6-23
Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Ia_Bay01
01
Ian_Bay01
02
Ib_Bay01
03
Ibn_Bay01
04
Ic_Bay01
05
Icn_Bay01
06
Ia_Bay02
07
Ian_Bay02
08
Ib_Bay02
09
Ibn_Bay02
10
Ic_Bay02
11
Icn_Bay02
12
Ia_Bay03
13
Ian_Bay03
14
Ib_Bay03
15
Ibn_Bay03
16
Ic_Bay03
17
Icn_Bay03
18
Ia_Bay04
19
Ian_Bay04
20
Ib_Bay04
21
Ibn_Bay04
22
Ic_Bay04
23
Icn_Bay04
24
NR1401
Figure 6.3-13 Typical pin definition of the first 12-channel current AI module
Ia_Bayxx
01
Ian_Bayxx
02
Ib_Bayxx
03
Ibn_Bayxx
04
Ic_Bayxx
05
Icn_Bayxx
06
Ua_BB1
07
Uan_BB1
08
Ub_BB1
09
Ubn_BB1
10
Uc_BB1
11
Ucn_BB1
12
Ua_BB2
13
Uan_BB2
14
Ub_BB2
15
Ubn_BB2
16
Uc_BB2
17
Ucn_BB2
18
Ua_BB3
19
Uan_BB3
20
Ub_BB3
21
Ubn_BB2
22
Uc_BB3
23
Ucn_BB3
24
NR1401
Figure 6.3-14 Typical pin definition of 3-channel current and 9-channel voltage AI module
For AI module, if the plug is not put in the socket, external CT circuit is closed itself. Just shown as
below.
6-24

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Plug
Socket
In
Out
plug is not put in the socket
In
Out
Put the plug in the socket
Figure 6.3-15 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed

A
B
C
P2
S2
P1
S1
02
01
04
03
06
05
Figure 6.3-16 Current connection of AI module
6-25
Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
A
B
C
13
14
15
16
17
18
Figure 6.3-17 Voltage connection of AI module
6-26

Date: 2015-07-13
7 Settings
7 Settings
Table of Contents
7 Settings .............................................................................................. 7-a
7.1 Device Settings ............................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Communication Settings ................................................................................ 7-3
7.3 Label Settings................................................................................................ 7-10
7.4 Function Links................................................................................................ 7-11
7.5 System Settings ............................................................................................ 7-14
7.6 GOOSE Receiving Links............................................................................... 7-16
7.7 GOOSE Sending Links ................................................................................. 7-16
7-a
Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
Settings are classified to two kinds, protection settings and common settings. Each protection
element has its independent setting menu which are given detailed description in chapter
Operation Theory. In this chapter only common settings are introduced. Common settings
consist of device settings, communication settings, label settings, system settings, function links
and etc.
PCS-915 has ten protection setting groups to coordinate with the different modes of power system
operation. One of these setting groups is assigned to be active. However, common settings are
shared by all protection setting groups.
If all the protection settings are set and displayed as secondary value (the communication setting
[Opt_Display_Settings] is set as 1 or the setting is not configured), all the current settings are
converted from primary current according to reference CT ratio instead of the actual CT ratio of
each bay.
7.1 Device Settings
No.
Setting list
Item
Bx.Un_BinaryInput
HDR_EncodedMode
Description
Voltage level of binary input for the module that
located in slot No.x
Select encoding format of header (HDR) file
COMTRADE recording file. Default value is UTF-8.
Setting Range
0:24V, 1:48V
2:110V, 3:220V, 4: 30V,
5: 125V
GB18030, UTF-8
0: Current Language
Opt_Caption_103
The language of group caption of IEC103 protocol
1: Fixed Chinese
2: Fixed English
Using moveable disk to realize the backup and

4
En_MDisk
recovery of program and configuration.

Default value is 0, and the function is reserved.
En_Volt_BB
Voltage concerned function is enabled or disabled
0: Disable
1:Enable
0: Disable
1:Enable
Following device settings are configured only for digital substation

6
Bx.t_Dly_Interp_SV
The SV interpolation back-off time of the GOOSE

and SV module that located in slot No.x
1500s~15000s
0: SV LAN mode
Opt_RecvMode_SV
SV point-to-point receiving mode is enabled ot not.
1:
SV
point-to-point
receiving mode
8
N_Ch_Max_SV
The maximum number of SV channel
24~40
0: the sample value can be displayed even a bay is

out of service (the function link [@Bayn.Link_On] is
9
En_ClearSV
set as 0).
0, 1
1: the sample value will be cleared if a bay is out of

service (the function link [@Bayn.Link_On] is set as
7-1
Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
0).
Setting description
1.
[Bx.Un_BinaryInput]
The setting is used to set the voltage level of corresponding binary input module. For
high-voltage BI modules, 110V, 125V or 220V can be set according to the actual requirement.
For low-voltage BI modules, 24V, 30V or 48V can be set according to the actual requirement.
0: 24V
1: 48V
2: 110V
3: 220V
4: 30V
5: 125V
2.
[HDR_EncodedMode]
Default value of [HDR_EncodedMode] is 1 (i.e. UTF-8 code) and please set it to 0 (i.e. GB18030)
according to the special requirement.
3.
[Opt_Caption_103]
0: the group caption of IEC103 protocol is in current language

1: the group caption of IEC103 protocol is in Chinese
2: the group caption of IEC103 protocol is in English
It is recommended to be set as 1 if the device communicate with SCADA in Chinese.
4.
[En_MDisk]
1: Use moveable disk to realize the backup and recovery function.

0: Moveable disk will be disabled.
A moveable mdisk is implemented on the MON plug-in module to backup and restore programs,
settings and configurations.
If MON plug-in module is broken, remove the mdisk and put it into a new MON plug-in module, use
the menu on HMI to restore the backup programs and configurations. If DSP plug-in module is
broken, after a new DSP plug-in module is installed, use the menu on HMI to restore the backup
programs and configurations. If the moveable mdisk is broken, after a new mdisk is installed on
the MON plug-in module, use the menu on HMI to back up the current programs and
configurations into the new mdisk.
The default setting is 0.
5.
[En_Volt_BB]
7-2

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
It should be set as 0 if busbar voltage is not connected to PCS-915, then all the voltage
concerned function are disabled. It should be set as 1 if busbar voltage is connected to
PCS-915, then all the voltage concerned function can be enabled (each voltage concerned
function maybe controlled by corresponding logic setting).
Access path:
MainMenuSettingsProduct SetupDevice Settings
7.2 Communication Settings
Setting list
No.
Setting Item
Range
Description
The IED name defined in 61850
IEDNAME
IP_LAN1
IP address of Ethernet port A
Mask_LAN1
Subnet mask of Ethernet port A
En_LAN1
IP_LAN2
IP address of Ethernet port B
Mask_LAN2
Subnet mask of Ethernet port B
En_LAN2
IP_LAN3
IP address of Ethernet port C
Mask_LAN3
Subnet mask of Ethernet port C
10 En_LAN3
protocol
0,1
0,1
0,1
Put Ethernet port A into service
Put Ethernet port B into service
Put Ethernet port C into service
11 IP_LAN4
IP address of Ethernet port D
12 Mask_LAN4
Subnet mask of Ethernet port D
13 En_LAN4
14 Gateway
0,1
000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255
Put Ethernet port D into service

Gateway of router
Enable/disable sending message in
15 En_Broadcast
0: disable, 1: enable
broadcast
mode
via
network.
(IEC103).
Time
16 Fmt_Net_103
0, 1
scale
format
of
IEC
60870-5-103 protocol (for Ethernet

port).
Communication address between the
17 Addr_RS485A
0~255
protective device with the SCADA or

RTU via RS-485 serial port 1.
18 Baud_RS485A
4800,9600,19200,
38400,57600,115200 bps
Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port

1.
7-3
Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
No.
Setting Item
19 Protocol_RS485A
Range
0~2
Description
Communication
protocol
of
rear
RS-485 serial port 1.

Spontaneous events are sent in the
20 Inf_RS485A_103
0, 1
format of FUN and INF based on IEC

60870-5-103 protocol (for RS-485
serial port 1).
Time
21 Fmt_RS485A_103
0, 1
scale
format
of
IEC

serial port 1).
Communication address between the
22 Addr_RS485B
0~255
protective device with the SCADA or

RTU via RS-485 serial port 2.
23 Baud_RS485B
24 Protocol_RS485B
4800,9600,19200,
38400,57600,115200 bps
0~2
Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port

2.
Communication
protocol
of
rear
RS-485 serial port 2.

Spontaneous events are sent in the
25 Inf_RS485B_103
0, 1
format of FUN and INF based on IEC

serial port 2).
Time
26 Fmt_RS485B_103
0, 1
scale
format
of
IEC

serial port 2).
Threshold
value
measurement
27 Threshold_Measmt_Net
0~100%
through
of
values
IEC103
or
sending
to
SCADA
IEC61850
protocol.
Default value: 1%.
The time period when the equipment
28 Period_Measmt_Net
0~65535s
sends measurement data to SCADA

through IEC103 protocol.
Default value:60.
Select the format of measurement
29 Format_Measmt
0, 1
data sent to SCADA through IEC103

protocol.
30 Baud_Printer
31 En_AutoPrint
32 Opt_TimeSyn
4800,9600,
19200,38400, 51600, 115200 bps
Baud rate of printer port
0: disable
Enable/disable
1: enable
function
Conventional
7-4
Select
the
automatic
mode
of
printing
time

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
No.
Setting Item
Range
SAS
Description
synchronization of equipment.
Advanced
NoTimeSyn
000.000.000.000~
33 IP_Server_SNTP
255.255.255.255
34 OffsetHour_UTC
-12~12hrs
35 OffsetMinute_UTC
0~60min
Primary value/
36 Opt_Display_Status
Secondary value
Primary value/
37 Opt_Display_Settings
38 IP_StandbyServer_SNTP
Secondary value
000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
39 En_Server_SNTP
0, 1
The address of the external SNTP

clock synchronization server sending
SNTP message to the equipment.
The local time zone also refered to as
the hour offset hour from UTC .
The offset minute of local time from
UTC.
Measurement values are displayed in
primary value or secondary value
Select
display primary value or
secondary
value
for
protection
settings
The address of the SNTP clock
synchronization standby server.
Logic setting to enable/disable SNTP
server mode
Following communication settings are configured only for digital substation

0: PPS
40 Opt_TimeSyn_PL
1: IRIGB
2: 1588PPS
3: SLAVEPPS
Select
the
time
synchronization
source of process layer (the default

value is 1).
GOOSE double-net mode is enabled
41 En_NetB_GOOSE
0, 1
or not
0: single-net mode
1: double-net mode
GOOSE single/double-net
42 En_DualNet_GOOSE
0, 1
mode is
enabled or not
0: double-net mode
1: single/double-net mode
SV double-net mode is enabled or
43 En_NetB_SV
0, 1
not
0: single-net mode
1: double-net mode
Enable Bx (GOOSE and SV module
44 Bx.En_PPS_Output
0, 1
that located in slot No.x) to output

pulse per second
Following communication settings are configured only when DNP3.0 protocol is adopted
7-5
Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
No.
Setting Item
Range
Description
The logic setting to enable/disable
45 En_TCPx_DNP
0 or 1
network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,

4)
46 Addr_Slave_TCPx_DNP
0~65519
47 Addr_Master_TCPx_DNP
0~65519
48 IP_Master_TCPx_DNP
000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
It is the slave address of network

No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is the master address of network
It is the IP address of network No.x
DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is the communication map of
49 Opt_Map_TCPx_DNP
0~4

4)
It is the OBJ1 default variation of
50 Obj01DefltVar_TCPx_DNP
0~1

4)
0~2

4)
0~4

4)
0~2

4)
0~2

4)
It is the timeout of application layer of
55 t_AppLayer_TCPx_DNP
0~5 (s)

4)
It is the heartbeat time interval of
56 t_KeepAlive_TCPx_DNP
0~7200 (s)

4)
The logic setting is used to enable or
57 En_UR_TCPx_DNP
0 or 1
disable
the
unsolicited
message
function of network No.x DNP client.

(x=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is the online retransmission number
58 Num_URRetry_TCPx_DNP
2~10
of
the
unsolicited
message
of
7-6

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
No.
Setting Item
Range
Description
4)
It is the offline timeout of the
59 t_UROfflRetry_TCPx_DNP
1~5000 (s)
unsolicited message of network No.x

DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is the class level of the Binary
60 Class_BI_TCPx_DNP
0~3
Input of network No.x DNP client.

(x=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is the class level of the Analog
61 Class_AI_TCPx_DNP
0~3
Input of network No.x DNP client.

(x=1, 2, 3, 4)
62 t_Select_TCPx_DNP
0~240 (s)
It is the selection timeout of network

It is the time interval of the time
63 t_TimeSynIntvl_TCPx_DNP
0~3600 (s)
synchronization function of network

1.
Setting description
[En_LANx] (x= 2, 3, 4)
These setting are used to enable/disable IP addresses of Ethernet 2, 3 and 4 respectively. IP

address of Ethernet 1 is enabled fixedly.
1: enable the IP address of Ethernet port and the corresponding IP address setting is needed to
be set.
0: disable the IP address of Ethernet port and the corresponding IP address setting is not needed
to be set.
2.
[En_Broadcast]
This setting is only used for IEC 103 protocol. If NR network IEC103 protocol is used, the setting
must be set as 1.
0: the device does not send UDP messages through network;
1: the device sends UDP messages through network.
3.
[Fmt_Net_103]
If the setting is set as0, GDD data type of spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103
protocol is 18 (automatic supervision report, binary input change report), 19 (tripping report), i.e.
4-byte time scale format.
If the setting is set as1, GDD data type of spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103
protocol is 203 (automatic supervision report, binary input change report), 204 (tripping report), i.e.
7-byte time scale format.
7-7
Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
4.
[Protocol_RS485x] (x=A, B)
The setting is used to select the communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port x.
0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
1: Modbus protocol
2: DNP protocol
5.
[Inf_RS485A_103], [Inf_RS485B_103]
When spontaneous events are sent via generic services based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, this
setting should be setting as 0. When spontaneous events are sent in the format of FUN and INF
based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, this setting should be set as 1.
6.
[Fmt_RS485A_103], [Fmt_RS485B_103]
The setting is invalid if the setting [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as1.

If the setting is set as0 and [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as 0, GDD data type of
spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is 18 (automatic supervision report,
binary input change report), 19 (tripping report), i.e. 4-byte time scale format.
If the setting is set as1 and [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as 0, GDD data type of
spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is 203 (automatic supervision report,
binary input change report), 204 (tripping report), i.e. 7-byte time scale format.
7.
[Format_Measmt]
The setting is used to select the format of measurement data sent to SCADA through IEC103
protocol.
0: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 12;
1: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 7, i.e. 754 short real number of IEEE standard.
8.
[En_AutoPrint]
If automatic print is required for disturbance report after protection operating, the setting should be
set as 1.
9.
[Opt_TimeSyn]
There are four selections for clock synchronization of device, each selection includes different time
clock synchronization signals shown in following table.
Item
Description
PPS(RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level.
Conventional
IRIG-B(RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level.

PPM(DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
PPS(DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
SAS
SNTP(PTP): Unicast (point to point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network.

SNTP(BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network.
7-8

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
Item
Description
Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol.
IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588.
Advanced
IRIG-B(Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface.

PPS(Fiber) PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface.
When no time synchronization signal is connected to the equipment, please select
NoTimeSyn
this option and the alarm message [Alm_TimeSyn] will not be issued anymore.
Conventional mode and SAS mode are always be supported by device, but Advanced mode
is only supported when NET-DSP module is equipped. The alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] may be
issued to remind user loss of time synchronization signals.
1)
When SAS is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal, the device
will not send the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]. When Conventional mode is selected, if there
is no conventional clock synchronization signal, SAS mode will be enabled automatically
with the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] being issued simultaneously.
2)
When Advanced mode is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal

connected to NET-DSP moduleSAS mode is enabled automatically with the alarm signal
[Alm_TimeSyn] being issued simultaneously.
3)
When NoTimeSyn mode is selected, the device will not send alarm signals without
NOTICE!
The clock message via IEC103 protocol is INVALID when the device receives the
IRIG-B signal through RC-485 port.
10.
[IP_Server_SNTP]
It is the address of the SNTP time synchronization server which sends SNTP timing messages to
the relay or BCU.
11.
[IP_StandbyServer_SNTP]
Both [IP_Server_SNTP] and [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] are inefffective unless SNTP clock

synchronization is valid.
When both [IP_Server_SNTP] and [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] are set as 000.000.000.000, the
deivce receives broadcast SNTP synchronization message.
When either [IP_Server_SNTP] or [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] is set as 000.000.000.000, the
deivce adopt the setting whose value is not equal to 000.000.000.000 as SNTP server address
and the deivce receives unicast SNTP synchronization message.
When neither [IP_Server_SNTP] nor [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] are set as 000.000.000.000, the
deivce adopt the setting [IP_Server_SNTP] as SNTP server address to receive unicast SNTP
synchronization message. If the device does not receive the server responses after 30s, the
deivce adopt the setting [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] as SNTP server address to receive unicast
SNTP synchronization message. The device will switch between [IP_Server_SNTP] and
[IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] repeatedly if the device always can not receive the server responses
7-9
Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
waiting 30s.
12.
[Opt_Display_Status]
If this setting is not configured, the sampled values are displayed as secondary value by default.
If this setting is set as 0, the sampled values are displayed as primary value, if this setting is set
as 1, the sampled values are displayed as secondary value.
The primary voltage is converted into secondary voltage according to rated secondary voltage of
VT (i.e. the system setting [U2n_PP]), if digital sampling mode is adopted, the virtual rated
secondary voltage of VT is 100V by default. The primary current is converted into secondary
current according to rated secondary current of reference CT (i.e. the system setting [I2n_Ref), if
digital sampling mode is adopted, the primary current is converted into secondary current
according to the virtual rated secondary current of reference CT.
13.
[Opt_Display_Settings]
If this setting is not configured, the protection settings are set and displayed as secondary value
by default. If this setting is set as 0, the protection settings are set and displayed as primary
value, if this setting is set as 1, the protection settings are set and displayed as secondary
value.
The primary voltage is converted into secondary voltage according to rated secondary voltage of
VT (i.e. the system setting [U2n_PP]), if digital sampling mode is adopted, the virtual rated
secondary voltage of VT is 100V by default. The primary current is converted into secondary
current according to rated secondary current of reference CT (i.e. the system setting [I2n_Ref]),
if digital sampling mode is adopted, the primary current is converted into secondary current
according to the virtual rated secondary current of reference CT.
14.
[En_DualNet_GOOSE]
The setting is valid only when GOOSE is enabled. If single/double-net mode is enabled (i.e. the
setting is set as 1), for the single-net connected signal, the related alarm signal of network B
will be shielded.
Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupComm Settings
7.3 Label Settings
Setting list
No.
Symbol
Description
Name_Busx
Label setting of busbar No.x
Name_Bayn
Label setting of bay n
Following label settings are configured only for digital substation

3
Bm.Name_n_GCommLink
Label setting of GOOSE communication link n of the GOOSE and
7-10

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
SV module that located in slot No.m
4
Bm.Name_n_SVCommLink
Label setting of SV communication link n of the GOOSE and SV

module that located in slot No.m
These settings are used to definite the label of each bay and busbar. They can be set by 6
characters at most. The label of each bay and busbar will influence the displayed contents of all
reports, settings and metering that related with each bay and busbar.
Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupLabel Settings
7.4 Function Links

Function link is a special logic setting which is used to enable protection function. These function
links can be configured through local HMI or remote PC (controlled by the function link
[Link_RmtCtrlLink]).
Each function link is one of the conditions that decide whether the relevant protection function is in
service. If the virtual binary input [Link_RmtCtrlLink] is set as 1, through SAS or RTU, the
function link can be set as 1 or 0; and it means that the relevant protection function can be in
service or out of service through remote command.
These function links provide a convenient way for the operator to put the function in service or out
of service remotely away from an unattended substation.
Setting list
No.
Symbol
Remark
Enable remote setting modification. Set it as 0 if only local setting
Link_RmtChgSetting
modification is needed. Set it as 1 if local and remote setting

modification are both needed.
If it is not configured for a project, its default value is 1.
Enable remote active setting group modification. Set it as 0 if only
Link_RmtChgGrp
local active setting group modification is needed. Set it as 1 if local

and remote active setting group modification are both needed.
Enable remote function links modification. Set it as 0 if only local
Link_RmtCtrlLink
function links modification is needed. Set it as 1 if local and remote

function links modification are both needed.
Enable all protective functions. All the protective functions can be
Link_Prot
enabled only when it is set as 1. If it is set as 0, all the protective

functions is disabled.
7-11
Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
No.
Symbol
87B.Link
50BF.Link
Remark
1: Enabling feeder breaker failure protection
0: Disabling feeder breaker failure protection
1: Circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance,
0: Circuit breaker of bay n is not in maintenance
Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is
Fdr.50DZ.Link
input and function link of a protective element is configured according

to each bay is set as Disable (refer to Section 3.4))
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection
Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n (it
@Bayn.50DZ.Link

1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n
Function link of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured
10
50SOTF.Link
function link of a protective element is configured according to each

bay is set as Disable (refer to Section 3.4))
Function link of enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS
bay) (it is configured when the basic information configuration
11
@Bayn.50SOTF.Link
configured according to each bay is set as Enable (refer to Section

3.4))
1: Enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay)
0: Disabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay)
Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground
overcurrent protection (it is configured when the basic information
configuration Enabling binary input and function link of a protective
element is configured according to each bay is set as Disable (refer
12
50/51.Link
to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection
13
@Bayn.50/51P.Link
Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it is
7-12

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
No.
Symbol
Remark
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n
Function link of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it is
14
@Bayn.50/51G.Link

1: Enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n
0: Disabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n
Function link of enabling PD protection (it is configured when the basic
15
62PD.Link

Function link of enabling PD protection of bay n (it is configured when
the basic information configuration Enabling binary input and function
16
@Bayn.62PD.Link
link of a protective element is configured according to each bay is set

as Enable (refer to Section 3.4))
17
Link_IntLinkx
1: Two busbars are under inter-connected operation mode

0: Two busbars are not under inter-connected operation mode
Following function links are configured only for digital substation

1: Bay n is put into service.
18
@Bayn.Link_On
0: Bay n is out of service.

It is configured when digital sampling mode is adopted.
1: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is enabled. The
disconnector position will be decided by [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] and
19
@Bayn.Link_DS
[@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2];
0: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is disabled. The
disconnector position will be decided by disconnector position binary
input.
20
@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1
[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as 1;
21
@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2

[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as 1;
7-13
Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
No.
Symbol
Remark
Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links
7.5 System Settings
Setting list
No.
Item
Setting Range
Default Setting
Active_Grp
1~10
PrimaryEquip_Name
Max 20 characters
fn
50Hz, 60Hz
50Hz
U1n_PP
1~1200kV
220kV
U2n_PP
1.00~200V
100V
Bayn.I1n
0~9999A
1200A
Bayn.I1n_CT1
0~9999A
1200A
Bayn.I1n_CT2
0~9999A
1200A
I1n_Ref
1~9999A
1200A
10
I2n_Ref
1A or 5A
1A
11
Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode
0, 1
12
Cfg_DS_BBx
00000000~01FFFFFE
Setting description
1.
[Active_Grp]
The number of active setting group, ten setting groups can be configured for busbar differential
protection and breaker failure protection, and only one is active at a time.
2.
[PrimaryEquip_Name]
Name of the protected primary equipment, such as busbar, transformer, etc.

3.
[U1n_PP]
Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage of VT.

4.
[U2n_PP]
Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage of VT.

5.
[Bayn.I1n]
Rated primary current of the CT of bay n. It should be set as 0 if the corresponding bay is not
7-14

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
used.
When digital sampling mode is adopted, the setting range will be -9999A~9999A, if the polarity
mark of CT of bay n is wrong, it can be corrected by setting [Bayn.I1n] as a negative value.
6.
[Bayn.I1n_CT1], [Bayn.I1n_CT2]
If there are two CTs available for bay n (such as a bus coupler with double CTs available),
[Bayn.I1n_CT1] and [Bayn.I1n_CT2] are the rated primary current of the two CTs of bay n. They
should be set as 0 if the corresponding bay is not used.
When digital sampling mode is adopted, the setting range will be -9999A~9999A, if the polarity
mark of CT1 or CT2 of bay n is wrong, it can be corrected by setting [Bayn.I1n_CT1] or
[Bayn.I1n_CT2] as a negative value.
7.
[I1n_Ref]
Rated primary current of reference CT.

This setting is used in case that the rated CT primary currents of each feeder connected to busbar
are different. Among these CTs, the CT with the most applied ratio is taken as the reference CT.
If the maximum CT ratio is two times larger than the minimum CT ratio, in order to ensure accuracy,
the rated primary current of reference CT shall be half of the maximal rated primary current.
For example, assume only 3 feeders are connected to the busbar. The CT ratios are 600:5 (feeder
02), 600:5 (feeder 03) and 1200:5 (feeder 04). Then, this setting should be set as 600.
8.
[I2n_Ref]
The rated secondary current of reference CT. This setting is used in case that the rated secondary
current of each feeder connected to busbar are different. Among these CTs, the CT with the most
applied ratio is taken as the reference CT.
If digital sampling is adopted, it is the virtual rated secondary current of reference CT. It can be set
according to users habit. If the sampled values are displayed as secondary value, the primary
current are converted into secondary current according to it. If all the protection settings are set as
secondary value, users should set all the current settings according to it.
9.
[Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode]
When PCS-915IC is applied to an unearthed system, it should be set as 1. It will affect the
settings of voltage controlled element, please refer to Section 3.12.6 and Section 3.5.6, the
criterion of VT circuit supervision will also change, please refer to Section 3.14.
10. [Cfg_DS_BBx]
Disconnector position configuration setting of BBx. In the case of single busbar with bus section
arrangement, the setting is used to indicate which busbar zone the feeder is connected to. The
setting is consisted of 32 binary digits but 8 hexadecimal digits can be viewed through device LCD
screen. The definition of the system setting is as follows.
7-15
Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
Bay 07
Bay 06
Bay 05
Bay 04
Bay 03
Bay 02
Bay 01
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Bay 23
Bay 22
Bay 21
Bay 20
Bay 19
Bay 18
Bay 17
Bay 08
Bay 24
Bay 09
Bay 25
Bay 10
Bay 11
Bay 12
10
Bay 13
11
30
12
Bay 14
Bay 5
31
13
Bay 16
14
15
The feeder bay is connected to BBx if corresponding binary digit of [Cfg_DS_BBx] is set as 1.
Generally, Bay 01 is connected with BC, so bit 0 of [Cfg_DS_BBx] is not used. For double-CT BC,
bay 01 and bay 02 will be occupied, so bit 0 and bit 1 of [Cfg_DS_BBx] are not used.
Access path:
MainMenuSettingsSystem Settings
7.6 GOOSE Receiving Links

GOOSE receiving links will changed according to the specific project, so it is not listed here. Users
can see the GOOSE receiving links of each project via the PCS-Explorer software).
Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Recv Links
7.7 GOOSE Sending Links

NOTICE!
In this section, @Bayn is used to refer to the label setting of bay n.
Setting list
No.
Symbol
Remark
@Bayn.GLink_Send_Trp
GOOSE sending link of tripping of bay n (n=1~23)
@Bayn.GLink_Send_TT
GOOSE sending link of transfer tripping of bay n (n=2~23)
Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Send Links
7-16

Date: 2015-03-07

Table of Contents
8 Human Machine Interface ................................................................ 8-a
8.1 Human Machine Interface Overview .............................................................. 8-1
8.1.1 Functionality ......................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Keypad and Keys ................................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.3 LED Indications .................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.4 Front Communication Port ................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.5 Ethernet Port Setup ............................................................................................................. 8-4
8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree ...................................................................... 8-5

8.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 8-5
8.2.2 Measurements ..................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.2.3 Status ................................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.2.4 Records .............................................................................................................................. 8-10
8.2.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 8-10
8.2.6 Print .....................................................................................................................................8-11
8.2.7 Local Cmd .......................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.2.8 Information ......................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.2.9 Test..................................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.2.10 Clock ................................................................................................................................ 8-16
8.2.11 Language ......................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.3 Understand LCD Display .............................................................................. 8-16

8.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 8-16
8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation ...................................................................................... 8-16
8.3.3 Display When Tripping ....................................................................................................... 8-17
8.3.4 Display under Abnormal condition ..................................................................................... 8-21
8.3.5 Display When Binary Input Status Changes ..................................................................... 8-22
8-a
Date: 2014-09-20
8.3.6 Display Device Logs .......................................................................................................... 8-25
8.4 Keypad Operation ......................................................................................... 8-26

8.4.1 View Device Sampled Values ............................................................................................ 8-26
8.4.2 View Status of binary signals ............................................................................................. 8-26
8.4.3 View Device Records......................................................................................................... 8-27
8.4.4 View Device Setting ........................................................................................................... 8-27
8.4.5 Modify Device Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-28
8.4.6 Copy Protection Setting ..................................................................................................... 8-30
8.4.7 Print Device Records ......................................................................................................... 8-31
8.4.8 Switch Setting Group ......................................................................................................... 8-32
8.4.9 Delete Records .................................................................................................................. 8-33
8.4.10 Modify Device Clock ........................................................................................................ 8-34
8.4.11 View Module Information ................................................................................................. 8-35
8.4.12 Check Software Version .................................................................................................. 8-35
8.4.13 Communication Test ........................................................................................................ 8-36
8.4.14 Select Language .............................................................................................................. 8-36
List of Figures
Figure 8.1-1 Typical front panel of 8U chassis ......................................................................... 8-1
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel .................................................................... 8-2
Figure 8.1-3 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel .................................. 8-4
Figure 8.1-4 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102M ................................................... 8-5
Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree of PCS-915 ............................................................................................ 8-7
Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram .................................................................... 8-17
Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report ................................................................................ 8-18
Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report ................................................... 8-19
Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report ................................................................................ 8-21
Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary input change report ............................................................... 8-22
Figure 8.3-6 Display of control report ..................................................................................... 8-25
Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password............................................................................ 8-29
8-b

Date: 2014-09-20
Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings.......................................................................... 8-30

Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings.......................................................................... 8-30
Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings...................................................................................... 8-31
Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group .................................................................... 8-33
Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report.................................................................................... 8-34
Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock ................................................................................. 8-35
Figure 8.4-8 Display of selecting language ............................................................................ 8-37
List of Tables
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable ................................................................................. 8-4
Table 8.3-1 Operation elements list ......................................................................................... 8-19
Table 8.3-2 Binary input list ...................................................................................................... 8-22
Table 8.3-3 User operating event list ....................................................................................... 8-25
8-c
Date: 2014-09-20
8.1 Human Machine Interface Overview

The human-machine interface is implemented by human-machine interface (HMI) module
which includes the following components:
A 320240 backlight LCD visible in dim lighting conditions for monitoring status, fault
diagnostics and setting, etc.
LED indicators on the front panel for denoting the status of this protection operation.
A 9-key keypad on the front panel of the device for full access to the device.
HEALTHY
MISC ALM
PCS-915
BUSBAR RELAY
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
20
GR
P
13
ENT
11
12
ES
1
2
Figure 8.1-1 Typical front panel of 8U chassis

Indication No.
Description
A 320240 dots liquid crystal display
20 LED indicators
A 9-key keypad
A multiplex RJ45 port for local communication with a PC
Logo, device type and name
8.1.1 Functionality
The HMI module helps to view activated LED or a report display on the LCD after an
8-1
Date: 2014-09-20
incident occurred.
Operator is free to browse the data.
Navigate through the menu commands to locate the interested data.
8.1.2 Keypad and Keys

The keypad and keys on the front panel of the device provide convenience to the operator to view
data or change the devices setting.
GR
P
ESC
The keypad contains nine keys with different function. Following figure shows the keypad and
keys.
ENT
+
-
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel

No.
Symbol
,
and
Description
, arrow buttons
Move between selectable branches of the menu tree.
+, -
Change parameters or setting values.
ENT
Provide Enter/Execute function.
GRP
Setting Group selection.
ESC
Exit the present level in the menu tree.
NOTICE!
Any setting change shall be confirmed by pressing +, , , -, ENT in
sequence.
Any report deletion shall be executed by pressing +, -, +, -, ENT in sequence.
8.1.3 LED Indications

20 LED indicators are available for PCS-915, the 20 LED indicators are, from top to bottom,
operation (HEALTHY), self-supervision (MISC ALM), others are configurable, please refer to
Chapter 9 Configurable Function for details.
A brief explanation about some common LED indicators has been listed as bellow.
LED
HEALTHY
Display
Off
Description
When the device is out of service or any hardware error is detected
during self-check.
8-2

Date: 2014-09-20

LED
Display
Description
Green
Lit when the device is in service and ready for operation.
Off
When device in normal operating condition.
Yellow
Lit when other abnormality occurs.
Off
When the device is in normal operating condition.
Yellow
Lit when VT circuit failure or CT circuit failure occurs.
Off
Yellow
Lit when disconnector position is abnormal
Off
Red
Lit when busbar differential protection operates to trip.
Off
Red
Lit when breaker failure protection operates to trip.
Off
MISC ALM
CT/VT ALM
DS ALM
BBP TRIP
BFP TRIP
MISC TRIP
Red
Lit when misc operation signal (Op_MISC) is issued. Please refer to

Section 8.3.3.
The HEALTHY LED can only be turned on by energizing the device again to restart the
relay.
xx ALM LED is turned on when corresponding abnormalities mentioned above occurs

and turned off if the abnormalities are removed except for CT circuit failure alarm. CT
circuit failure alarm can be reset when the failure is removed and the device is rebooted
or energize the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or press ESC first then ENT
simultaneously
The xx TRIP LED is turned on and latched once any protection element operates. The
xx TRIP LED can be turned off by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg].
8.1.4 Front Communication Port

There is a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel. This port can be used as an RS-232 serial port
as well as a twisted-pair ethernet port. As shown in the following figure, a customized cable is
applied for debugging via this multiplex RJ45 port.
P2
P1
P3
8-3
Date: 2014-09-20

Figure 8.1-3 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel
In the above figure and the following table:

P1: To connect the multiplex RJ45 port. An 8-core cable is applied here.
P2: To connect the twisted-pair ethernet port of the computer.
P3: To connect the RS-232 serial port of the computer.
The definition of the 8-core cable in the above figure is introduced in the following table.
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable
Terminal
No.
Core color
Function
Device side
Computer side
(Left)
(Right)
Orange & white
TX+ of the ethernet port
P1-1
P2-1
Orange
TX- of the ethernet port
P1-2
P2-2
Green & white
RX+ of the ethernet port
P1-3
P2-3
Blue
TXD of the RS-232 serial port
P1-4
P3-2
Brown & white
RXD of the RS-232 serial port
P1-5
P3-3
Green
RX- for the ethernet port
P1-6
P2-6
Blue & white
Brown
The ground connection of the RS-232 port.
P1-7
P1-8
P3-5
8.1.5 Ethernet Port Setup

MON plug-in module is equipped with two or four 100Base-TX Ethernet interface, takes NR1102M
as an example, as shown in Figure 8.1-4. Its rear view and the definition of terminals.
The Ethernet port can be used to communication with PC via auxiliary software (PCS-Explorer)
after connecting the protection device with PC, so as to fulfill on-line function (please refer to the
instruction manual of PCS-Explorer). At first, the connection between the protection device and PC
must be established. Through setting the IP address and subnet mask of corresponding Ethernet
interface in the menu SettingsDevice SetupComm Settings, it should be ensured that the
protection device and PC are in the same network segment. For example, setting the IP address
and subnet mask of network A. (using network A to connect with PC)
PC: IP address is set as 198.87.96.102, subnet mask is set as 255.255.255.0
The IP address and subnet mask of protection device should be [IP_LAN1]= 198.87.96.XXX,
[Mask_LAN1]=255.255.255.0, [En_LAN1]=1. (XXX can be any value from 0 to 255 except 102)
If the logic setting [En_LAN1] is non-available, it means that network A is always enabled. If using
other Ethernet port, for example, Ethernet B, the logic setting [En_LAN2] must be set as 1.
8-4

Date: 2014-09-20
NR1102M
ETHERNET
Network A
Network B
ETHERNET
Network C
Network D
SYN+
SYNSGND
RTS
TXD
SGND
Figure 8.1-4 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102M
8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree

8.2.1 Overview
Pressing at any running interface can return to the main menu. Select different submenu by
and . Enter the selected submenu by pressing ENT or . Press and return to the
previous menu. Press ESC and exit the main menu directly. For fast return to the command
menu, one command menu will be recorded in the quick menu after its first execution. Up to five
latest menu commands can be recorded in the quick menu. by first in first out principle. It is
arranged from top to bottom and in accordance with the execution order of command menus.
Press to enter the main menu, the interface is shown in the following diagram:
8-5
Date: 2014-09-20
Quick Menu
Language
Main Menu
If the protective device is powered for the first time, there is no recorded shortcut menu. Press
to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:
Language
Clock
Test
Information
Local Cmd
Print
Settings
Records
Status
Measurements
8-6

Date: 2014-09-20

Main Menu
Measurements
Settings
Local Cmd
System Settings
Measurements1
Reset Target
Trig Oscillograph
Prot Settings
Measured Values
Download
BBP Settings
50DZ Settings
Phase Angle
Cal Values
Clear Counter
Confirm Disconnector
BC BFP Settings
Measurements2
Fdr BFP Settings
Measured Values
SOTF Settings
Phase Angle
OC Settings
Cal Values
PD Settings
Information
Version Info
Board Info
Copy Settings
Logic Links
Status
Function Links
GOOSE Send Links
Inputs
Device Test
GOOSE Recv Links
Prot Inputs
Disturb Events
Device Setup
Bay Inputs
Function Inputs
All Test
Select Test
Device Settings
Comm Settings
FD Inputs
Bay Inputs
Test
Superv Events
Label Settings
All Test
Select Test
Print
Function Inputs
GOOSE Inputs
Contact Inputs
IO Events
Device Info
Settings
All Test
Select Test
System Settings
Superv State
Prot Settings
Prot Superv
BBP Settings
Zone Cal BI
BC BFP Settings
Prot Misc Superv
Fdr BFP Settings

FD Superv
SOTF Settings
OC Settings
FD Bay Superv
Disturb Items
GOOSE Comm Counter
SV Comm Counter
PD Settings
All Settings
FD Misc Superv
GOOSE Superv
Logic Links
MiscBrd Superv
Function Links
GOOSE Send Links
GOOSE Recv Links
All Settings
Logic Links State

Function Links
GOOSE Send Links
Internal Signal
50DZ Settings
Prot Bay Superv
SV Superv
GOOSE Testing
Clock
Language
Device Setup
GOOSE Recv Links

Device Settings
Comm Settings
Label Settings
Records
Disturb Records
Superv Events
IO Events
Device Logs
Clear Records
All Settings
All Settings
Latest Chgd Settings
Disturb Records
Superv Events
IO Events
Device Status
Waveforms
Diff Wave
Bay Wave 1
Bay Wave 2
Bay Wave 3
Bay Wave 4
Bay Wave 5
Bay Wave 6
IEC103 Info
Cancel Print
Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree of PCS-915

8-7
Date: 2014-09-20
Under the main interface, press to enter the main menu, and select submenu by pressing ,
and ENT. The command menu adopts a tree shaped content structure. The above diagram
provides the integral structure and all the submenus under menu tree of the protection device.
This is the maximized menu of PCS-915, for a specific project, if some function is not available,
the corresponding submenu will hidden.
8.2.2 Measurements
This menu is used to display real time AC voltage and AC current sampled values of the protective
device. These data can help users to acquaint the operation condition of the protective device.
This menu comprises following submenus. Please refer to Section 5.2 about the details of
sampled values.
No.
Item
Description
Measurements1
Display sampled values on protection DSP module.
Measurements2
Display sampled values on fault detector DSP module.
8.2.2.1 Measurements1
The submenu Measurements1 has following submenus.
No.
Item
Description
Measured Values
Display measured analog values on protection DSP module.
Phase Angle
Display phase angles on protection DSP module.
Cal Values
Display measured values for debugging on protection DSP module.
8.2.2.2 Measurements2
The submenu Measurements2 has following lower submenus.
No.
Item
Description
Measured Values
Display measured analog values on fault detector DSP module.
Phase Angle
Display phase angles on fault detector DSP module.
Cal Values
Display measured values for debugging on fault detector DSP module.
8.2.3 Status
This menu is used to display real time binary inputs and alarm signals of the protective device.
These data can help users to acquaint the operation condition of the protective device. This menu
comprises following submenus. Please refer to Section 8.3.5 about the details of binary inputs and
Section 4.5 about the details of alarm signals.
No.
Item
Description
Inputs
Display the status of binary inputs
Superv State
Display the status of alarm signals
Logic Links State
Display the status of logic links
8-8

Date: 2014-09-20
8.2.3.1 Inputs
The submenu Inputs has following submenus.
No.
Item
GOOSE Inputs
Prot Inputs
FD Inputs
Description
Display the status of GOOSE binary inputs
Display the status of binary inputs that used for calculation of protection DSP
module
Display the status of binary inputs that used for calculation of fault detector
DSP module
Display the status of other binary inputs (such as time synchronizing binary
Contact Inputs
input, printing binary input, maintenance binary input, resetting binary input
and opto binary inputs).
(1) The submenu Prot Inputs includes the following command menus.
No.
Item
Bay Inputs
Function Input
Description
Display the status of binary inputs about each bay on protection DSP module.
Display the status of function enabling binary inputs on protection DSP
module.
(2) The submenu FD Inputs includes the following command menus.

No.
Item
Bay Inputs
Function Input
Description
Display the status of binary inputs about each bay on fault detector DSP
module.
Display the status of function enabling binary inputs on fault detector DSP
module.
8.2.3.2 Superv State

The submenu Superv State has following submenus.
No.
Item
Description
Prot Superv
Display the status of self-supervision signals on protection DSP module
FD Superv
Display the status of self-supervision signals on fault detector DSP module
GOOSE Superv
Display the status of GOOSE self-supervision signals
SV Superv
Display the status of SV self-supervision signals
MiscBrd Superv
Display the status of self-supervision signals of modules of process layer
The submenu Prot Superv includes the following command menus.
8-9
Date: 2014-09-20

No.
Item
Prot Bay Superv
Prot Misc Superv
Description
Display the status of self-supervision signals about each bay on protection
DSP module.
Display the status of other self-supervision signals on protection DSP
module.
The submenu FD Superv includes the following command menus.

No.
Item
FD Bay Superv
FD Misc Superv
Description
Display the status of self-supervision signals about each bay on fault detector
DSP module.
Display the status of other self-supervision signals on fault detector DSP
module.
8.2.3.3 Logic Links State

The submenu Logic Links State has following submenus.
No.
Item
Description
Function Links
Display the status of function links.
GOOSE Send Links
Display the status of GOOSE sending links.
GOOSE Recv Links
Display the status of GOOSE receiving links.
8.2.4 Records
This menu displays protection tripping report, self-supervision report, binary input change report
and control report. The protective device can store 1024 pieces of recorders for each kind of report
in non-volatile memory.
No.
Item
Description
Disturb Records
View the tripping report
Superv Events
View the self-supervision report
IO Events
View the binary input change report
Device Logs
View the control report
Clear Records
Clear all the device records
8.2.5 Settings
This submenu is used to browse, modify and set all settings including device settings,
communication parameters, label settings, function links, GOOSE links, system settings and
protection settings.
This menu includes the command menus and submenus as follows:
The submenu Settings includes the following command menus.
8-10

Date: 2014-09-20

No.
Item
Function description
System Settings
Set the system settings
Prot Settings
Set the protection settings
Logic Links
Includes function links and GOOSE links
Device Setup
Set the settings related to device setup
8.2.5.1 Device Setup

The submenu Device Setup includes the following command menus.
No.
Item
Device Settings
Set the device settings
Comm Settings
Set the communication settings.
Label Settings
Set the label settings of each protected element.
8.2.5.2 Logic Links

The submenu Logic Links includes the following command menus.
No.
Item
Function Links
Set the function links.
GOOSE Send Links
Set the GOOSE sending links.
GOOSE Recv Links
Set the GOOSE receiving links.
8.2.5.3 Prot Settings

The submenu Prot Settings includes the following command menus.
No.
Item
BBP Settings
Set the settings about busbar differential protection
50DZ Settings
Set the settings about dead zone fault protection
BC BFP Settings
Set the settings about BC/BS breaker failure protection
Fdr BFP Settings
Set the settings about feeder breaker failure protection
SOTF Settings
Set the settings about switch-onto-fault protection
OC Settings
Set the settings about overcurrent protection
PD Settings
Set the settings about pole disagreement protection
Copy Settings
To copy protection settings from one group to another group
8.2.6 Print
This menu is used to print the self-supervision report, binary input change report, waveform and
the information related with settings, fault report and 103 protocol, and so on.
This menu includes the command menus and submenus as follows:
8-11
Date: 2014-09-20

No.
1
Item
Device Info
Description
Print the description information of protective device.
Print settings, includes device settings, communication parameters, label
settings, function links, GOOSE links, system settings, and protection
Settings
settings. It can print by different classifications as well as printing all settings

of the device. Besides, it can also print out the latest changed setting item.
Disturb Records
Print trip reports.
Superv Events
Print self-check alarm and device operation abnormal alarm reports.
IO Events
Print status change of binary signal.
Device Status
Print all the values measured by the device
Waveforms
Print recorded waveforms.

Print 103 Protocol information, including function type (FUN), information
IEC103 Info
serial number (INF), general classification service group number, and

channel number (ACC).
Cancel Print
Cancel the print command
8.2.6.1 Settings
The submenu Settings includes the following command menus.
No.
Item
System Settings
Print the system settings.
Prot Settings
Print the protection settings
Logic Links
Print the function links or GOOSE links
Device Setup
Print the settings related to device setup
All Settings
Latest Chgd Settings
Print the content of all settings including device setups, system settings,
protection settings and logic links.
Print the content of the latest changed setting
(1) The submenu Device Setup includes the following command menus.
No.
Item
Device Settings
Print the device settings.
Comm Settings
Print the communication settings.
Label Settings
Print the label settings of protective device.
All Settings
Print all the settings related to device setup
(2) The submenu Logic Links includes the following command menus.
No.
Item
Function Links
Print the function links.
GOOSE Send Links
Print the GOOSE sending links.
8-12

Date: 2014-09-20

No.
Item
GOOSE Recv Links
Print the GOOSE receiving links.
All Settings
Print the all the logic links
(3) The submenu Prot Settings includes the following command menus.
No.
Item
BBP Settings
Print the settings about busbar differential protection
50DZ Settings
Print the settings about dead zone fault protection
BC BFP Settings
Print the settings about BC/BS breaker failure protection
Fdr BFP Settings
Print the settings about feeder breaker failure protection
SOTF Settings
Print the settings about switch-onto-fault protection
OC Settings
Print the settings about overcurrent protection
PD Settings
Print the settings about pole disagreement protection
All Settings
Print the all the protection settings
8.2.6.2 Waveforms
The submenu Waveforms has following submenus.
No.
Item
Description
Diff Wave
To print differential current waveforms and busbar voltage waveforms
Bay Wave 1
To print current waveforms of Bay 01~04
Bay Wave 2
Bay Wave 3
Bay Wave 4
Bay Wave 5
Bay Wave 6
8.2.7 Local Cmd

This menu is used to reset the latched tripping relay, protection device signal lamp and LCD
display. It can record the currently acquired waveform of the protection device under normal
condition for printing and uploading to substation automatic system (SAS). Besides, it can send
out the request of program download and clear the communication statistic information about
GOOSE, SV and optical fibre.
This menu includes the following command menus.
No.
Item
Reset Target
Reset the local signal, the signal indicator lamp and the LCD display.
Trig Oscillograph
Trigger waveform recording.
Download
Send out the download request.
8-13
Date: 2014-09-20

4
Clear Counter
Clear the communication statistic information about GOOSE and SV
Confirm Disconnector
Confirm the disconnector position
8.2.8 Information
In this menu the LCD displays current working state of each intelligent module and software
information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module.
No.
Item
Display software information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module,
Version Info
which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and

management sequence number.
Board Info
Monitor the current working state of each intelligent module.
8.2.9 Test
This menu is used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain the device.
It can be used to check module information and item fault message, and fulfill the communication
test function. Its also used to generate all kinds of report or event to transmit to the SAS without
any external input, so as to debug the communication on site.
No.
Item
Automatically generate all kinds of message to transmit to the backstage,
Device Test
including tripping, self-check and binary signal transmission. It can realize

the transmission of messages of different classification.
Display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit and
Internal Signal
Disturb Items
Check the fault report one by one.
GOOSE Comm Counter
Display the communication statistic information of GOOSE
SV Comm Counter
Display the communication statistic information of SV
relevant information about each protected bay
8.2.9.1 Device Test

The submenu Device Test has following submenus.
No.
Item
Disturb Events
Superv Events
IO Events
Description
View the relevant information about tripping report (only used for debugging
persons)
View the relevant information about alarm report (only used for debugging
persons)
View the relevant information about binary input change report (only used
for debugging persons)
8-14

Date: 2014-09-20

No.
4
Item
GOOSE Testing
Description
View the relevant information about GOOSE (only used for debugging
persons)
The submenu Disturb Events includes the following command menus.

No.
Item
Description
All Test
Ordinal test of all protection elements
Select Test
Selective test of corresponding classification
The submenu Superv Events includes the following command menus.

No.
Item
Description
All Test
Ordinal test of all self-supervisions
Select Test
The submenu IO Events includes the following command menus.

No.
Item
Description
All Test
Ordinal test of change of all binary inputs
Select Test
8.2.9.2 Internal Signal

The submenu Internal Signal has following submenus.
No.
1
Item
Zone Cal BI
Description
Display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit
The submenu Zone Cal BI will display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential
circuit. It can help users to know the current composition of differential current. If the value of the
calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit is 1, it means that the current of bay n
is included in differential current.
Item
@Bayn.VBI_CZ
@Bayn.VBI_DZ_@BBx
@Bayn.VBI_CT1_CZ
@Bayn.VBI_CT2_CZ
@Bayn.VBI_CT1_DZ_@BBx
@Bayn.VBI_CT2_DZ_@BBx
Description
Calculated binary input of bay n for check zone differential circuit
Calculated binary input of bay n for discriminating zone differential circuit of
BBx
Calculated binary input of CT1 of bay n for check zone differential circuit (only
for double-CTs BC/BS)
Calculated binary input of CT2 of bay n for check zone differential circuit (only
for double-CTs BC/BS)
Calculated binary input of CT1 of bay n for discriminating zone differential
circuit of BBx (only for double-CTs BC/BS)
Calculated binary input of CT2 of bay n for discriminating zone differential
8-15
Date: 2014-09-20

circuit of BBx (only for double-CTs BC/BS)
8.2.10 Clock
The time of internal clock can be viewed in Clock option. The time is displayed in the form
YY-MM-DD and hh:mm:ss. All values are presented with digits and can be modified.
8.2.11 Language
This menu is mainly used for set LCD display language.
8.3 Understand LCD Display

8.3.1 Overview
There are five kinds of LCD display, system topology if the protective device is under the normal
condition, tripping reports, alarm reports, binary input changing reports and control reports.
Tripping reports and alarm reports will be continuously displayed until operators energizing the
resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg]. User can press ESC first then ENT simultaneously to switch
view of trip reports, alarm reports and the SLD display. Binary change reports will be displayed
before returning to the previous display interface automatically. Control reports will not pop up and
can only be viewed by navigating the corresponding menu.
8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation

After the protection device is powered and enters initiating interface, it takes 30 seconds to
complete the initialization of protection device. During the initialization, the HEALTHY indicator of
the protection device goes out.
Under normal condition, the LCD will display the interface similar as Figure 8.3-1. For different
busbar arrangements, the displayed interfaces are different. The LCD displays in white color
backlight which is activated if there is any keyboard operation, and is extinguished automatically
after 60 seconds without any operation.
8-16

Date: 2014-09-20
Data and time of equipment clock
Communication address
2010-09-28 10:10:00
Addr:098
Group:01
Label of BB No.1
Fdr01
Label of BC
Phase-A current of BC
BC
Fdr03
0.01A
0.01A
Fdr05
0.00A
Fdr07
0.00A
Active group number
Label of each feeder

Phase-A current of each feeder
0.01A
Disconnector (Closed)
BB1
Bus Coupler
means BC is open
BB2
Disconnector (Open)
means BC is closed
0.01A
Fdr02
Label of BB No.2
0.00A
0.01A
Fdr04
Fdr06
Three-phase voltage of BB No.1
U1:
57.70V
57.70V
57.70V
Three-phase voltage of BB No.2
U2:
57.70V
57.70V
57.70V
Three-phase differential current
DI:
0.00A
0.00A
0.01A
0.01A
Fdr08
Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram
The middle part of Figure 8.3-1 displays the single line diagram of busbar with feeders whose CT
correction coefficient is not zero. The label of each feeder (at most 6 digits or characters, please
refer to label settings in Section 7.3) and feeder current is shown by the side of the corresponding
feeder. System frequency (Freq), three-phase busbar voltages (Ux), check zone differential
current (DI), discriminating zone differential current of BBx (DIx) may be shown under the single
line diagram (x=1, 2, 3 or 4).
If the protective device receives the IRIG-B signal for time synchronization and can correctly
decode it, S will be displayed on the top left corner of LCD.
If all feeders can not displayed in one page, the single line diagram will move automatically and
circularly from right to left if no key is pressed, and will move to left quickly by pressing key
continuously, move to right quickly by pressing key continuously.
The displayed content contains: the realtime date and time of the protection device (with a format
of yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), realtime valid setting group number, three-phase current and voltage
sampling values on each side and differential current etc.
8.3.3 Display When Tripping

This protection device can store 32 fault reports and 32 fault waveforms. When there is protection
element operating, the LCD will automatically display the latest fault report. PCS-915IC can
provide two different LCD display interfaces based on the availability of self-check report.
As shown in Figure 8.3-2, if the self-check report is not provided, the display interface will only
show the fault report.
8-17
Date: 2014-09-20
NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Trip

0000ms
0006ms
Pkp_FD
A
87B.Op_TrpBB1_DPFC
BC Fdr02 Fdr03 Fdr06
Fdr08
0006ms
87B.Op_TrpBC
Id_max
1.05A
Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report
NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Trip: shows the SOE number, the time when fault detector
picks up (the format is yearmonth-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond) and the title of the
report.
0000ms Pkp_FD
shows the fault detector of protection element and the

operation time of fault detector is fixed at 0ms.
0006ms A 87B.Op_TrpBB1_DPFC
Fdr08
shows the relative operation time of protection element,

protection elements and trip elements.
0006ms 87B.Op_TrpBC
shows the relative operation time and operation element

of protection element
Id_max 1.05A
shows the maximum differential current
If the fault report and the self-check alarm report occur simultaneously, as shown in Figure 8.3-2,
the upper half part on the screen is fault report, and the lower half part is self-check report. The
fault report includes fault report number, fault name, generating time of fault report (with a format
of yearmonth-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond), protection element and tripping element.
If there is protection element, the relative time will be displayed on the basis of fault detector
element and fault phase. If the upper half part on the screen is not big enough to list all the
protection elements and tripping elements, the report will be automatically displayed in a cycle
without pressing any key on the front panel.
The displayed content of the lower half part is the alarm element. If the alarm element is more than
one, all the alarm elements will be displayed in a cycle.
8-18

Date: 2014-09-20
NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Trip

0000ms
Pkp_FD
0006ms
87B.Op_TrpBB1_DPFC
Fdr08
0006ms
87B.Op_TrpBC
Id_max
1.05A
Superv Events
Alm_Maintenance
Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report
All the trip information are listed in the following tables:

1.
Operation elements
Table 8.3-1 Operation elements list
No.
Item
Description
87B.Op_Dly1_Biased
Stage 1 of backup protection operates.
87B.Op_Dly2_Biased
Stage 2 of backup protection operates.
Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC
DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
Phase-A stage 1 of backup protection operates.
Phase-B stage 1 of backup protection operates.
Phase-C stage 1 of backup protection operates.
Phase-A stage 2 of backup protection operates.
Phase-B stage 2 of backup protection operates.
10
Phase-C stage 2 of backup protection operates.
11
Phase-A steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
12
Phase-B steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
13
Phase-C steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
14
Phase-A DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
15
Phase-B DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
16
Phase-C DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
17
87B.Op_Biased
Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar.
8-19
Date: 2014-09-20

No.
Item
Description
18
87B.Op_DPFC
DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar.
19
87B.Op_Trp@BBx
20
87B.Op
21
87B.Op_Trp@Bayn
22
87B.Op_A_Trp@Bayn
23
87B.Op_B_Trp@Bayn
24
87B.Op_C_Trp@Bayn
25
@Bayn.50DZ.Op
26
@Bayn.Op_TT
27
@Bayn.50SOTF.Op_Trp
SOTF protection of bay n operates (only for BC or BS bay).
28
@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp
Phase overcurrent protection of bay n operates.
29
@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp
Ground overcurrent protection of bay n operates.
30
@Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp
Pole disagreement protection of bay n operates.
31
50BF.Op_Trp@BBx
Breaker failure protection operates to trip BBx.
32
@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB
33
@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC
Breaker failure protection of bay n operates to trip BC/BS.
34
@Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp
Breaker failure protection of bay n operates to re-trip the breaker.
35
50BF.Op_Trp@Bayn
36
50BF.Op

protection operates to trip BBx.
protection operates to trip any busbar.
Busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC or BS
bay).
Phase-A busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC
or BS bay).
Phase-B busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC
or BS bay).
Phase-C busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC
or BS bay).
Dead zone fault protection of bay n operates.
Dead zone fault protection or breaker failure protection of bay n
operates to initiate transfer trip to remote circuit breaker.
Breaker failure protection of bay n operates to trip busbar zone (includes

BC/BS bay and feeder bay).
Breaker failure protection operates to trip breaker of bay n (only for BC

or BS bay).
BC/BS breaker failure protection or feeder breaker failure protection
operates.
Misc operation signal, it can be used to trigger LED indicator (MISC
TRIP). The signal will be issued if any of following operation signals is
issued:
37
Op_Misc
87B.Op_Trp@BCy,
87B.Op_Trp@BSz,
@BCy.50SOTF.Op_Trp,
@Bayn.Op_TT,
@BSz.50SOTF.Op_Trp,
@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp, @Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp, @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp,

@BCy.50BF.Op_TrpBB,
@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC,
@BSz.50BF.Op_TrpBB,
@Bayn.50DZ.Op,
50BF.Op_Trp@BCy,
@Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp, 50BF.Op_Trp@BSz.
38
Op_Prot
Any of protective element operates.
8-20

Date: 2014-09-20

No.
Item
Description
39
Op_Prot_Latched
Any of protective element operates (latched signal).
40
FD.Pkp
Fault detector picks up.
41
TrigDFR_Man
Waveform recording function is triggered manually.
42
TrigDFR_Rmt
Waveform recording function is triggered remotely.
43
BI_TrigDFR
Waveform recording function is triggered by corresponding binary input.
44
Bx.TrigDFR_DataErr_SV
2.
Sampled values of Bx (GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x)

errors to trigger waveform recording function
Trip elements
No.
Item
@Bayn
@Bayn.Op_TT
Description
Trip circuit breaker of bay n
Dead zone fault protection or breaker failure protection of bay n operates to
initiate transfer trip to remote circuit breaker
8.3.4 Display under Abnormal condition

This protection device can store 1024 self-check reports. During the running of protection device,
the self-check report of hardware errors or system running abnormity will be displayed
immediately.
Superv Events NO.26

2010-04-29 09:18:47:500ms
Alm_Maintenance
Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report
Superv Events
Alm_Maintenance
shows the title of the report

shows the content of abnormality alarm
If view the corresponding alarm report from the submenu Superv Events under the menu of
8-21
Date: 2014-09-20
Records, the SOE number and the real time of the report will be indicated in the alarm report.
All the alarm elements have been listed in Chapter Supervision.
8.3.5 Display When Binary Input Status Changes

If the status of any binary changes or any logic link is modified, as shown in Figure 8.3-5, a new
report on the state changes will be automatically displayed on LCD. PCS-915 can store 1024
binary input change reports. During the running of the device, the signals will be displayed at the
moment when the its state changes.
IO Events NO.26
2010-04-29 09:18:47:500ms
0
87B.BI_En
Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary input change report
IO Events NO.26
shows the number and the title of the report
2010-04-29 09:18:47:500
shows the date and time of the report occurred, the format is
yearmonth-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond
87B.BI_En 0->1
shows the state change of binary input, including the binary input
name and the original state and final state
All the binary inputs are listed in the following tables:

Table 8.3-2 Binary input list
No.
Item
Description
BI_TimeSyn
Binary input of time synchronization pulse
BI_Print
Binary input of triggering printing
BI_Maintenance
BI_RstTarg
Binary input of blocking communication between equipment and

substation automatic system (SAS) or remote terminal unit (RTU).
Binary input of resetting signal of protective equipment.
8-22

Date: 2014-09-20

No.
Item
Description
87B.BI_ExtBlk
External binary input of blocking busbar differential protection
@Bayn.BI_Cls
@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD
Binary input indicating breaker of bay n is in pole disagreement status
@Bayn.BI_BFI
Three-phase breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n
@Bayn.BI_A_BFI
Phase-A breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n
10
@Bayn.BI_B_BFI
Phase-B breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n
11
@Bayn.BI_C_BFI
Phase-C breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n
12
@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI
Common breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n
13
50BF.BI_RlsVCE
14
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx
15
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx
16
@Bayn.BI_52a
Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n
17
@Bayn.BI_52b
Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n
18
@Bayn.BI_A_52a
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n
19
@Bayn.BI_B_52a
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n
20
@Bayn.BI_C_52a
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n
21
@Bayn.BI_A_52b
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n
22
@Bayn.BI_B_52b
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n
23
@Bayn.BI_C_52b
24
@Bayn.BI_89a_Byp_@BBx
Normally open auxiliary contact of transfer bus disconnector of bay n
25
BI_ConfirmDS
Disconnector position confirm binary input
26
BI_TrigDFR
Trigger waveform recording binary input
27
87B.BI_En
Binary input of enabling busbar differential protection
28
87B.BI_Blk
Binary input of disabling busbar differential protection
29
BI_En_IntLinkx
Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker failure

protection
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay

n
Binary input indicating that two busbars are under the inter-connected
operation mode, if it is not configured, its default value is 0
Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is configured
30
Fdr.50DZ.BI_En

function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay
is set as Disable (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n (it is
31
@Bayn.50DZ.BI_En

32
50DZ.BI_Blk
Binary input of disabling feeder dead zone fault protection
8-23
Date: 2014-09-20

No.
Item
Description
Binary input of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured when the
33
50SOTF.BI_En

Binary input of enabling SOTF of BCy (it is configured when the basic
34
@BCy.50SOTF.BI_En

protective element is configured according to each bay is set as Enable
(refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling SOTF of BSz (it is configured when the basic
35
@BSz.50SOTF.BI_En

protective element is configured according to each bay is set as Enable
(refer to Section 3.4))
36
50SOTF.BI_Blk
Binary input of disabling BC/BS SOTF protection

Binary input of enabling overcurrent protection (it is configured when the
37
50/51.BI_En

Binary input of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it is
38
@Bayn.50/51P.BI_En

Binary input of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it is
39
@Bayn.50/51G.BI_En

40
50/51.BI_Blk
Binary input of disabling overcurrent protection

Binary input of enabling pole disagreement protection (it is configured
41
62PD.BI_En

function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay
is set as Disable (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling pole disagreement protection of bay n (it is
42
@Bayn.62PD.BI_En

43
62PD.BI_Blk
Binary input of disabling pole disagreement protection
44
50BF.BI_En
Binary input of enabling feeder breaker failure protection
45
50BF.BI_Blk
Binary input of disabling feeder breaker failure protection
46
BI_En_BC_Byp
47
BI_En_RevCT_Byp
Binary input indicating BC/BS breaker is used to substitute one of feeder

breakers
Reverse the polarity mark of BC/BS CT when BC/BS breaker is used to
8-24

Date: 2014-09-20

No.
Item
Description
substitute one of feeder breakers
8.3.6 Display Device Logs

This protection device can store 1024 pieces of the control report (i.e. user operating reports).
During the running of the protection device, the running report will be displayed after any operation
is conducted.
Device Logs NO.4

2010-04-29 10:18:47:569ms
Settings_Chgd
Figure 8.3-6 Display of control report
Device Logs NO. 4
shows the title and the number of the report
2010-04-29 10:18:47:569
shows the date and the time when the report is created, the format
is yearmonth-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond
Settings_Chgd
shows the state content of the user operation report.
User operating information listed below may be displayed.

Table 8.3-3 User operating event list
No.
Message
Description
Reboot
The protective device has been reboot.
Reset_Target
The protective device has been reset.
Settings_Chgd
The settings of protective device have been changed.
ActiveGrp_Chgd
Active setting group has been changed.
Report_Cleared
All reports have been deleted. (User operating event can not be deleted)
Waveform_Cleared
All waveforms have been deleted.
Process_Exit
A subprocess has exited.
8-25
Date: 2014-09-20

No.
Message
Description
Fail_Setting_OvRange
Any setting value is out of setting scope.
Alm_CommTest
The relay is in test mode.
10
Fail_BoardConfig
11
FD.Pkp
Fault detector picks up.
12
TrigDFR_Man
Waveform recording function is triggered manually.
13
TrigDFR_BI
Waveform recording function is triggered by corresponding binary input
14
TrigDFR_Rmt
Waveform recording function is triggered remotely
Mismatch between the configuration of plug-in boards and the designing

drawing of an applied-specific project.
8.4 Keypad Operation

8.4.1 View Device Sampled Values
The operation is as follows:
1.
Press the key to enter the main menu.
2.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the Measurements menu, and then
press the ENT or to enter the menu.
3.
Press the key or to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press
ENT to enter submenu.
4.
Press the key or to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).
5.
Press the key or to select pervious or next command menu.
6.
Press the key ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the Measurements menu).
8.4.2 View Status of binary signals

1.
2.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the Status menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu.
3.
Press the key or to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press
ENT to enter submenu.
4.
Press the key or to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).
5.
6.
Press the key ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the Status menu).
8-26

Date: 2014-09-20
8.4.3 View Device Records

1.
2.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the Records menu, and then press the
key ENT or to enter the menu.
3.
Press the key or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
key ENT to enter the submenu.
4.
Press the key or to page up/down.
5.
Press the key or to select pervious or next record.
6.
7.
Press the key ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the Records menu).
For the fault report, view the single item fault report by the command menu Disturb Items, and
the item fault report produces with change of any item of fault report. The item fault report can
save up to 1024 events.
1.
2.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the Test menu, and then press the key
3.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the command menu Disturb Items,
and then press the ENT to enter the menu.
4.
Press the key or to select pervious or next record.
5.
Press the key ESC to exit this menu (returning to the Test menu).
8.4.4 View Device Setting

Follow the steps below to view the device settings:
1.
2.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the Settings menu, and then press
3.
Press the key or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press
ENT to enter the menu.
4.
Press the key or to move the cursor.
5.
Press the key + or - to page up/down.
6.
8-27
Date: 2014-09-20
7.
Press the key ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu Settings).
NOTICE!
If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scroll bar will appear on the right side
of the LCD to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu
and the relative location of information where the current cursor points at.
8.4.5 Modify Device Setting

1.
2.
3.
Press the key or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press
4.
Press the key or to move the cursor.
5.
Press the key + or - to page up/down.
6.
7.
Press the key ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu Settings ).
8.
Select the command menu Device Settings, Label Settings, or Comm

Settings, users need to enter the submenu Device Setup firstly. Select the
command menu BBP Settings, 50DZ Settings, BC BFP Settings, Fdr BFP
Settings, SOTF Settings, OC Settings or PD Settings, users need to enter the
submenu Prot Settings firstly. Select the command menu Function Links,
GOOSE Send Links or GOOSE Recv Links, users need to enter the submenu
Logic Links firstly.
Following takes modification of system settings as an example.
1.
2.
3.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the command menu System
Settings, and then press ENT to enter the menu.
4.
Move the cursor to the setting item to be modified, and then press the key ENT.
5.
Press the key or to modify the value (if the modified value is multi-bit, press
the key or to move the cursor to the digit bit, and then press the or to
modify the value), press the key ESC to cancel the modification and return to the
displayed interface of the command menu System Settings. Press the key ENT to
automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command
8-28

Date: 2014-09-20
menu System Settings).

6.
Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are
modified, press the key , or ESC, and the LCD will display Save or Not?.
Directly press the ESC or press the key or to move the cursor. Select the
Cancel, and then press the key ENT to automatically exit this menu (returning to
the displayed interface of the command menu System Settings).
7.
Press the key or to move the cursor. Select No and press the key ENT, all
modified setting item will restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the
menu Settings).
8.
Press the key or to move the cursor to select Yes, and then press the key
ENT, the LCD will display password input interface.
Password:
Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password
9.
Input a 4-bit password (, , or ). If the password is incorrect, continue

inputting it, then press ESC to exit the password input interface and return to the
displayed interface of the command menu System Settings. If the password is
correct, LCD will display Save Settings, and then exit this menu (returning to the
displayed interface of the command menu System Settings). The device setting
modification is completed.
NOTICE!
The above modification instructions are available for all setting items.
NOTICE!
After modifying the settings in menu System Settings or Prot Settings, the
HEALTHY indicator of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will
automatically restart and re-check the settings. The device will be blocked until the
check process is finished. If selecting the command menu of protection element such
as BBP Settings, the LCD will display the following interface:
8-29
Date: 2014-09-20
2. BBP Settings
Please Select Group for Config
Active Group:
01
Selected Group:
01
Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings
Then move the cursor to the modified value and press ENT to enter. For example, if the setting
[87B.I_Bias] need to be modified, press the ENT to enter and the LCD will display the interface
shown in Figure 8.4-3. Press the or to modify the value and then press the ENT to enter.
87B.I_Pkp
Current Value
5.00
Modified Value
005.00
Min Value
0.05
Max Value
20.00
Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings
10. If selecting the other menus, move the cursor to the setting to be modified, and then
press the ENT.
8.4.6 Copy Protection Setting

1.
Press the key to enter the main menu;
8-30

Date: 2014-09-20
2.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the Settings menu, and then press the
key ENT or to enter the menu;
3.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the command menu Protection
Settings, and then press the key ENT or to enter the command menu;
4.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the command menu Copy Settings,
and then press the key ENT to enter the menu. The following display will be shown on
LCD.
Copy Settings
Active Group:
01
Copy To Group:
02
Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings
Press the key or to modify the value. Press the key ESC, and return to the
menu Settings. Press the ENT, the LCD will display the interface for password input,
if the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, press the key ESC to exit the
password input interface and return to the menu Settings. If the password is correct,
the LCD will display Copy Settings Success!, and exit this menu (returning to the menu
Settings).
8.4.7 Print Device Records

1.
2.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the Print menu, and then press the
3.
Press the key or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
Selecting the Disturb Records, and then

Press the or to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key ENT,
8-31
Date: 2014-09-20
the LCD will display Start Printing... , and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu Print). If the printer doesnt complete its current print task
and re-start it for printing, the LCD will display Printer Busy. Press the key ESC
to exit this menu (returning to the menu Print).
Selecting the command menu Superv Events or IO Events, and then press the
key or to move the cursor. Press the or to select the starting and
ending numbers of printing message. After pressing the key ENT, the LCD will
display Start Printing, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the
menu Print). Press the key ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu Print).
4.
If selecting the command menu IEC103 Info, Device Status or Device Info, press
the key ENT, the LCD will display Start printing.., and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu Print).
5.
If selecting the Settings, press ENT or to enter the submenu.
6.
After entering the submenu Settings, press the key or to move the cursor, and
then press the key ENT to print the corresponding default value. To select items to print:
Press the key or to select the setting group to print. After pressing the key ENT,
the LCD will display Start Printing, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to
the menu Settings). Press the key ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu
Settings).
7.
After entering the submenu Waveforms, press the or to select the printed
waveform and press ENT to enter. With waveform data existing:
Press the key or to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key ENT,
the LCD will display Start Printing, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to
the menu Waveforms). If the printer does not complete its current print task and
re-start it for printing, and the LCD will display Printer Busy. Press the key ESC to
exit this menu (returning to the menu Waveforms). If there is no any waveform data,
the LCD will display No Waveform Data!.
8.4.8 Switch Setting Group

1.
Exit the main menu.
2.
Press the GRP.
8-32

Date: 2014-09-20
Change Active Group
Active Group:
01
Change To Group:
02
Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group
Press the or to modify the value, and then press the key ESC to exit this menu
(returning to the main menu). After pressing the key ENT, the LCD will display the password
input interface. If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the key ESC to
exit the password input interface and return to its original state. If the password is correct, the
HEALTHY indicator of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will re-check
the protection setting. If the check doesnt pass, the protection device will be blocked. If the check
is successful, the LCD will return to its original state.
8.4.9 Delete Records

1.
Exit the main menu.
2.
Press the , , , and key ENT; Press the key ESC to exit this menu
(returning to the original state). Press the key ENT to carry out the deletion.
8-33
Date: 2014-09-20
Press <ENT> To Clear

Press <ESC> To Exit
Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report
NOTICE!
The operation of deleting report will delete all messages except for user operation
reports (i.e. control reports), including tripping reports, alarm reports and binary input
change reports. The deleted reports are IRRECOVERABLE, so the function shall be
used with great cautious.
8.4.10 Modify Device Clock

1.
2.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the Clock menu, and then press the key
ENT to enter clock display.
8-34

Date: 2014-09-20
Clock
Year:
2010
Month:
04
Day:
28
Hour:
20
Minute:
59
Second:
14
Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock
3.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified.
4.
Press the key or , to modify value, and then press the key ENT to save the
modification and return to the main menu.
5.
Press the key ESC to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.
8.4.11 View Module Information

1.
2.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the Information menu, and then press
the key ENT or to enter the menu.
3.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the command menu Board Info, and
then press the ENT to enter the menu.
4.
Press the key or to move the scroll bar.
5.
Press the key ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the Information menu).
8.4.12 Check Software Version

1.
2.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the Information menu, and then press
the key ENT or to enter the menu.
3.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the command menu Version Info, and
then press the ENT to enter the menu.
8-35
Date: 2014-09-20
4.
Press the key or to move the scroll bar.
5.
Press the key ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the Information menu).
8.4.13 Communication Test

1.
2.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the Test menu, and then press the key
3.
Select the command menu Disturb Events, Superv Events or IO Events, users
need to enter the submenu Device Test firstly.
4.
Select any command menu (takes Disturb Events as an example), press the key
ENT, two options All Test and Select Test are provided.
5.
If Select Test is selected, press the key ENT. Press the or to page up/down,
and then press the key or to move the scroll bar. Move the cursor to select the
corresponding protection element. Press the key ENT to execute the communication
test of this protection element, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive the
corresponding fault report, and view the fault report produced by communication test in
the command menu Disturb Items.
6.
If All Test is selected, press the key ENT to execute the communication test of all
protection element one by one, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive all the
fault report.
NOTICE!
If selecting the Superv Events or IO Events, the substation automatic system can
receive the corresponding self-check report or binary signals, and the self-check report
or binary signals produced by communication test can also be viewed by the two
command menus of Superv Events and IO Events in the menu Records.
8.4.14 Select Language

1.
2.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the Language menu, then press ENT
to enter the menu and the following display will be shown on LCD.
8-36

Date: 2014-09-20
Please Select Language:

1
English
Figure 8.4-8 Display of selecting language
3.
Press the key or to move the cursor to the preferred language and press the key
ENT to execute language switching. After language switching is finished, LCD will
return to the main menu, and the display language is changed. Otherwise, press ESC to
cancel language switching and return to the main menu.
NOTICE!
The LCD interfaces provided in this chapter are only for references and available for
explaining specific definition of LCD. The actual displayed interfaces maybe different
from these.
8-37
Date: 2014-09-20
8-38

Date: 2014-09-20
Table of Contents
9 Configurable Function ...................................................................... 9-a
9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer Software ........................................................ 9-1
9.3 Device Setup.................................................................................................... 9-1
9.3.1 Device Information ............................................................................................................... 9-1
9.3.2 Hardware Configuration ....................................................................................................... 9-2
9.3.3 MOT ..................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3.4 Function Configuration ........................................................................................................ 9-4
9.4 Program Configuration ................................................................................... 9-5

9.4.1 LED Configuration ............................................................................................................... 9-5
9.4.2 Configuration of BI and BO .................................................................................................. 9-7
9.5 Setting Configuration ................................................................................... 9-10

9.5.1 Active Setting Group Selection .......................................................................................... 9-10
9.5.2 Browsing Settings ...............................................................................................................9-11
9.5.3 Modify Name and Value of Settings ...................................................................................9-11
List of Figures
Figure 9.3-1 Setting device information .................................................................................... 9-2
Figure 9.3-2 Hardware module configuration........................................................................... 9-3
Figure 9.3-3 MOT configuration interface ................................................................................. 9-4
Figure 9.3-4 Function configuration interface.......................................................................... 9-5
Figure 9.5-1 Setup of setting group......................................................................................... 9-10
Figure 9.5-2 Modify setting name command .......................................................................... 9-11
Figure 9.5-3 Modify setting name dialog box ......................................................................... 9-12
Figure 9.5-4 Modify a setting value ......................................................................................... 9-12
9-a
Date: 2014-07-02
9-b

Date: 2014-07-02

By adoption of PCS-Explorer software, it is able to make function configuration, binary input and
binary output configuration, LED indicator configuration and setting configuration for PCS-915IC.
9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer Software

PCS-Explorer software is developed in order to meet customers demand on functions of UAPC
platform device such as device configuration and programmable design. It selects substation as
the core of data management and the device as fundamental unit, supporting one substation to
govern many devices. The software provides on-line and off-line functions: on-line mode: Ethernet
connected with the device supporting IEC60870-5-103 and capable of uploading and downloading
configuration files through Ethernet net; off-line mode: off-line setting configuration. In addition, it
also supports programmable logic to meet customers demand. Please refer to Instruction
Manual of PCS-Explorer Auxiliary Software for details and other functions.
Overall functions:
Function configuration (off-line function)
Programmable logic (off-line function)
LED indicators configuration (off-line function)
Binary input signals configuration (off-line function)
Binary output signals configuration (off-line function)
Setting configuration (off-line & on-line function)
Real-time display of analogue and digital quantity of device (on-line function)
Display of sequence of report (SOE) (on-line function)
Analysis of waveform (off-line & on-line function)
File downloading/uploading (on-line function)
9.3 Device Setup

Click Device ConfigDevice Setup node, and four labels are displayed in the edit window.
These labels are used to set device information, configure hardware module, configure the
software and hardware related function according to the selected series number of MOT and
configure ancillary protection functions respectively.
9.3.1 Device Information

Select Device Information page to view the basic information of the device. All these information
9-1
Date: 2014-07-02
are default settings in the selected driver package for creating the device. Part of the basic
information can be modified including Project Name, User File Version and User Modify Time.
Figure 9.3-1 Setting device information
9.3.2 Hardware Configuration

Select page Hardware Configuration and configure hardware modules according to the project
requirements.
There are four columns information shown in this page, they are Slot (slot number), Name (the
selectable module name), Current Type (currently selected module type) and Description
(module description). The modules of which the currently selected module type are grey are not
configurable.
1.
Slot: To simplify hardware configuration, the slot number of PCS series is defined to start with
slot 01 from left to right in rear view of device.
4U device:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
P1
8U device:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
P1
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
8U+4U device:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
P1
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
9-2

Date: 2014-07-02
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
P2
In the table, NR1301 located in slot P1 (and P2) is power supply, NR1102 located in slot 01 is
MON module, and others are functional modules.
2.
Name: The selectable module name is fixed in a program, normally, the module name implies
its function, such as BIO means the module can be configured as a binary input module or a
binary output module.
3.
Current Type: Current module type is also marked on the aluminum base where the module is
fixed on. In this column, two types of modules can be observed: mandatory and optional. As
shown in the figure below, cells in Current Type column marked in grey are mandatory
modules which are necessary for device normal operation, the module type is fixed. Other
cells marked in white are optional modules which can be configured according to the
application. It is convenient to change the type of optional modules by clicking the optional
module, and select the module type in the pull-down menu or select none to leave the slot
blank if not required.
4.
Description: Module description includes the functions and parameters of the selected
module.
Figure 9.3-2 Hardware module configuration
9.3.3 MOT
Choose MOT page to enter MOT configuration interface as shown below. According to the
selected series number of MOT, the applied busbar arrangement, some software and hardware
related function can be configured. For detailed function configuration, please refer to Section 3.3.
9-3
Date: 2014-07-02
Figure 9.3-3 MOT configuration interface
9.3.4 Function Configuration

Choose Function Configuration page to enter function configuration interface as shown below
(the content may vary subject to created projects). Click the pull-down list in Option column to
perform function configuration. For detailed function configuration, please refer to Section 3.2.
9-4

Date: 2014-07-02
Figure 9.3-4 Function configuration interface
9.4 Program Configuration

9.4.1 LED Configuration
On front panel of PCS-915, two columns of indicators are normally provided. The first two
indicators indicate device running status (Healthy) and alarm status (Alarm). Remaining indicators
have their specific meanings according to device functions (please refer to corresponding project
configuration manual for details). Colors of these indicators may vary with functions of device.
The control of these indicators is configured by LED element configuration in PCS-Explorer.
Click Program ConfigSlot01:CPU node, and select LED page to view and configure LED
element.
The following is an example of LED configuration:
9-5
Date: 2014-07-02
Figure 9.4-1 Example of LED configuration
If the LED symbol and the connected input block are in blue, indicating that they cannot be
modified. For some fixed configuration, the necessary functions not allowed to change will be
marked in blue, even the attributes cannot be modified.
The indicators not in blue can be defined according to the application. The method is very simple:
Double click LED element to open its attributes setup window. users can see that it consists of 4
sub-pages. Switch to Func Block Parameter sub-page. Here, indicators LED3~20 can be set.
Each indicator has two items to be set: Parameter ledx_latched (x=3~20): click corresponding
entry under Set Value to select yes or no. If yes is selected, indicator attribute is latched,
indicating that after this indicator is lit, it will remain on even the initiation signal disappears until it
is reset. If no is selected, indicator attribute is un-latched, indicating that the indicator status will
follow the change of its initiation signal.
The other parameter is ledx_color (x=3~20): The color of indicator can be selected as required:
green, yellow, and red.
After completion of setup, click OK to close attributes setup window. The set parameters will be
displayed on the element, as shown below.
9-6

Date: 2014-07-02
Figure 9.4-2 LED indicators configuration interface
Next, indicators initiation signals should be placed on the page and connect them to corresponding
input interfaces of LED element: select the output signal from the Source tab at the right side of
the window to be used as input source. Press and hold left button of mouse, and directly drag it to
the page. When this signal passes input signal connection point, a red dot will appear to prompt
connection. After placing it at a suitable position, connection line will be automatically generated to
connect this input signal.
9.4.2 Configuration of BI and BO

PCS-915IC is normally configured with a number of IO modules. Quantities may vary with different
project.
These BI and BO modules are normally configured according to general configuration.
Corresponding modules are usually selected according to the application. However, in some
cases, addition of IO modules may be required according to the changing requirements. At this
time, configuration of signals and parameters of additional IO modules is required. After creation of
a device using the template driver package by PCS-Explorer, required configuration can be
performed on editable page.
9.4.2.1 Configuration of BI
Takes BI module in slot No.5 as an example.
Click Program Config node. Unfold module node Slot05:BIO_2, one page node: NR1506A_A
is shown.
9-7
Date: 2014-07-02
Figure 9.4-3 Module nodes and pages in program configuration
Click the page NR1506A_A; NR1506AS configuration graph is shown in an editing window.
Figure 9.4-4 Configuration graph of NR1506AS
In the graph, NR1506AS plug-in module symbol and respective output signals are shown with
connection to output symbol block.
Plug-in module symbol shows functions corresponding to NR1506AS input pins: numbers in the
PIN column are input terminal numbers of NR1506AS module, and name or function of each pin
is described in the BI_Name column. Pins can be configured via their output signals to form
output symbol blocks.
9-8

Date: 2014-07-02
[BI_COMMON] of BI module is an internal binary input, it will be energized if any other binary input
of the BI module is energized. When users configure BFI binary input via PCS-Explorer auxiliary
software by themselves, all the common BFI binary inputs ([@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI]) of related bays
must be configured to [BI_COMMON] of the BI module, so if any BFI binary input of a BI module is
energized, the common BFI binary inputs of related bays are energized (refer to Section 3.12.2.2).
On the element symbol, two parameters columns of symbols
and
. The former
indicates BI delay pick up time and the latter indicates BI delay drop off time. If voltage applied
between a BI input and the common terminal exceeds the BI delay pick up time, corresponding
output signal will be energized, and if the applied voltage is disappeared for a period exceeding
the BI delay drop off time, the output signal will be reset.
Connect a signal to a pin of NR1506AS module and the status of this signal is reflected by the BI
output signal and the connected output symbol block in visualized page. Double click such output
symbol block and modify its description in a pop-up dialog box (or maintain default description;
input signal will not be affected).
Besides above method for the addition of BI signal and viewing the status, outputs of all configured
binary inputs (including elements) can be viewed in the Source tab at the right side of the window
(variable library). Please note the variable library has to be refreshed if there is any description
modification on output symbol block. The output symbol block of these binary inputs can be
configured as input symbol block of other elements by dragging.
9.4.2.2 Configuration of BO
Takes BO module in slot No.15 as an example.
Click Program Config node. Unfold module node Slot15:BIO_12, one page node:
NR1521A_A is shown.
Figure 9.4-5 Configuration graph of NR1521A
In the graph, NR1521A plug-in module symbol and respective input signals are shown with
9-9
Date: 2014-07-02
connection to input symbol block.

Plug-in module symbol shows functions corresponding to NR1521A input pins: numbers in the
PIN column are input terminal numbers of NR1521A module, and name or function of each pin is
described in the BO_Name column. Pins can be configured via their input signals to form input
symbol blocks.
Inputs of all configurable binary outputs can be viewed in the Source tab at the right side of the
window (variable library). As shown in the figure, each input corresponds to one way output
contact of the BO module. The output contact of BO module will operate (output relay pickup or
reset) in response to the status change of corresponding input signal. The output contacts of BO
modules can be configured or modified according to the application or drag the required signals
from the variable library.
9.5 Setting Configuration

After function configuration is finished, disabled protective function is hidden in device and in
setting configuration list of PCS-Explorer software.
9.5.1 Active Setting Group Selection

Click Settings node to enter Settings interface. In the middle of editing window is the setting
group setup interface, where two parameters can be set: Active Group and Setting Groups:
[1-30] (shown in Figure 9.5-1), users can change the number in the two text boxes then click the
button Set to modify the two parameters. The text box of Active Group is used for users to
change the current active setting group. The text box of Setting Groups: [1-30] is used for users
to change the number of active setting groups, the number of sub-nodes of Setting node will
change with this parameter.
Several sub-nodes: Global and Group x (x: 1~n, n is the number that inputted in the text box of
Setting Groups: [1-30], n should not be larger than 30). Among them, global settings (the
sub-node Global) are common for all setting groups. In setting groups Group 1~Group n, only
one group is the current active setting group used in device operation, and mainly includes
protection settings, the current active setting group can be switched among Group 1~Group n
when required.
Figure 9.5-1 Setup of setting group
9-10

Date: 2014-07-02
9.5.2 Browsing Settings

Click SettingsGlobal node, five sub-nodes are unfolded (number of sub-nodes may vary with
different device models) in the edit window. These sub-nodes are used to set system settings,
logic links, device settings, communication settings and label settings.
Click SettingsGroup x node, all the protective settings of corresponding group can be shown
by clicking corresponding setting menu item.
9.5.3 Modify Name and Value of Settings

Although there are many setting group nodes, settings under these nodes have the same layout in
editing page. Therefore, steps of modification of settings are basically the same. It is seen from the
graph that when any setting node is clicked and open, the editing page will display name, value,
range, step, and unit of the settings in this sequence. Here, user can modify name and set value of
the settings according to actual application requirements.
Figure 9.5-2 Modify setting name command
The name of a setting is the name user will finally see on the device. Users can suitably modify
this name according to actual project requirements: right click on the name entry to be modified to
pop up a right-key context menu, execute command Modify Name; the following window will pop
up:
9-11
Date: 2014-07-02
Figure 9.5-3 Modify setting name dialog box
In the Modify Name dialog box, users will see two entries, Original Name is the default name of
this setting in the symbol library, and Name is the name currently used, and can be modified.
Modified setting value must not exceed its range (if there has an ordain). There are two types of
set value modification operation: direct input of the value after double clicking corresponding entry
of the setting value, or selection from a pull-down menu.
User can also right click the entry of set value and select Get Default Value in the right-key
context menu, so as to obtain default set value of this entry from the symbol library.
During modification and editing operations of settings in the customizing editing window, modified
item will become red, till users perform saving operation.
Figure 9.5-4 Modify a setting value
9-12

Date: 2014-07-02
10 Communications
10 Communications
Table of Contents
10 Communications ........................................................................... 10-a
10.1 General Description .................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Rear Communication Port Information ..................................................... 10-1
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface.............................................................................................................. 10-1
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface ............................................................................................................ 10-3
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication .................................................................................... 10-4
10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port ................................................ 10-4

10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer ............................................................................... 10-5
10.3.2 Initialization ...................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.3 Time Synchronization ...................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.4 Spontaneous Events ........................................................................................................ 10-5
10.3.5 General Interrogation ....................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.6 General Functions ........................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.7 Disturbance Records ....................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet .................................................... 10-6

10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol .......................................... 10-6
10.5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.5.2 Communication Profiles ................................................................................................... 10-7
10.5.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment ................................................................... 10-8
10.5.4 Server Data Organization ...............................................................................................10-11
10.5.5 Server Features and Configuration ............................................................................... 10-13
10.5.6 ACSI Conformance ........................................................................................................ 10-15
10.5.7 Logical Nodes ................................................................................................................ 10-20
10.6 DNP3.0 Interface........................................................................................ 10-23

10.6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 10-23
10-a
Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
10.6.2 Link Layer Functions...................................................................................................... 10-23

10.6.3 Transport Functions ....................................................................................................... 10-23
10.6.4 Application Layer Functions........................................................................................... 10-23
List of Figures
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements ..................................................... 10-2
Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable ........................................................................ 10-3
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure .................................................................. 10-4
Figure 10.5-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance ......................... 10-9
Figure 10.5-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance ..................... 10-10
Figure 10.5-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances .................. 10-11
10-b

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications

This section introduces NRs remote communications interfaces. The protective device is
compatible with three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet). The
protocol provided by the protective device is indicated in the submenu in the Comm Settings
column. Using the keypad and LCD to set the parameter [Protocol_RS485A] and
[Protocol_RS485B], the corresponding protocol will be selected.
The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection no matter
whichever protocol is selected. It has advantage that 32 protective devices can be daisy chained
together in electrical connection using a twisted pair.
It should be noted that the descriptions in this section do not aim to fully introduce the protocol
itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred for this information. This
section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.
10.2 Rear Communication Port Information

10.2.1 RS-485 Interface
This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three
terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay. Each port has a
ground terminal for earth shield of communication cable. The rear ports provide RS-485 serial data
communication and are intended for permanently wired connection to a remote control center.
10.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus
The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the products connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed
definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, but
the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.
10.2.1.2 Bus Termination
The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120 (Ohm) Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end
across the signal wires (refer to Figure 10.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus
terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case
separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a
facility, so an external termination resistor is required when it is located at the bus terminus.
10-1
Date: 2015-03-07
Master
EIA RS-485
10 Communications
120 Ohm
120 Ohm
Slave
Slave
Slave
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements
10.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies

The EIA RS-485 requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable i.e. the
communications bus. Stubs and tees are strictly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop bus
topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden also.
Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the
application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length
must not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end,
normally at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially
when the cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.
This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present
in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other
devices connected to the bus. The signal ground shall not be connected to the cables screen or to
the products chassis at any stage. This is for both safety and noise reasons.
10.2.1.4 Biasing
It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal
level has an indeterminate state due to inactively driven of tubs. This can occur when all the slaves
are in receive mode and the master unit is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit mode. The
reason is that the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high impedance state,
until it has something to transmit. Jabber can result in the loss of first bits of the first character in
the packet for receiving device(s), which will lead to the rejection of messages for slave units,
causing non-responding between master unit and slave unit. This could brings poor response
times (due to retries), increase in message error counters, erratic communications, and even a
complete failure to communicate.
Biasing requires that the signal lines shall be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V.
There should be only one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection
point. The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Please
note that some devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias that the external
components will not be required.
NOTICE!
It is extremely IMPORTANT that the 120 termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do
10-2

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
so will result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to
the bus.
As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NR CANNOT assume
responsibility for any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as a
result of incorrect application of this voltage.
ENSURE that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic
inputs) as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface

This protective device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached
to each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the submenu Comm
Settings.
10.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable
It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture
is shown bellow.
Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable
10.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies

Each device is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a star
structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is also
connected to the exchanger acting as the master station, and every device which has been
connected to the exchanger will act as a slave unit.
10-3
Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
SCADA
Exchanger A
Exchanger B
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication

The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission
Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform
communication with protective device. The standard configuration of IEC60870-5-103 protocol is
using a twisted pair EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. It also supports an
Ethernet for communication between devices. The relay operates as a slave unit in the system to
respond commands received from master station.
To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relevant settings of the protective
device must be configured by using keypad and LCD user interface. In the submenu Comm
Settings, set the parameters [Protocol_RS485A], [Protocol_RS485B] and [Baud_RS485]. To use
the Ethernet port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the IP address and the submask of each
Ethernet port shall be set in the same submenu. Please refer to the corresponding section in
Chapter Settings for further details.
10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port

The IEC60870-5-103 interface over serial port (RS-485) is a master/slave interface and the
protective device is the slave device.
The protective device conforms to compatibility level 3.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
Initialization (reset)
Time synchronization
Event record extraction
General interrogation
General commands
10-4

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Disturbance records
10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer

Two EIA RS-485 standardized ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this protective device.
The transmission speed is optional: 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s or 38400 bit/s.
The link layer strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103.
10.3.2 Initialization
When the protective device is powered up, or the communication parameters are changed, a reset
command is required to initialize the communications. The protective device will respond to either
of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference is that the Reset CU will clear
any unsent messages in the transmit buffer.
The protective device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,
the COT (Cause Of Transmission) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command.
10.3.3 Time Synchronization

The time and date of protective device can be set by time synchronization feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-103 will be
corrected in the protective device. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm
message, then the protective device will respond with a confirmation. Whether the
time-synchronization message is sent as a send confirmation or a broadcast (send/no reply)
message, a time synchronization class 1 event will be generated/produced.
If the protective device clock is synchronized using the IRIG-B input, the protection device will not
be able to set the time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. For attempt to set the time via the
interface, the protective device will create an event with the date and time taken from the IRIG-B
synchronized internal clock.
10.3.4 Spontaneous Events

Events are categorized by the following information:
Type identification (TYP)
Function type (FUN)
Information number (INF)
Messages sent to substation automation system are grouped according to IEC60870-5-103

protocol. Operation elements are sent by ASDU2 (time-tagged message with relative time), and
status of binary Input and alarm element are sent by ASDU1 (time-tagged message). The cause of
transmission (COT) of these responses is 1.
The complete list of all events produced by the protective device can be printed by choosing the
submenu IEC103 Info in the menu Print.
10-5
Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
10.3.5 General Interrogation

The GI can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and the information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle. The GI cycle strictly abides by the rules defined
in the IEC60870-5-103.
Refer the IEC60870-5-103 standard can get the enough details about general interrogation.
10.3.6 General Functions

The general functions can be used to read the setting and protection measurement of the relay,
and modify the setting. Two supported type identifications are ASDU 21 and ASDU 10. For more
details about generic functions, please see the IEC60870-5-103 standard.
Generic service group numbers supported by the relay can be printed by the submenu IEC103
Info in the menu Print.
10.3.7 Disturbance Records

This protective device can store up to 32 disturbance records in its memory. Pickup of fault
detector or operation of relay will be stored as disturbance recorders in the protective device.
The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the
standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103.
It can be printed by the submenu IEC103 Info in the menu Print
10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet

The IEC60870-5-103 interface over Ethernet is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave
device. All the functions provided by this relay are based on generic functions of the
IEC60870-5-103. This relay will send all the relevant information on group caption to SAS or RTU
after establishing a successful communication link.
10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol

10.5.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic
device to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards
describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,
testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:
IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview
IEC 61850-2: Glossary
IEC 61850-3: General requirements
IEC 61850-4: System and project management
10-6

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models
IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations

related to IEDs
IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Principles
and models
IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Abstract
communication service interface (ACSI)
IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device Common
data classes
IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device Compatible
logical node classes and data classes
IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Mappings to MMS (ISO
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3
IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Sampled values over
serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link
IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Sampled values over
ISO/IEC 8802-3
IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing
These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended
that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.
10.5.2 Communication Profiles

PCS-915 series relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP communication protocol
stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires IP address to establish communications. These addresses are
located in the submenu SettingsDevice SetupComm Settings.
1.
MMS protocol
IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper
(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number
of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN
environment. IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to actual MMS protocol
services in IEC61850-8-1.
2.
Client/server
This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and
communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC61850 clients are often substation computers
running HMI programs or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation device such as
protection relays, meters, RTUs, instrument transformers, tap changers, or bay controllers.
Please note that gateways can be considered as clients and servers subject to the communication
10-7
Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
object. When retrieving data from IEDs within the substation, the gateways are considered as
servers whereas transmitting data to control centers, the gateways are considered as clients.
3.
Peer-to-peer
This is a non-connection-oriented high speed communication between substation device, such as

protection relays. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer communication.
4.
Substation configuration language (SCL)
A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe IED configurations and
communication systems according to IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61850-7. Each configured device has
an IED Capability Description (ICD) file and a Configured IED Description (CID) file. The
substation single line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The
entire substation configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The
SCD file is the combination of the following items: individual ICD files, SSD file, communication
system parameters (MMS, GOOSE control block, SV control block), as well as GOOSE/SV
connection relationship amongst IEDs.
10.5.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment

To enhance the stability and reliability of SAS, dual-MMS Ethernet is widely adopted. This section
is applied to introduce the details of dual-MMS Ethernet technology. Generally, single-MMS
Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of 110kV and lower voltage levels, while
dual-MMS Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of voltage levels above 110kV.
Client-server mode is adopted: clients (SCADA, control center and etc.) communicate with the
IEDs via MMS communication network, and the IEDs operate as the servers. IEDs are connected
to clients passively, and they can interact with the clients according to the configuration and the
issued command of the clients.
Three modes for dual-MMS Ethernet (abbreviated as dual-net) are provided as below.
NOTICE!
Hereinafter, the normal operation status of net means the physical link and TCP link are
both ok. The abnormal operation status of net means physical link or TCP link is
broken.
1)
Mode 1: Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the same RCB instance
10-8

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Client
Client
Net B
Net A
Net B
Net A
Report Instance 1
Report Instance 1
RptEna = true
RptEna = true
Report Control Block
IED (Server)
IED (Server)
Normal operation status
Abnormal operation status

TCP Link
MMS Link
Figure 10.5-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance
Net A and Net B share the same report control block (abbreviated as RCB) enabled by the client.
IED sends undifferentiated date through dual-net to the clients. If one net is physically
disconnected, the flag of RCB instance (i.e.: RptEna in above figure) is still true. Only when
both Net A and Net B are disconnected, the flag of the RCB instance will automatically change to
false.
In normal operation status of mode 1, IED provides the same MMS service for Net A and Net B. If
one net is physically disconnected (i.e.: Abnormal operation status in above figure), the working
mode will switch to single-net mode seamlessly and immediately. Network communication
supervision is unnecessary here, and Buffered Report Control Block (abbreviated as BRCB) need
not to be used. On the other net, date alternation works normally. Therefore, MMS service can
interact normally without interruption. This mode ensures no data loss during one net is in
abnormal operation status.
In mode 1, one report will be transmitted twice via dual nets for the same report instance, so the
client needs to distinguish whether two reports are same according to corresponding EntryIDs.
2)
Mode 2: Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance
10-9
Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Client
Client
Net B
Net A
Net B
Net A
Report Instance 1
Report Instance 1
RptEna = true
RptEna = true
IED (Server)
IED (Server)
Normal operation status
Abnormal operation status

TCP Link
Main MMS Link
Standby MMS Link
Figure 10.5-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance
In mode 2, the MMS service is provided on main MMS link, no MMS service interacts on the
standby MMS link. The definitions of two links are as follows:
Main MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service available.
Standby MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service not
available.
If the main net fails to operate (i.e.: Abnormal operation status in the above figure), the IED will
set RptEna to false. Meanwhile the client will detect the failure by heartbeat message or
keep-alive, it will automatically enable the RCB instance by setting RptEna back to true
through standby MMS link. By the buffer function of BRCB, the IED can provide uninterrupted
MMS service on the standby net. However, the differences of BRCB standards among different
manufacturers may cause data loss. Moreover, if duration of net switch is too long, the data loss is
positively as the capacity of BRCBs buffer function is limited.
NOTICE!
In mode 1 and mode 2, Net A IED host address and Net B IED host address must be
the same. E.g.: if the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, network prefix of Net A is
198.120.0.0, network prefix of Net B is 198.121.0.0, Net A IP address of the IED is
198.120.1.2, and then Net B IP address of the IED must be configured as 198.121.1.2,
i.e.: Net A IED host address =1x256+2=258, Net B IED host address =1x256+2=258,
Net A IED host address equals to Net B IED host address.
10-10

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
3)
Mode 3: Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances
Client
Client
Net B
Net A
Net B
Net A
Report Instance 1
Report Instance 2
Report Instance 1
Report Instance 2
RptEna = true
RptEna = true
RptEna = false
RptEna = true
IED (Server)
IED (Server)
TCP Link
MMS Link
Figure 10.5-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances
In mode 3, IED provides 2 report instances for each RCB, Net A and Net B work independently
from each other, failures of one net will not affect the other net at all.
In this mode, 2 report instances are required for each client. Therefore, the IED may be unable to
provide enough report instances if there are too many clients.
Net A and Net B send the same report separately when they operates normally, To ensure no
repeated data is saved into database, massive calculation is required for the client.
Moreover, accurate clock synchronization of the IED is required to distinguish whether 2 reports
are the same report according to the timestamps. Clock synchronization error of the IED may lead
to report loss/redundancy.
As a conclusion:
In mode 2, its difficult to realize seamless switchover between dual nets;
In mode 3, the IED may be unable to provide enough report instances if too many clients are
applied on site.
For the consideration of client treatment and IED implementation, mode 1 (Dual-net full duplex
mode sharing the same report instance) is recommended for MMS communication network
deployment.
10.5.4 Server Data Organization

IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC61850 physical device
can contain one or more logical device(s) (for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical
10-11
Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is composed of data
attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing
various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
Each IED represents one IEC61850 physical device. The physical device contains one or more
logical device(s), and the logical device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD
contains information about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains common
information about the IED logical device.
10.5.4.1 Digital Status Values
The GGIO logical node is used to provide access to digital status points (including general I/O
inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags. The data content must be
configured before using. GGIO provides digital status points for access by clients. It is intended for
the use of GGIO by client to access to digital status values from PCS-915 series relays. Clients
can utilize the IEC61850 buffered report from GGIO to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and
HMI display screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering
capability reduces the chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are
transmitted to HMI clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control
block (BRCB) is defined in LLN0.
10.5.4.2 Analog Values
Most of measured analog values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering
values in MMTR, the others in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Data of each MMXU logical node is
provided from a IED current/voltage source. There is one MMXU available for each configurable
source. Data of MMXU1 is provided from CT/VT source 1 (usually for protection purpose), and
data of MMXU2 is provided from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All
these analog data objects are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and
the corresponding unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical
nodes provide the following data for each source:
MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency
MMXU.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle
10-12

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
10.5.4.3 Protection Logical Nodes

The following list describes the protection elements for all PCS-915 series relays. The specified
relay will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.
PDIF: current differential and transfer trip
RBRF:Breaker failure
PTOC: Time overcurrent
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function
The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags, instead of any
element has its own start (pickup) flag separately, all the elements share a common start (pickup)
flags PTRC.ST.Str.general. The operate flag for PDIF1 is PDIF1.ST.Op.general. For PCS-915
series relay protection elements, these flags take their values from related module for the
corresponding element. Similar to digital status values, the protection trip information is reported
via BRCB, and it also locates in LLN0.
10.5.4.4 LLN0 and Other Logical Nodes
Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address
common issues for Logical Devices. Most of the public services, the common settings, control
values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public services may be
BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defined for the whole device; the
common settings include all the setting items of communication settings, system settings and
some of the protection setting items, which can be configured to two or more protection elements
(logical nodes). In LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this item indicates the local
operation for complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control commands to the IED
will be blocked until Loc is changed to false. In PCS-915 series relays, besides the logical nodes
described above, there are some other logical nodes in the IEDs:
LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical
device.
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning, it is used to connect the operate outputs of one or more
protection functions to a common trip to be transmitted to XCBR. In addition or alternatively, any
combination of operate outputs of protection functions may be combined to a new operate of
PTRC.
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function. It triggers fault wave recorder and its output refers to
the IEEE Standard Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power System (IEC
60255-24). All enabled channels are included in the recording and is independent of the trigger
mode.
10.5.5 Server Features and Configuration

10.5.5.1 Buffered/unbuffered Reporting
IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks are located in LLN0, they can be
10-13
Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
configured to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes),
binary status values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and
MSQI). The reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via
an IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.
TrgOps: Trigger options.
The following bits are supported by PCS-915 series relays:

Bit 1: Data-change
Bit 4: Integrity
Bit 5: General interrogation
OptFlds: Option Fields.
The following bits are supported by PCS-915 series relays:

Bit 1: Sequence-number
Bit 2: Report-time-stamp
Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion
Bit 4: Data-set-name
Bit 5: Data-reference
Bit 6: Buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)
Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)
Bit 8: Conf-revision
Bit 9: Segmentation
IntgPd: Integrity period.
BufTm: Buffer time.
10.5.5.2 File Transfer

MMS file services allows transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from a PCS-915
series relay.
10.5.5.3 Timestamps
The timestamp values associated with all IEC61850 data items represent the time of the last
change of either the value or quality flags of the data item.
10.5.5.4 Logical Node Name Prefixes
IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.
The name is composed of:
A five or six-character name prefix.
10-14

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).
A one or two-character instantiation index.
Complete names are in the form of xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is
configurable. Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and
7-2. It is recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation
project.
10.5.5.5 GOOSE Services
IEC61850 specifies the type of broadcast data transfer services: Generic Object Oriented
Substation Events (GOOSE). IEC61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support,
Ethernet priority tagging, and Ether-type Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and
priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be
given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific
VLANs. Devices that transmit GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GOOSE
publisher contains a GOOSE control block to configure and control the transmission.
The GOOSE transmission (including subscribing and publishing) is controlled by GOOSE logic link
settings in device.
The PCS-915 series relays support IEC61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)
communication. All GOOSE messages contain IEC61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this
dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The GOOSE related dataset is
configured in the CID file and it is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for
implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between PCS-915 series relays.
IEC61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be
correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the
transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the
GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly.
10.5.6 ACSI Conformance

10.5.6.1 ACSI Basic Conformance Statement
Services
Client
Server
PCS-915
Client-Server Roles
B11
Server side (of Two-party Application-Association)
C1
B12
Client side (of Two-party Application-Association)
C1
SCSMS Supported
B21
SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used
B22
B23
B24
SCSM: other
Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)

10-15
Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Services
Client
Server
PCS-915
B31
Publisher side
B32
Subscriber side
Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)

B41
Publisher side
B42
Subscriber side
Client
Server
PCS-915
Where:
C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared
O: Optional
M: Mandatory
Y:
Supported by PCS-915 relay
N: Currently not supported by PCS-915 relay

10.5.6.2 ACSI Models Conformance Statement
Services
M1
Logical device
C2
C2
M2
Logical node
C3
C3
M3
Data
C4
C4
M4
Data set
C5
C5
M5
Substitution
M6
Setting group control
Buffered report control
M7-1
sequence-number
M7-2
report-time-stamp
M7-3
reason-for-inclusion
M7-4
data-set-name
M7-5
data-reference
M7-6
buffer-overflow
M7-7
entryID
M7-8
BufTm
M7-9
IntgPd
M7-10
GI
Unbuffered report control
sequence-number
Reporting
M7
M8
M8-1
10-16

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Services
Client
Server
PCS-915
M8-2
report-time-stamp
M8-3
reason-for-inclusion
M8-4
data-set-name
M8-5
data-reference
M8-6
BufTm
M8-7
IntgPd
Log control
M9-1
IntgPd
M10
Log
M12
GOOSE
M13
GSSE
M14
Multicast SVC
M15
Unicast SVC
M16
Time
M17
File transfer
Logging
M9
GSE
Where:
C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared
C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared
C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has
been declared
C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared
M: Mandatory
Y:
Supported by PCS-900 series relays
N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays

10.5.6.3 ACSI Services Conformance Statement
Service
Server/Publisher
PCS-900 Series
Server
S1
ServerDirectory
Application association
S2
Associate
S3
Abort
10-17
Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Service
Server/Publisher
M
LogicalDeviceDirectory
S6
LogicalNodeDirectory
S7
GetAllDataValues
S8
GetDataValues
S9
SetDataValues
S10
GetDataDirectory
S11
GetDataDefinition
S12
GetDataSetValues
S13
SetDataSetValues
S14
CreateDataSet
S15
DeleteDataSet
S16
GetDataSetDirectory
SetDataValues
S4
Release
PCS-900 Series
Logical device
S5
Logical node
Data
Data set
Substitution
S17
Setting group control

S18
SelectActiveSG
M/O
S19
SelectEditSG
M/O
S20
SetSGValuess
M/O
S21
ConfirmEditSGValues
M/O
S22
GetSGValues
M/O
S23
GetSGCBValues
M/O
Reporting
Buffered report control block
S24
Report
S24-1
data-change
S24-2
qchg-change
S24-3
data-update
S25
GetBRCBValues
S26
SetBRCBValues
Unbuffered report control block
10-18

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Service
Server/Publisher
PCS-900 Series
S27
Report
S27-1
data-change
S27-2
qchg-change
S27-3
data-update
S28
GetURCBValues
S29
SetURCBValues
Logging
Log control block
S30
GetLCBValues
S31
SetLCBValues
S32
QueryLogByTime
S33
QueryLogAfter
S34
GetLogStatusValues
Log
Generic substation event model (GSE)

GOOSE control block
S35
SendGOOSEMessage
S36
GetGoReference
S37
GetGOOSEElementNumber
S38
GetGoCBValues
S39
SetGoCBValuess
S51
Select
S52
SelectWithValue
S53
Cancel
S54
Operate
S55
Command-Termination
S56
TimeActivated-Operate
Control
File transfer
S57
GetFile
M/O
S58
SetFile
S59
DeleteFile
S60
GetFileAttributeValues
M/O
Time
SNTP
10-19
Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
10.5.7 Logical Nodes

10.5.7.1 Logical Nodes Table
PCS-915 relays support IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that the
actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code.
Nodes
PCS-915
L: System Logical Nodes

LPHD: Physical device information
YES
LLN0: Logical node zero
YES
P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions

PDIF: Differential
YES
PDIR: Direction comparison
PDIS: Distance
PDOP: Directional overpower
PDUP: Directional underpower
PFRC: Rate of change of frequency
PHAR: Harmonic restraint
PHIZ: Ground detector
PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent
PMRI: Motor restart inhibition
PMSS: Motor starting time supervision
POPF: Over power factor
PPAM: Phase angle measuring
PSCH: Protection scheme
PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault
PTEF: Transient earth fault
PTOC: Time overcurrent
YES
PTOF: Overfrequency
PTOV: Overvoltage
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning
YES
PTTR: Thermal overload
PTUC: Undercurrent
PTUV: Undervoltage
PUPF: Underpower factor
PTUF: Underfrequency
PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent
10-20

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Nodes
PCS-915
PVPH: Volts per Hz
PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed
R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions

RDRE: Disturbance recorder function
YES
RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue
RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary
RDRS: Disturbance record handling
RBRF: Breaker failure
YES
RDIR: Directional element
RFLO: Fault locator
RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking
RREC: Autoreclosing
RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing
C: Logical Nodes For Control

CALH: Alarm handling
CCGR: Cooling group control
CILO: Interlocking
CPOW: Point-on-wave switching
CSWI: Switch controller
G: Logical Nodes For Generic References
GAPC: Generic automatic process control

GGIO: Generic process I/O
YES
GSAL: Generic security application

I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving
IARC: Archiving
IHMI: Human machine interface
ITCI: Telecontrol interface
ITMI: Telemonitoring interface
A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control

ANCR: Neutral current regulator
ARCO: Reactive power control
ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller
AVCO: Voltage control
M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement

MDIF: Differential measurements
YES
10-21
Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Nodes
PCS-915
MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics
MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic
MMTR: Metering
MMXN: Non phase related measurement
MMXU: Measurement
YES
MSQI: Sequence and imbalance
MSTA: Metering statistics
S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring

SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs
SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas)
SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid)
SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges
X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear

TCTR: Current transformer
YES
TVTR: Voltage transformer
YES
Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers

YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil)
YLTC: Tap changer
YPSH: Power shunt
YPTR: Power transformer
Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment

ZAXN: Auxiliary network
ZBAT: Battery
ZBSH: Bushing
ZCAB: Power cable
ZCAP: Capacitor bank
ZCON: Converter
ZGEN: Generator
ZGIL: Gas insulated line
ZLIN: Power overhead line
ZMOT: Motor
ZREA: Reactor
ZRRC: Rotating reactive component
ZSAR: Surge arrestor
ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter
10-22

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Nodes
PCS-915
ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component
10.6 DNP3.0 Interface

10.6.1 Overview
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany this relay. The DNP3.0 protocol is not
described here; please refer to the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the DNP3.0
implementation. This manual only specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported
in this relay, and also specifies what data is available from this relay via DNP3.0.
The relay operates as a DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 3 of the protocol, plus some of
the features from level 4. The DNP3.0 communication uses the Ethernet ports (electrical or optical)
at the rear side of this relay.
10.6.2 Link Layer Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the linker layer functions.
10.6.3 Transport Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the transport functions.
10.6.4 Application Layer Functions

10.6.4.1 Function Code
Function Code
Function
0 (0x00)
Confirm
1 (0x01)
Read
2 (0x02)
Write
3 (0x03)
Select
4 (0x04)
Operate
5 (0x05)
Direct Operate
6 (0x06)
Direct Operate No Acknowledgment
13 (0x0D)
Cold Restart
14 (0x0E)
Warm Restart
20 (0x14)
Enable Unsolicited Responses
21 (0x15)
Disable Unsolicited Responses
22 (0x16)
Assign Class
23 (0x17)
Delay Measurement
10.6.4.2 Supported Object List

The supported object groups and object variations are show in the following table.
Request: Master may issue/Outstation shall parse
10-23
Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Function code: decimalism

Qualifier code: hexadecimal
OBJECT GROUP & VARIATION
Group/Variation
REQUEST
Description
No.
Function code
Qualifier code
1 (read)
00, 01 (start ~ stop)
22 (assign class)
06 (no range, or all)
Binary Input: Any Variation
Binary Input: Packed format
1 (read)
Binary Input: With flags
1 (read)
Binary Input Event: Any Variation
1 (read)
Binary Input Event: Without time
1 (read)
Binary Input Event: With absolute time
1 (read)
Binary Input Event: With relative time
1 (read)
10
Binary output: Any Variation
1 (read)
10
1 (read)
10
Binary output: Packed format
2 (write)

07, 08 (limited qty)
3 (select)
12
Binary Command: Control relay output block
4 (operate)
(CROB)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op, no ack)
17, 28 (index)
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
30
Analog Input: Any Variation
30
Analog Input: 32 ~ bit with flag
1 (read)
30
1 (read)
30
Analog Input: 32 ~ bit without flag
1 (read)
30
1 (read)
30
Analog Input: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt with flag
1 (read)
32
Analog Input Event: Any Variation
1 (read)
10-24
17, 28 (index)

07,08 (limited qty)

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Group/Variation
REQUEST
Description
No.
Function code
32
Analog Input Event: 32 ~ bit without time
1 (read)
32
1 (read)
32
34
Analog Input Event: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt

without time
Analog Input Deadband: Any Variation
1 (read)
1 (read)
1 (read)
34
Analog Input Deadband: 16 ~ bit

2 (write)
1 (read)
34

2 (write)
1 (read)
34
Analog Input Deadband: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt

2 (write)
40
Analog Output Status: Any Variation
1 (read)
40
Analog Output Status: 32 ~ bit with flag
1 (read)
40
1 (read)
40
Analog Output Status: single ~ prec flt ~ pt with

flag
1 (read)
Qualifier code
07,08 (limited qty)
07,08 (limited qty)
07,08 (limited qty)
17,28 (index)
17,28 (index)
17,28 (index)
3 (select)
41
4 (operate)
Analog Output: 32 ~ bit
17,28 (index)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. Op, no ack)
17,28 (index)
3 (select)
41
4 (operate)
Analog Output: 16 ~ bit
17,28 (index)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. Op, no ack)
17,28 (index)
3 (select)
41
Analog Output: Single ~ prec ft ~ pt
4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. Op, no ack)
17,28 (index)
17,28 (index)
10-25
Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Group/Variation
Description
No.
50
50
51
51
60
REQUEST
Function code
Time and Data: Absolute time

Time and Data: Absolute time at last recorded
time
1 (read)
07 (limited qty = 1)
2 (write)
2 (write)
Time and Data CTO: Absolute time,

synchronized
unsynchronized
1 (read)
Class Objects: Class 0 data
22 (assign class)

1 (read)
60
Qualifier code
07,08 (limited qty)
20 (enable unsol.)
21 (disable unsol.)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
60
07,08 (limited qty)
20 (enable unsol.)
21 (disable unsol.)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
60
Class Objects : Class 3 data
07,08 (limited qty)
20 (enable unsol.)
21 (disable unsol.)
22 (assign class)
Response: Master shall parse\Outstation may issue

Function code: decimalism
Qualifier code: hexadecimal
Group/Variation
No.
RESPONSE
Description
Function code
Qualifier code
Binary Input: Any Variation
Binary Input: Packed format
129 (response)
Binary Input: With flags
129 (response)
Binary Input Event: Any Variation
Binary Input Event: Without time
10-26
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp)
17, 28 (index)

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Group/Variation
Description
No.
RESPONSE
Function code
Binary Input Event: With absolute time
Binary Input Event: With relative time
10
10
10
Binary output: Packed format
12
30
Analog Input: Any Variation
30
30
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp)
Qualifier code
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
129 (response)
echo of request
129 (response)
129 (response)
30
129 (response)
30
129 (response)
30
Analog Input: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt with flag
129 (response)
32
Analog Input Event: Any Variation
32
32
32
34
Analog Input Deadband: Any Variation
34
34
34
Analog Input Deadband: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt
40
Analog Output Status: Any Variation
40
40
40
41
41
41
Binary Command: Control relay output block

(CROB)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp)
Analog Input Event: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt without
129 (response)
time
130 (unsol. resp)
17,28 (index)
17,28 (index)
17,28 (index)
129 (response)
129 (response)
129 (response)
129 (response)
129 (response)
129 (response)
129 (response)
echo of request
129 (response)
echo of request
129 (response)
echo of request
Analog Output Status: single ~ prec flt ~ pt with

flag
Analog Output:
32 ~ bit
Analog Output:
16 ~ bit
Analog Output:
Single ~ prec ft ~ pt
10-27
Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Group/Variation
RESPONSE
Description
No.
50
50
51
51
60
60
60
60
Class Objects : Class 3 data
Function code
129 (response)
Time and Data: Absolute time
Qualifier code
Time and Data: Absolute time at last recorded

time
129 (response)
synchronized
130 (unsol. resp)
129 (response)
unsynchronized
130 (unsol. resp)
10.6.4.3 Communication Table Configuration

This relay now supports 4 Ethernet clients and 2 serial port clients. Each client can be set the DNP
related communication parameters respectively and be selected the user-defined communication
table. This relay supports a default communication table and 4 user-defined communication tables,
and the default communication table is fixed by the manufacturer and not permitted to configure by
the user.
The user can configure the user-defined communication table through the PCS-Explorer
configuration tool auxiliary software. The object groups Binary Input, Binary Output, Analog
Input and Analog Output can be configured according to the practical engineering demand.
10.6.4.4 Analog Input and Output Configuration
To the analog inputs, the attributes deadband and factor of each analog input can be configured
independently. To the analog outputs, only the attribute factor of each analog output needs to be
configured. If the integer mode is adopted for the data formats of analog values (to Analog Input,
Object Variation is 1, 2 and 3; to Analog Output, Object Variation is 1 and 2.), the analog
values will be multiplied by the factor respectively to ensure their accuracy. And if the float mode
is adopted for the data formats of analog values, the actual float analog values will be sent directly.
The judgment method of the analog input change is as below: Calculate the difference between
the current new value and the stored history value and make the difference value multiply by the
factor, then compare the result with the deadband value. If the result is greater than the
deadband value, then an event message of corresponding analog input change will be created.
In normal communication process, the master can online read or modify a deadband value by
reading or modifying the variation in Group34.
10-28

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
10.6.4.5 Binary Output Configuration

The remote control signals, logic links and external extended output commands can be configured
into the Binary Output group. The supported control functions are listed as below.
Information Point
Pulse On/Null
Pulse On/Close
Pulse On/Trip
Latch On/Null
Latch Off/Null
Remote Control
Not supported
Close
Trip
Close
Trip
Logic Link
Not supported
Set
Clear
Set
Clear
Extended Output
See following description
To an extended output command, if a selected command is controlled remotely, this command

point will output a high ~ level pulse. The pulse width can be decided by the On ~ time in the
related Binary Command which is from the DNP3.0 master. If the On ~ time is set as 0, the
default pulse width is 500ms.
10.6.4.6 Unsolicited Messages
This relay does not transmit the unsolicited messages if the related logic setting is set as 0. If the
unsolicited messages want to be transmitted, the related logic setting should be set as 1 or the
DNP3.0 master will transmit Enable Unsolicited command to this relay through Function Code
20 (Enable Unsolicited Messages). If the Binary Input state changes or the difference value of
the Analog Input is greater than the deadband value, this device will transmit unsolicited
messages. If the DNP3.0 master needs not to receive the unsolicited messages, it should forbid
this relay to transmit the unsolicited messages by setting the related logic setting as 0 or through
the Function Code 21 (Disable Unsolicited Messages).
10.6.4.7 Class Configuration
If the DNP3.0 master calls the Class0 data, this relay will transmit all actual values of the Analog
Input, Binary Input and Analog Output. The classes of the Analog Input and Binary Input
can be defined by modifying relevant settings. In communication process, the DNP3.0 master can
online modify the class of an Analog Input or a Binary Input through Function Code 22 (Assign
Class).
10-29
Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
10-30

Date: 2015-03-07
11 Installation
11 Installation
Table of Contents
11 Installation ...................................................................................... 11-a
11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Safety Information ........................................................................................ 11-1
11.3 Check the Shipment ..................................................................................... 11-2
11.4 Material and Tools Required ........................................................................ 11-2
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions .................................................. 11-2
11.6 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................ 11-3
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring ................................................................ 11-5
11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines .......................................................................................................11-5
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding ............................................................................................................11-5
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device ...................................................................................11-6
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation ..............................................................................11-6
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring.........................................................................................................11-7
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables ...............................................................................................11-7
List of Figures
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of 4U equipment ........................................................................... 11-3
Figure 11.6-2 Dimensions of 8U equipment ........................................................................... 11-4
Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot .................. 11-4
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system ................................................................................ 11-6
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this device ......................................................................... 11-6
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination ........................................................................... 11-7
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables ................................... 11-8
11-a
Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation
11-b

Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation
11.1 Overview
The device must be shipped, stored and installed with the greatest care.
Choose the place of installation such that the communication interface and the controls on the
front of the device are easily accessible.
Air must circulate freely around the device. Observe all the requirements regarding place of
installation and ambient conditions given in this instruction manual.
Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the device and terminated correctly and
pay special attention to grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines contained in this
section.
11.2 Safety Information

Modules and units may only be replaced by correspondingly trained personnel. Always observe
the basic precautions to avoid damage due to electrostatic discharge when handling the device.
In certain cases, the settings have to be configured according to the demands of the engineering
configuration after replacement. It is therefore assumed that the personnel who replace modules
and units are familiar with the use of the operator program on the service PC.
WARNING!
ONLY insert or withdraw a module while the device power supply is switched off. To this
end, disconnect the power supply cable that connects with the PWR module.
NOTICE!
Industry packs and ribbon cables may ONLY be replaced on a workbench for electronic
equipment. Electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when not in
the unit's housing.
NOTICE!
Jumper links may ONLY be changed on a workbench for electronic equipment.
Electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when not in the unit's
housing.
NOTICE!
A module can ONLY be inserted in the slot designated in the chapter 6. Components
can be damaged or destroyed by inserting module in a wrong slot.
The basic precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge are as follows:
Should boards have to be removed from this device installed in a grounded cubicle in an HV
switchgear installation, please discharge yourself by touching station ground (the cubicle)
beforehand.
11-1
Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation
Only hold electronic boards at the edges, taking care not to touch the components.
Only works on the board which has been removed from the cubicle on a workbench designed
for electronic equipment and wear a grounded wristband. Do not wear a grounded wristband,
however, while inserting or withdrawing units.
Always store and ship the electronic boards in their original packing. Place electronic parts in
electrostatic screened packing materials.
11.3 Check the Shipment

Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the nearest NR
Company or agent, should departures from the delivery note, the shipping papers or the order be
found.
Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. When there is evidence of transport damage,
lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier and notify the nearest NR Company or
agent.
If the equipment is not going to be installed immediately, store all the parts in their original packing
in a clean dry place at a moderate temperature. The humidity at a maximum temperature and the
permissible storage temperature range in dry air are listed in Chapter Technical Data.
11.4 Material and Tools Required

The necessary mounting kits will be provided, including screws, pincers and assembly
instructions.
A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles to the floor using the plugs
provided (if this device is mounted in cubicles).
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions

NOTICE!
Excessively high temperature can appreciably reduce the operating life of this device.
The place of installation should permit easy access especially to front of the device, i.e. to the
human machine interface of the equipment.
There should also be free access at the rear of the equipment for additions and replacement of
electronic boards.
Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or destroyed by inadmissible ambient
conditions, such as:
1.
The location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution (dust, aggressive substances).
2.
Surge voltages of high amplitude and short rise time, extreme changes of temperature, high
levels of humidity, severe vibration and strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided as
far as possible.
11-2

Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation
3.
Air must not be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment.
The equipment can in principle be mounted in any attitude, but it is normally mounted vertically
(visibility of markings).
11.6 Mechanical Installation

NOTICE!
It is necessary to leave enough space top and bottom of the cut-out in the cubicle for
heat emission of this device.
The relay is made of one 8U height or one 8U height add one 4U height 19" chassis with 8
connectors on its rear panel.
Following figure shows the dimensions of 4U relay for reference in mounting.
(290)
Front
177
101.6
482.6
465
Side
4650.2
+0.4
451 -0
+0.4
Cut-Out
179 -0
101.60.1
4-6.8
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of 4U equipment
Following figure shows the dimensions of 8U relay for reference in mounting.
11-3
Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation
(290)
Side
354.8
Front
101.6
76.2
101.6
482.6
465
4650.2
+0.4
451-0
+0.4
356.8 -0
Cut-Out
101.60.1
76.20.1 101.60.1
8-6.8
Figure 11.6-2 Dimensions of 8U equipment
Following figure shows the installation way of a module being plugged into a corresponding slot.
Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot
11-4

Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation
In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles on the foundations that have
been prepared. Take care while doing so not to jam or otherwise damage any of the cables that
have already been installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations.
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring

11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines
NOTICE!
All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.
Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over voltages on control signal cables.
There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce
spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them.
All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus.
On the other hand, electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of
other apparatus.
In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed
with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding

The cubicle must be designed and fitted out such that the impedance for RF interference of the
ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal is as low as possible.
Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected
surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF
interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non-corroding.
NOTICE!
If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts of it
forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission of
interference by the devices installed and also reduce their immunity to induced
interference.
Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be
effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (see Figure 11.7-1).
The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically
conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as large as possible.
NOTICE!
For metallic connections please observe the voltage difference of both materials
according to the electrochemical code.
The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a
grounding strip (braided copper).
11-5
Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation
Door or hinged
equipment frame
Cubicle ground
rail close to floor
Braided
copper strip
Station
ground
Conducting
connection
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device

There is a ground terminal on the rear panel, and the ground braided copper strip can be
connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as possible. The main thing
is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops from unit to unit are not allowed.
There are some ground terminals on some connectors of this device, and the sign is GND. All the
ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this device. Therefore, the ground terminal on the
rear panel (see Figure 11.7-2) is the only ground terminal of this device.
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this device
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation

High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of
skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence.
The grounding strips must therefore be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round copper
conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large.
Proper terminations must be fitted to both ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole for bolting
them firmly to the items to be connected.
11-6

Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation
The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and
non-corroding.
The following figure shows the ground strip and termination.
Press/pinch fit
cable terminal
Braided
copper strip
Terminal bolt
Contact surface
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring

There are several types of cables that are used in the connection of this device: braided copper
cable, serial communication cable etc. Recommendation of each cable:
Grounding: braided copper cable, 2.5mm 2 ~ 6.0mm 2
Power supply, binary inputs & outputs: brained copper cable, 1.0mm 2 ~ 2.5mm 2
AC voltage inputs: brained copper cable, 1.0mm 2 ~ 2.5mm 2
AC current inputs: brained copper cable, 1.5mm 2 ~ 4.0mm 2
Serial communication: 4-core shielded braided cable
Ethernet communication: 4-pair shielded twisted category 5E cable
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables

DANGER!
NEVER allow a open current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
device while the primary system is live. Open CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage that cause death.
A female connector is used for connecting the wires with it, and then a female connector plugs into
a corresponding male connector that is in the front of one board. See Chapter Hardware for
further details about the pin defines of these connectors.
The following figure shows the glancing demo about the wiring for the electrical cables.
11-7
Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation
Tighten
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
01
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables
11-8

Date: 2013-12-13
12 Commissioning
12 Commissioning
Table of Contents
12 Commissioning ............................................................................. 12-a
12.1 General ......................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 Safety Instructions ...................................................................................... 12-1
12.3 Commission Tools ...................................................................................... 12-2
12.4 Setting Familiarization ................................................................................ 12-2
12.5 Product Checks ........................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized........................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.2 With the Relay Energized ................................................................................................ 12-5
12.5.3 Protection Function Checks............................................................................................. 12-7
12.5.4 Print Fault Report........................................................................................................... 12-34
12.5.5 On-load Checks ............................................................................................................. 12-34
12.5.6 Final Checks .................................................................................................................. 12-34
List of Figures
Figure 12.5-1 Testing used configuration ............................................................................... 12-8
Figure 12.5-2 External fault test ............................................................................................. 12-12
Figure 12.5-3 Internal fault test (BB1) ................................................................................... 12-13
Figure 12.5-4 Steady-state percentage restraint characteristic test .................................. 12-14
Figure 12.5-5 Voltage controlled element test ...................................................................... 12-15
Figure 12.5-6 BC dead zone protection test (BC breaker is closed).................................. 12-17
Figure 12.5-7 BC dead zone protection test (BC breaker is open) .................................... 12-18
Figure 12.5-8 BC SOTF protection test ................................................................................. 12-21
Figure 12.5-9 BC OC protection test ..................................................................................... 12-22
Figure 12.5-10 BC pole disagreement protection test ......................................................... 12-24
Figure 12.5-11 BC BFP test ..................................................................................................... 12-26
Figure 12.5-12 BFP test ........................................................................................................... 12-30
12-a
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
12-b

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
12.1 General
This relay is fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection
functions in software. The relay employs a high degree of self-checking and in the unlikely event of
a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test does not need to be as
extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
To commission numerical relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning
correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this manual for
completion as required.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the
safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipments rating label.
12.2 Safety Instructions

DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits MUST be short-circuited BEFORE the current
leads to the device are disconnected.
WARNING!
ONLY qualified personnel should work on or in the vicinity of this device. This personnel
MUST be familiar with all safety regulations and service procedures described in this
manual. During operating of electrical device, certain part of the device is under high
voltage. Severe personal injury and significant device damage could result from
improper behavior.
Particular attention must be drawn to the following:
The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor
before any other electrical connection is made.
Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply
voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.
Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply
voltage (storage capacitors!)
The limit values stated in the Chapter Technical Data must not be exceeded at all, not even
during testing and commissioning.
When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other
measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip circuits and
12-1
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
maybe also close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are
disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.
12.3 Commission Tools

Minimum equipment required:
Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.
Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0~440V and 0~250V
respectively.
Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).
Phase angle meter.
Phase rotation meter.
NOTICE!
Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.
Optional equipment:
An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500V (for
insulation resistance test when required).
A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be
tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).
EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being tested).
PCS-915 serials dedicated protection tester HELP-9000.
12.4 Setting Familiarization

When commissioning this device for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become
familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. A detailed description of the menu
structure of this relay is contained in Chapter Operation Theory and Chapter Settings.
With the front cover in place all keys are accessible. All menu cells can be read. The LED
indicators and alarms can be reset. Protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault
and event records cleared. However, menu cells will require the appropriate password to be
entered before changes can be made.
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as
PCS-9700 SAS software), the menu can be viewed one page at a time to display a full column of
data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on
disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user
manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become
12-2

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
familiar with its operation.
12.5 Product Checks

These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has
not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity
measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is
advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow them restoration later. This could be done
by extracting the settings from the relay itself via printer or manually creating a setting record.
12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized

This relay is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored. Commissioning tests can
be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function
tests are carried out according to users correlative regulations.
The following tests are necessary to ensure the normal operation of the equipment before it is first
put into service.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware
defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by
self-monitoring when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces test
Binary input circuits and output circuits test
AC input circuits test
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of
the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
Measuring elements test
Timers test
Metering and recording test
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other
external equipment.
On load test.
Phase sequence check and polarity check.
12-3
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
12.5.1.1 Visual Inspection

After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected, contact the vendor. The following items listed is
necessary.
Protection panel
Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to
see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
The rated information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct
for the particular installation.
Panel wiring
Check the conducting wire which is used in the panel to assure that their cross section
meeting the requirement.
Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.
Label
Check all the isolator binary inputs, terminal blocks, indicators, switches and push buttons to
make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.
Equipment plug-in modules

Check each plug-in module of the equipments on the panel to make sure that they are well
installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.
Earthing cable
Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel
steel sheet.
Switch, keypad, isolator binary inputs and push button

Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary inputs and push buttons
work normally and smoothly.
12.5.1.2 Insulation Test (if required)

Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be
done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation
tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include:
Voltage transformer circuits
Current transformer circuits
DC power supply
12-4

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
Optic-isolated control inputs
Output contacts
Communication ports
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100M at 500V.

Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this relay, and do the Insulation resistance test for each
circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.
12.5.1.3 External Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram and scheme diagram.
Ensure as far as practical that phasing/phase rotation appears to be as expected.
Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the
customers normal practice.
12.5.1.4 Auxiliary Power Supply
The relay only can be operated under the auxiliary power supply depending on the relays nominal
power supply rating.
The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Chapter Technical Data,
before energizing the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it within the operating range.
Other requirements to the auxiliary power supply are specified in Chapter Technical Data. See
this section for further details about the parameters of the power supply.
WARNING!
Energize this device ONLY if the power supply is within the specified operating range in
the Chapter Technical Data.
12.5.2 With the Relay Energized

The following groups of checks verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly
and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these
checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the
associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.1 Front Panel LCD Display
Connect the relay to DC power supply correctly and turn the relay on. Check program version and
forming time displayed in command menu to ensure that are corresponding to what ordered.
12-5
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
12.5.2.2 Date and Time

If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time
should be set manually.
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item Clock.
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted on CPU board, the time and date will
be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct
and not need to set again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30s. After being
re-energized, the time and date should be correct.
12.5.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On power up, the green LED HEALTHY should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that
the relay is healthy.
The relay has latched signal relays which remember the state of the trip when the relay was last
energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate when the
auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before
proceeding with further testing. If the LED successfully reset, the LED goes out. There is no testing
required for that LED because it is known to be operational.
12.5.2.4 Testing the HEALTHY and ALARM LEDs
Apply the rated DC power supply and check that the HEALTHY LED is lighting in green. We
need to emphasize that the HEALTHY LED is always lighting in operation course except that the
equipment find serious errors in it.
Produce one of the abnormal conditions listed in Chapter Supervision, the MISC ALM LED will
light in yellow. When abnormal condition reset, the MISC ALM LED extinguishes.
12.5.2.5 Testing the TRIP LED
The xx TRIP LED can be tested by initiating a manual circuit breaker trip from the relay. However
the xx TRIP LED will operate during the setting checks. Therefore no further testing of the TRIP
LED is required at this stage.
12.5.2.6 Testing the AC Current Inputs
This test verified that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated current to each current transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the protection is 2.5% or 0.02In. However, an additional allowance
must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
NOTICE!
The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental
12-6

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
operation of the associated circuit breaker.

12.5.2.7 Testing the AC Voltage Inputs
This test verified that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the relay is 2.5% or 0.1V. However an additional allowance must be
made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
NOTICE!
The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental
operation of the associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.8 Testing the Binary Inputs
This test checks that all the binary inputs on the equipment are functioning correctly.
The binary inputs should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams for
terminal numbers.
Ensure that the voltage applied on the binary input must be within the operating range.
The status of each binary input can be viewed using relay menu. Sign 1 denotes an energized
input and sign 0 denotes a de-energized input.
Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this protective device, and do the insulation resistance test
for each circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.
12.5.3 Protection Function Checks

12.5.3.1 Hardware Configuration
The following is an configuration just for testing requirement, the protection function test in this
section is conducted based on this configuration. For a specific project, the actual configuration is
provided by a project configuration manual or configured by users, the concrete pin definition
maybe different.
Assumption: All the binary input modules are NR1506AS module. For different type of binary input
module, the pin definitions are different.
12-7
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
Ia
1603
Ib
1605
Ic
1602
Ian
1604
Ibn
1606
Icn
Bus Coupler
AC Current of BC1
1601
BC1.62PD.BI_PD
0502
BC1.BI_52b
0409
BC1.BI_52a
Pole disagreement binary input of circuit breaker
0410
BC1.BI_BFI
0602
BC1.BI_ChkBFI
0603
Fdr01.BI_BFI
0604
Fdr01.BI_52b
0411
Normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker

Breaker failure initiating binary input
Normally open auxiliary contact of circuit breaker
Ia
1609
Ib
1611
AC Current of feeder 01
1608
Ic
Feeder 01
1607
Fdr01.BI_52a
0412
50BF.BI_RlsVCE
0605
Fdr01.BI_Cls
0516
Manually closing binary input
Fdr01.62PD.BI_PD
0503
Pole disagreement binary input of circuit breaker
Binary input of releasing VCE of BFP
Ian
1610
Ibn
1612
Icn
Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1
0702
Fdr01.BI_89a_BB2
0703
Normally open auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector

Ia
1615
Ib
1617
Ic
1614
Ian
1616
Ibn
1618
Icn
2807
Ua
AC Voltage of BB1
Ub
2811
Uc
2808
Uan
2810
Ubn
2812
Ucn
2813
Ua
2815
Ub
2817
Uc
Busbar No.1
2809
Normally open auxiliary contact of BB2 disconnector

Feeder 02
AC Current of feeder 02
1613
Fdr02.BI_89a_BB1
0704
Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2
0705
0402
87B.BI_En
0403
BBP enabling binary input
BI_En_IntLink1
0404
Inter-connected operation mode binary input
50SOTF.BI_En
0405
BC/BS SOTF protection enabling binary input
50/51.BI_En
0406
62PD.BI_En
0407
Fdr.50DZ.BI_En
0408
Overcurrent protection enabling binary input

Pole disagreement overcurrent protection
enabling binary input
Feeder dead zone fault protection enabling
binary input
BO_Trp1_BC1
2814
Uan
2816
Ubn
2818
Ucn
Busbar No.2
AC Voltage of BB2
BFP enabling binary input
50BF.BI_En
1101
Tripping contact of BC1 (first)
1102
1105
Tripping contact of feeder 01 (first)
BO_Trp1_Fdr01
1106
BO_Trp1_Fdr02
1109
Tripping contact of feeder 02 (first)
1110
Figure 12.5-1 Testing used configuration
In order to convenient to test, the power supply of opto-coupler should be connected as follows.
12-8

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
Opto+
0501
Opto+
0601
Opto+
0701
Opto+
0422
Opto-
0522
Opto-
0622
Opto-
0722
Opto-
PCS-915
DC
0401
12.5.3.2 Function Configurations and Related Settings

MOT Configuration
Application
A: Single BB, 1 Breakers

B: Single BB with one BS (single CT)
C: Single BB with one BS (dual CTs)
D: Single BB with two BS (single CT)
E: Single BB with two BS (dual CTs)
BB: busbar;
F: Double BB with one BC (single CT)
BC: bus coupler;
G: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs)
BS: bus section.
H: Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT)

I: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT)
J: Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT)
K: Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs)
The option is reserved for other busbar
L: Other
arrangement, further modifications for

the program are required
Software Version
A: Standard 1
Please refer to Table 3.3-2 for concrete
B: Standard 2
contents
Language
C: English + Chinese
F: English + French
R: English + Russian
S: English + Spanish
Protocol
A: IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS & GOOSE)

B: IEC 60870-5-103 (Ethernet, Serial port)
C: DNP 3.0 (Ethernet)
Number of Terminals
A: 1~16 (use 8U device)

B: 17~25 (use 8U+4U device)
A 4U extended chassis is added
12-9
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
X: Not required
A: Dual-position BI for disconnector
B: Dual-position BI for circuit breaker
C: Dual-position BI for disconnector and circuit breaker
A: With voltage concerned functions

B: Without voltage concerned functions
Communication Ports&Time Synchronization Mode
A: 3 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x RS-485 + RS-485
(IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer)
C
The MON plug in module is NR1101F
module
B: 4 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) +

RS-232 (Printer)
The MON plug in module is NR1102M

module
C: 2 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x 100Base-FX

(ST-Connector) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer)
The MON plug in module is NR1102N

module
AC Input
A: CT 1A
B: CT 5A
Power Supply for Device
A: 110~250Vdc
Basic information configuration
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable

configured according to each bay
Logic setting of a protective element is configured according to each
bay
Disable
Enable
Protective function configuration

Enable
Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker

failure protection
IDMT overcurrent characteristic
Enable
Disable
Label settings
Name_Bus1
BB1
Name_Bus2
BB2
Name_Bay1
BC1
Name_Bay2
Fdr01
Name_Bay3
Fdr02
System settings
U2n_PP
110V
Bay1.I1n
1200A
Bay2.I1n
1200A
12-10

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
Bay3.I1n
1200A
I2n_Ref
1A
12.5.3.3 Busbar Differential Protection

All relevant settings can be configured temporarily as following for easier test. (Just for reference)
BBP Settings
87B.I_Pkp
1.8A
87B.VCE.U_Set
30V
87B.VCE.3U0_Set
8V
87B.VCE.U2_Set
3V
87B.En
87B.VCE.En
Function Links
87B.Link
Link_IntLink1
Change the following settings to avoid effects on steady state differential protection element.
[I_AlmH_CTS]=5A
[I_AlmL_CTS]=5A
All relevant binary inputs can be connected as follows.
[87B.BI_En]
0404
[BI_En_IntLink1]
0401
Opto+
0702
[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]
0704
[Fdr02.BI_89a_BB1]
0705
[Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2]
0701
Opto+
PCS-915
Test source
0402
Energize the binary input [87B.BI_En]

Please pay attention that the polarity mark of CT of bus coupler is the same to that of feeder
connected to bus 1, but opposite to that connected to bus 2.
Simulate an external fault
1.
Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and set
feeder 02 connecting to BB2 through energizing binary input [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2].
2.
Connect CT of feeder 01 and BC CT with the reverse polarity in series and then connect CT of
12-11
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
feeder 02 with reverse polarity in series (Refer to Figure 12.5-2). Inject a current (For example
ITEST1 100 ) to make steady-state percentage restraint differential element operate.
3.
VCE for BBP will operate. Steady-state percentage restraint differential element does not
operate.
ITEST1
A
1601
Test source
1603
Bus coupler
1605
1602
1604
1606
1607
1609
1612
CURRENT CIRCUIT
1610
PCS-915
1608
Feeder 01
1611
1613
1615
1614
Feeder 02
1617
1616
1618
Figure 12.5-2 External fault test
Because check zone differential current is equal to zero, the protection judges that as an external
fault.
Simulate an internal fault (BB1)
1.
Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 though energizing binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and set
feeder 02 connecting to BB2 though energizing binary input [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2]
2.
Connect CT of feeder 01, BC CT, and CT of feeder 02 with the same polarity in series (Refer
to Figure 12.5-3).
3.
0
Inject a current I TEST1 1.00 A to make steady-state percentage restraint differential
element operate.
12-12

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
4.
VCE for BBP will operate. Steady-state percentage restraint differential element operates with
BBP TRIP LED and MISC TRIP LED turned on simultaneously.
ITEST1
1601
Test source
1603
Bus coupler
1605
1602
1604
1606
1607
PCS-915
1608
Feeder 01
1611
1610
1612
CURRENT CIRCUIT
1609
1613
1615
1614
Feeder 02
1617
1616
1618
Figure 12.5-3 Internal fault test (BB1)
Inter-connected operation mode
1.
Energize the binary input [BI_En_IntLink1]
2.
Set the virtual binary input [Link_IntLink1]=1
3.
Repeat the internal fault test mentioned above. Steady-state percentage restraint differential
element will operate to trip feeder 01 and feeder 02, BBP TRIP LED and MISC TRIP LED
will turn on simultaneously. After the test is finished, set the virtual binary input
[Link_IntLink1]=0 and de-energized the binary input [BI_En_IntLink1].
Check the setting [87B.I_Pkp]=1.8A
1.
Set both feeder 01 and feeder 02 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input
[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB1].
2.
Connect CT of feeder 01 and CT of feeder 02 with the same polarity in series (Refer to Figure
12.5-4)
12-13
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
3.
Inject a current ( ITEST1 [87B.I_Pkp] 0.95/2 0.85500 A), the steady state percentage
restraint differential element will not operate.
4.
Inject a current (For example ITEST1 [87B.I_Pkp] 1.05/2 0.94500 A), the steady-state
percentage restraint differential element will operate to trip BB1
5.
Inject a current ( ITEST1 [87B.I_Pkp] 2/2 1.800 A), the steady-state percentage restraint
differential element will operate to trip BB1. By the timer, users can get the time of BBP
operating to trip BB1.
ITEST1
Test Source
1607
1609
1611
Feeder 01
1608
1610
1614
Feeder 02
1617
PCS-915
1613
1615
CURRENT CIRCUIT
1612
1616
1618
Start
1105
Stop
1106
BO_Trp1_Fdr01
PCS-915
Timer
Figure 12.5-4 Steady-state percentage restraint characteristic test
Voltage control element
12-14

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
ITEST1
1607
1611
Feeder 01
1608
1610
CURRENT CIRCUIT
1609
1612
Test Source
UTEST3
2807
2809
2811
2808
2810
VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
UTEST2
Busbar No.1
PCS-915
UTEST1
2812
Figure 12.5-5 Voltage controlled element test
Check Phase Voltage
1.
Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 by energizing the binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1].
2.
Inject a current (2A) to CT of feeder 01 and three-phase positive-sequence voltage

(U1=U2=U3=31.5V) to VT of BB1. Steady-state percentage differential element will not
operate.
3.
Keep injected current (2A) and change injected value of three-phase positive-sequence
voltage (U1=U2=U3=28.5V). Steady-state percentage differential element will operate.
Check Residual Voltage
Change the setting [87B.VCE.U2_Set] as 10V

1.
2.
Inject a current (2A) to CT of feeder 01 and three-phase positive-sequence voltage (U1=63.5V,

U2=63.5V, U3=55.9V) to VT of BB1. Steady-state percentage differential element will not
operate.
3.
voltage (U1=63.5V, U2=63.5V, U3=55.1V). Steady-state percentage differential element will
operate.
4.
Change the setting [87B.VCE.U2_Set] as 3V.
Check Negative-sequence Voltage
12-15
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
Change the setting [87B.VCE.3U0_Set] as 20V

1.
2.
Inject a current (2A) to CT of feeder 01 and three-phase positive-sequence rated voltage to

VT of BB1. Steady-state percentage differential element will not operate.
3.
not operate.
4.
operate.
5.
Change the setting [87B.VCE.3U0_Set] as 8V.
12.5.3.4 BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection

50DZ Settings
BC.50DZ.I_Set
0.1A
BC.50DZ.t_Op
0.15s
[BC1.BI_52b]
0401
Opto+
0702
[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]
0705
[Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2]
0701
Opto+
PCS-915
Test source
0409
BC breaker is closed
1.
Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 through energizing the binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and
set feeder 02 connecting to BB2 through energizing binary input [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2].
2.
Connect CT of feeder 01 and BC CT the opposite polarity in series, and then connect CT of
feeder 02 with reverse polarity in series. Then connect binary output contact of tripping BB2
and three phases normally closed auxiliary contacts of BC breaker [BC1.BI_52b] to test
source. Connect binary output contact of tripping BB1 and binary output contact of tripping
feeder 02 to time meter (Refer to Figure 12.5-6).
12-16

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
I TEST1
1601
1603
Bus coupler
1605
1602
1604
1606
1607
Feeder 01
1608
Test source
PCS-915
1611
1610
CURRENT CIRCUIT
1609
1612
1613
1617
1614
Feeder 02
1615
1616
1618
1109
BO_Trp1_Fdr02
1105
BO_Trp1_Fdr01
PCS-915
1110
1106
Start
Timer
Stop
Figure 12.5-6 BC dead zone protection test (BC breaker is closed)
3.
Please set two stages of test source and change from stage 1 to stage 2 to simulate to trip BC
breaker and to make dead zone fault protection operate. (For example STAGE 1:
I TEST1 20 0 A and de-energize three phases normally closed auxiliary contacts of BC

breaker; STAGE 2: I TEST1 20 A and energize three phases normally closed auxiliary
0
contacts of BC breaker)
4.
Use binary output contact of tripping BB2 (feeder 02 will be tripped) as a triggering signal to
change the state from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2.
5.
Start test from STAGE 1. BBP should operate to trip BC breaker and BB2. The binary output
contact of tripping BB2 (feeder 02 will be tripped) will close and control the test source to
change the state from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, and then BBP will trip BB1 with a time delay for
dead zone fault protection operates to make BC current be excluded from discriminating zone
differential current. BBP TRIP LED and MISC TRIP LED will be turned on.
BC breaker is open
12-17
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
1.
Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1].
2.
Energize normally closed auxiliary contacts of BC breaker [BC1.BI_52b].
3.
Connect CT of feeder 01 and BC CT with the opposite polarity in series, and connect VTs of
BB1 and BB2. (Refer to Figure 12.5-7)
ITEST1
1601
1603
Bus coupler
1605
1602
1604
1606
1609
1610
PCS-915
1608
Feeder 01
1611
1612
V
UTEST1
2809
2811
BB1 Voltage
2807
CURRENT AND VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
1607
Test source
2808
2815
2817
BB2 Voltage
2813
2814
Figure 12.5-7 BC dead zone protection test (BC breaker is open)
4.
Please set two stages of test source and change from stage 1 to stage 2 to make dead zone
protection operate. (For example STAGE 1: ITEST1 000 A , UTEST1 4000 V ; STAGE 2:
ITEST1 200 A , UTEST1 000 V ).

5.
Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BBP should operate to trip BC breaker and BB1 with
BBP TRIP LED and MISC TRIP LED turned on.
12.5.3.5 Feeder Dead Zone Fault Protection

12-18

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
50DZ Settings
Fdr.50DZ.I_Set
0.1A
Fdr.50DZ.t_Op
0.02s
Bay2.50DZ.En
Function Links
50DZ.Link
[50DZ.BI_En]
0411
[Fdr01.BI_52b]
0401
Opto+
0516
[Fdr01.BI_Cls]
0501
Opto+
0702
[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]
0701
Opto+
PCS-915
Test source
0408
Energize the binary input [50DZ.BI_En]
Feeder DZP
1.
2.
Energize three-phase normally closed auxiliary contacts of breaker of feeder 01

[Fdr01.BI_52b].
3.
Inject a current (0.2 IN) to three phases of this feeder.
ITEST2
ITEST3
1609
1611
1610
Feeder 01
1608
CURRENT CIRCUIT
1607
PCS-915
Test Source
ITEST1
1612
4.
DZP will operate and send transfer trip signal to the remote end with a time delay of 20ms.
Manual Closing Contact
1.
12-19
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
2.
Energize three-phase normally closed auxiliary contacts of breaker of feeder 01

[Fdr01.BI_52b].
3.
Energize closing binary input [Fdr01.BI_Cls] for 50ms and inject a current (0.2IN) to any phase
of this feeder for 500ms. DZP will not operate.
4.
If the binary input [Fdr01.BI_Cls] is energized for longer than 10 seconds, an alarm
[Fdr01.Alm_Cls] will be issued and feeder DZP will still be blocked.
Disable Feeder DZP
1.
2.
At the beginning, inject three-phase current to any feeder, which is slightly greater than 0.04 IN
(for example, 0.05 IN) and energize three-phase normally closed auxiliary contacts of breaker
of feeder 01 [Fdr01.BI_52b].
3.
After an alarm [Fdr01.Alm_52b] is issued. When feeder current increases to over 0.2 IN,
feeder DZP will not operate.
12.5.3.6 BC/BS SOTF Protection

SOTF Settings
50SOTF.I_Set
1A
Bay1.50SOTF.En
Function Links
50SOTF.Link
[50SOTF.BI_En]
0409
[BC1.BI_52b]
0401
Opto+
PCS-915
Test source
0405
Check BC SOTF protection

1.
Energize the binary input [50SOTF.BI_En].
2.
Connect the BC CT, and connect binary input [BC1.BI_52b]. (Refer to Figure 12.5-8)
12-20

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
ITEST1
1601
1604
CURRENT CIRCUIT
1602
PCS-915
1605
BUS COUPLER
1603
Test source
1606
Start
1101
Stop
BO_Trp1_BC1
1102
PCS-915
Timer
Figure 12.5-8 BC SOTF protection test
3.
Injecting a current ITEST1 0.950 0 A , BC SOTF protection should not operate.

If injecting a current ITEST1 1.050 0 A , BC SOTF protection should operate to trip BC
breaker with MISC TRIP LED turned on.
If injecting a current I TEST1 20 A , BC SOTF protection should operate to trip BC
0
breaker with MISC TRIP LED turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of SOTF
protection operating to trip BC.
BC SOTF protection is only enabled for 300ms if any of the following conditions satisfied, users
must inject the current within 300ms if any of the following conditions satisfied, or BC SOTF
protection should not operate.
The position status of BC/BS breaker changes from open to closed.
BC current changes from being smaller than 0.04IN to being larger than 0.04IN.
Both connected busbars are in service (when busbar phase voltage is greater than 0.3U N or
current of any connected bay is larger than 0.04IN, the busbar is thought as be in service).
12.5.3.7 Overcurrent Protection
Takes definite-time overcurrent protection of BC as an example.
OC Settings
Bay1.50/51P.I_Set
1A
Bay1.50/51G.3I0_Set
1A
Bay1.50/51P.t_Op
0.5s
Bay1.50/51G.t_Op
0.5s
Bay1.50/51P.Opt_Curve
12-21
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
Bay1.50/51G.Opt_Curve
Bay1.50/51P.En
Bay1.50/51G.En
Function Link
50/51.Link
0406
[50/51.BI_En]
0401
Opto+
PCS-915
Test source
Energize binary input [50/51.BI_En].

Connect the BC CT and binary output contact of tripping BC to time meter. (For example Figure
12.5-9)
ITEST1
Test source
1601
1602
1604
Bus coupler
PCS-915
1605
CURRENT CIRCUIT
1603
1606
Start
Timer
BO_Trp1_BC1
1102
PCS-915
1101
Stop
Figure 12.5-9 BC OC protection test
Check the setting [Bay1.50/51P.I_Set]=1A
Change the setting [Bay1.50/51G.3I0_Set]=4A

1.
Inject a current ITEST1 0.950 0 A and BC phase overcurrent protection will not operate.
2.
Inject a current ITEST1 1.050 0 A and BC phase overcurrent protection operates to trip BC
breaker with MISC TRIP LED turned on.
3.
Inject a current I TEST1 20 A and BC phase overcurrent protection operates to trip BC

0
breaker with MISC TRIP LED turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of phase
12-22

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
overcurrent protection operating to trip BC.

4.
After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay1.50/51G.3I0_Set] =1A
Check the setting [Bay1.50/51G.3I0_Set]=1A
Change the setting [Bay1.50/51P.I_Set]=4A

1.
Inject a current ITEST1 0.950 0 A and BC zero-sequence overcurrent protection should not
operate.
2.
Inject a current ITEST1 1.050 0 A and BC zero-sequence overcurrent protection should

operate to trip BC breaker with MISC TRIP LED turned on.
3.
Inject a current I TEST1 20 A and BC zero-sequence overcurrent protection operates to

0
trip BC breaker with MISC TRIP LED turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of
zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating to trip BC.
4.
After finishing the test, change the setting i.e. [Bay1.50/51P.I_Set] =1A
12.5.3.8 Pole Disagreement Protection

Takes pole disagreement protection of BC as an example.
PD Settings
Bay1.62PD.3I0_Set
1A
Bay1.62PD.I2_Set
0.6A
Bay1.62PD.t_Op
1s
Bay1.62PD.En
Function Links
62PD.Link
[62PD.BI_En]
0401
Opto+
0502
[BC1.62PD.BI_PD]
0501
Opto+
PCS-915
Test source
0407
Energize the binary inputs [62PD.BI_En] and [BC1.62PD.BI_PD].
Check settings [Bay1.62PD.3I0_Set]=1A
Change the setting [Bay1.62PD.I2_Set]=5A

12-23
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
1.
Connect BC CT to test source. Connect binary output contact of BC protection operating to a

time meter (Refer to Figure 12.5-10).
ITEST1
A
1601
1603
1604
Bus coupler
1602
PCS-915
1605
CURRENT CIRCUIT
Test source
1606
Start
Timer
BO_Trp1_BC1
1102
PCS-915
1101
Stop
Figure 12.5-10 BC pole disagreement protection test
2.
Inject a current ITEST1 0.950 0 A with persisting time longer than the time delay
[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. PD protection of BC does not operate.
3.
Inject a current ITEST1 1.050 0 A with persisting time longer than the time delay
[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. PD protection of BC operate to trip BC breaker, and MISC TRIP LED
should be turned on.
4.
Inject a current
I TEST1 20 0 A with persisting time longer than the time delay
[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. PD protection of BC operate to trip BC breaker, and MISC TRIP LED

should be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of PD protection operating to trip BC.
5.
After finishing the test, please change the setting [Bay1.62PD.I2_Set]=1A.
Check the setting i.e. [Bay1.62PD.I2_Set]=1A
Change the setting [Bay1.62PD.3I0_Set]=5A

1.
Connect BC CT.
2.
Inject a current I TEST1 0.6 * 3 * 0.95 1.710 A with persisting time longer than the
0
time delay [Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. BC PD protection does not operate.

3.
Inject a current I TEST1 1.89 0 A and persisting time is longer than the time delay
0
[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. BC PD protection should operate to trip BC breaker, and MISC TRIP

LED should be turned on.
12-24

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
4.
Inject a current
I TEST1 3.60 0 A
and persisting time is longer than the time delay
[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. BC PD protection should operate to trip BC breaker, and MISC TRIP

LED should be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of PD protection operating to
trip BC.
5.
After finishing the test, please change the setting [Bay1.62PD.3I0_Set]=0.6A.
6.
After finishing all test of BC PD protection, de-energize the two binary inputs [62PD.BI_En]
and [BC1.62PD.BI_PD].
12.5.3.9 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection

BC BFP Settings
BC.50BF.I_Set
1A
BC.50BF.t_TrpBB
0.5s
OC Settings
50/51.En_Init50BF
PD Settings
62PD.En_Init50BF
[87B.BI_En]
0406
[50/51.BI_En]
0407
[62PD.BI_En]
0401
Opto+
0502
[BC1.62PD.BI_PD]
0501
Opto+
0602
[BC1.BI_BFI]
0603
[BC1.BI_ChkBFI]
0601
Opto+
0702
[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]
0705
[Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2]
0701
Opto+
PCS-915
Test source
0403
The connection is shown as follows.
12-25
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
ITEST1
A
1601
1603
1604
Bus coupler
1602
PCS-915
1605
CURRENT CIRCUIT
Test source
1606
Start
Timer
BO_Trp1_Fdr02
1110
PCS-915
1109
Stop
Figure 12.5-11 BC BFP test
Check external binary input initiating BC BFP
1.
Connect BC CT to test source
2.
STAGE 1: ITEST1 00 0 A and binary inputs [BC1.BI_BFI] and [BC1.BI_ChkBFI] are

energized; STAGE 2:
I TEST1 0.950 0 A
and binary inputs
[BC1.BI_BFI] and
[BC1.BI_ChkBFI] are energized; Persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s.
Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, BC BFP will not operate.
3.

energized; STAGE
2:
I TEST1 1.05 0 0 A
and binary inputs
[BC1.BI_BFI] and
[BC1.BI_ChkBFI] are energized; Persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s.
Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, BC BFP operates to trip BB1 and BB2. BFP TRIP LED
and MISC TRIP LED should be turned on.
4.

energized; STAGE 2: ITEST1 20 0 A and binary inputs [BC1.BI_BFI] and [BC1.BI_ChkBFI]
are energized; Persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE
1 to STAGE 2. BC BFP will operate to trip BB1 and BB2. BFP TRIP LED and MISC TRIP
LED should be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of BC BFP operating to trip
BB2.
Check BBP initiating BC BFP
Change the setting [87B.En]=1, [87B.Link]=1

Energize the function binary input [87B.BI_En]
12-26

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
1.
2.
Simulating an internal fault on BB1 (please refer to Section 12.5.3.3).
3.
Inject a current ITEST1 20 0 A and the persisting time is longer than the setting
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB].
4.
BBP protection should operate to trip BB1 and BC breaker. BBP TRIP LED and MISC
TRIP LED will be turned on first. Then after a delay [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB], BC BFP will operate
to trip BB1 and BB2, and BFP TRIP LED will be turned on.
5.
After finishing the test, change the setting [87B.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[87B.BI_En].
Check OC protection initiating BC BFP
Change the two settings [Bay1.50/51P.En]=1, [50/51.Link]=1

Energize the binary input [50/51.BI_En]
1.
2.
Simulating an internal fault to make OC protection of BC operates (please refer to Section

12.5.3.7).
3.
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB].
4.
OC protection of BC will operate to trip BC breaker. MISC TRIP LED will be turned on first.
Then after a delay [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB], BC BFP will operate to trip BB1 and BB2, and BFP
TRIP LED will be turned on.
5.
After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay1.50/51.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[50/51.BI_En].
Check PD protection initiating BC BFP
Change the two settings [Bay1.62PD.En]=1, [62PD.Link]=1

Energize the binary input [62PD.BI_En]
1.
2.
Simulating an internal fault to make PD protection of BC operates (please refer to Section

12.5.3.8).
3.
12-27
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB].
4.
PD protection of BC will operate to trip BC breaker. MISC TRIP LED will be turned on first.
Then after a delay [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB], BC BFP will operate to trip BB1 and BB2, and BFP
TRIP LED will be turned on.
5.
After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay1.62PD.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[62PD.BI_En].
12.5.3.10 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection

Fdr BFP Settings
50BF.t_ReTrp
0.15s
50BF.t_TrpBC
0.25s
50BF.t_TrpBB
0.35s
50BF.VCE.U_Set
30V
50BF.VCE.3U0_Set
8V
50BF.VCE.U2_Set
3V
Bay2.50BF.I_Set
1.5A
Bay2.50BF.3I0_Set
1A
Bay2.50BF.I2_Set
1A
Bay2.50BF.En_3I0
Bay2.50BF.En_I2
50BF.En_Current_Ctrl
Bay2.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE
50BF.En
50BF.VCE.En
50BF.En_ReTrp
OC Settings
50/51.En_Init50BF
PD Settings
62PD.En_Init50BF
Function Links
50BF.Link
12-28

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
[50BF.BI_En]
0403
[87B.BI_En]
0406
[50/51.BI_En]
0407
[62PD.BI_En]
0401
Opto+
0503
[Fdr01.62PD.BI_PD]
0501
Opto+
0604
[Fdr01.BI_BFI]
0605
[50BF.BI_RlsVCE]
0601
Opto+
0702
[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]
0704
[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]
0701
Opto+
PCS-915
Test source
0402
Energize the binary input [50BF.BI_En]

Set feeder 01 and feeder 02 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary inputs
[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB1].
Connect the VT of BB1 and CT of feeder 01 to test source (Refer to Figure 12.5-12).
12-29
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
UTEST1
UTEST2
V
2807
2809
2811
2808
2810
2812
1607
1611
1608
Feeder 01
1609
Test source
PCS-915
ITEST1
1610
CURRENT AND VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
Busbar No.1
UTEST3
1612
Timer
Start
t2
1101
Stop
BO_Trp1_BC1
1102
Start
1105
Stop
BO_Trp1_Fdr01
1106
PCS-915
t1
Start
t3
1109
Stop
BO_Trp1_Fdr02
1110
Figure 12.5-12 BFP test
Check external binary input initiating BFP
1.
0
STAGE 1: ITEST1 00 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is de-energized; STAGE 2:
I TEST1 1.425 0 0 A
and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized. Persisting time of
STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, feeder BFP will
not operate.
2.
0
I TEST1 1.575 0 0 A
and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized. Persisting time of
STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, feeder BFP
operates to re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. BFP
TRIP LED and MISC TRIP will be turned on.
3.
0
12-30

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
I TEST1 30 0 A
and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized. Persisting time of STAGE 1
and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, feeder BFP operates to
re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. BFP TRIP LED and
MISC TRIP will be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of feeder BFP operating to
re-trip feeder 01 (t1), trip BC breaker (t2) and trip BB1 (t2).
Check BBP initiating BFP
Change the two settings [87B.En]=1, [87B.Link]=1

Energize the binary input [87B.BI_En]
1.
Simulating an internal fault on BB1.
2.
Inject a current I TEST1 30 A and the persisting time is set as 1s.
3.
BBP protection should operate to trip BB1 and BC breaker. BBP TRIP LED and MISC
TRIP LED will be turned on first. Then feeder BFP operates to re-trip feeder 01, trip BC
breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. BFP TRIP LED will be turned on.
4.
After finishing the test, change the setting [87B.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[87B.BI_En].
Check OC protection initiating BFP
Change the two settings [Bay2.50/51P.En]=1 and [50/51.Link]=1

Energize the binary input [50/51.BI_En]
1.
Simulating an internal fault to make OC protection of feeder 01 operates (please refer to

Section 12.5.3.7).
2.
3.
OC protection of feeder 01 will operate to trip feeder 01 breaker. Then feeder BFP operates to
re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. BFP TRIP LED will
be turned on.
4.
After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay2.50/51P.En]=0 and de-energize the binary
input [50/51.BI_En].
Check PD protection initiating BFP
Change the two settings [Bay2.62PD.En]=1 and [62PD.Link]=1

Energize the binary input [62PD.BI_En]
1.
Simulating an internal fault to make PD protection of feeder 01 operates (please refer to

Section 12.5.3.8).
12-31
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
2.
3.
PD protection of feeder 01 will operate to trip feeder 01 breaker. Then feeder BFP operates to
re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. BFP TRIP LED will
be turned on.
4.
After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay2.62PD.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[62PD.BI_En].
Check VCE of BFP
Check Phase Voltage
1.
Set
three
stages:
STAGE1:
UTEST1 63.50 0 V
UTEST2 63.5 120 0 V
UTEST3 63.5120 0 V , ITEST1 00 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is de-energized;

STAGE2: U TEST1 31.50 V , U TEST2 31.5 120 V , U TEST3 31.5 120 V ,
0
I TEST1 2.50 0 A
and
binary
input
[Fdr01.BI_BFI]
is
energized;

0
ITEST1 2.50 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized.

2.
The persisting time of STAGE 1, STAGE 2 and STAGE 3 are set as 1s.
3.
Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BFP will not operate. Sequentially test from STAGE 2 to
STAGE 3. BFP operates.
Check Residual Voltage
Change the setting [50BF.VCE.U2_Set] as 10V

1.
2.
Set
three
stages:
STAGE1:
UTEST1 63.50 0 V
UTEST2 63.5 120 0 V

0
I TEST1 2.50 0 A
U TEST1 63.50 0 V
and
,
binary
input
[Fdr01.BI_BFI]
U TEST2 63.5 120 0 V
is
energized;
STAGE3:
U TEST3 55.1120 0 V

12-32

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
3.
4.
5.
Change the setting [50BF.VCE.U2_Set] as 3V.
Check Negative-sequence Voltage
Change the setting [50BF.VCE.3U0_Set] as 20V.

1.
2.
Set
three
stages:
STAGE1:
UTEST1 63.50 0 V
UTEST2 63.5 120 0 V

0
I TEST1 2.50 0 A
and
U TEST1 63.50 0 V ,
binary
input
[Fdr01.BI_BFI]
U TEST2 63.5 120 0 V ,
is
energized;
STAGE3:
U TEST3 54.05 120 0 V ,

3.
4.
5.
Change the setting [50BF.VCE.3U0_Set] as 8V.
Check external binary input [50BF.BI_RlsVCE] releasing the VCE of BFP
Change the logic setting [Bay2.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE] as 1.

1.
De-energize the binary input [50BF.BI_RlsVCE].
2.
Set
two
stages:
STAGE1:
UTEST1 63.50 0 V
UTEST2 63.5 120 0 V

STAGE2: UTEST1 63.50 0 V , UTEST2 63.5 120 0 V , UTEST3 63.5120 0 V ,
ITESY1 2.50 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized.

3.
The persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s.
4.
Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BFP should not operate.
12-33
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
5.
Energize the binary input [50BF.BI_RlsVCE] and repeat the above test, BFP will operate.
12.5.4 Print Fault Report

In order to acquire the details of protection operation, it is convenient to print the fault report of
protection device. The printing work can be easily finished when operator presses the print button
on panel of protection device to energize binary input [BI_Print] or operate control menu. What
should be noticed is that only the latest fault report can be printed if operator presses the print
button. A complete fault report includes the content shown as follows.
1) Trip event report
2) Binary input when protection devices start
3) Self-check and the transition of binary input in the process of devices start
4) Fault wave forms compatible with COMTRADE
5) The setting value when the protection device trips
12.5.5 On-load Checks

The objectives of the on-load checks are:
Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.
Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).
Check the polarity of each current transformer.
However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the
tenderization of the plant being protected.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has
been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to
perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in
accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage
transformer wiring.
12.5.6 Final Checks

After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been
necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform the
wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with
the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that the protection has been restored to service.
If the protection is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit
breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the
test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.
12-34

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared
and LEDs has been reset before leaving the protection.
12-35
Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
12-36

Date: 2014-07-02
13 Maintenance
13 Maintenance
Table of Contents
13 Maintenance .................................................................................. 13-a
13.1 Appearance Check ...................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Failure Tracing and Repair ......................................................................... 13-1
13.3 Replace Failed Modules ............................................................................. 13-2
13.4 Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 13-3
13.5 Storage ......................................................................................................... 13-3
13-a
Date: 2013-12-13
13 Maintenance
13-b

Date: 2013-12-13
13 Maintenance
This device is designed to require no special maintenance. All measurement and signal
processing circuit are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output relays
are hermetically sealed.
Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output
relays, hardware and software defects are automatically detected and reported. The
self-monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective
rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are
not required.
Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. If a problem
is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides alarm messages.
13.1 Appearance Check

1.
The device case should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be sealed
well. No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be firmly
fixed in the case. Device terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front panel
with very good feeling can be operated flexibly.
2.
It is only allowed to plug or withdraw device board when the supply is reliably switched off.
Never allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the
primary system is live when withdrawing an AC module. Never try to insert or withdraw the
device board when it is unnecessary.
3.
Check weld spots on PCB whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All dual
inline components must be well plugged.
13.2 Failure Tracing and Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on
the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the Superv State screen on the LCD.
When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following:
1. Test circuit connections are correct
2.
Modules are securely inserted in position
3.
Correct DC power voltage is applied
4.
Correct AC inputs are applied
5.
Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual
13-1
Date: 2013-12-13
13 Maintenance
13.3 Replace Failed Modules

WARNING!
Module can ONLY be replaced while the device power supply is switched off.
ONLY appropriately trained and qualified personnel can perform the replacement by
strictly observing the precautions against electrostatic discharge.
WARNING!
Five seconds is NECESSARY for discharging the voltage. Hazardous voltage can be
present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply.
CAUTION!
Take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wristband and placing modules
on an earthed conductive mat when handling a module. Otherwise, electronic
components could be damaged.
CAUTION!
Check the device configuration after a replacement of module. Unintended operation of
device may occur.
If the failure is identified to be in the device module and the user has spare modules, the user can
recover the device by replacing the failed modules.
Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.
Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (AI, PWR, MON, BI, BO, etc.)
and hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the MON module replaced should
have the same software version. In addition, the AI and PWR module replaced should have the
same ratings.
The module name is indicated on the top front of the module. The software version is indicated in
LCD menu Information->Version Info.
1)
Replacing a module
Switch off the DC power supply
Disconnect the trip outputs
Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs
Unscrew the module connector
Unplug the connector from the target module.
13-2

Date: 2013-12-13
13 Maintenance
2)
Unscrew the module.
Pull out the module
Inset the replacement module in the reverser procedure.
After replacing the MON module, input the application-specific setting values again.
Replacing the Human Machine Interface Module (front panel)
Open the device front panel
Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.
Detach the HMI module from the device
Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.
13.4 Cleaning
Before cleaning the device, ensure that all AC/DC supplies, current transformer connections are
isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning. Use a smooth cloth to clean
the front panel. Do not use abrasive material or detergent chemicals.
13.5 Storage
The spare device or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard
60255-1 the storage temperature should be from -40C to +70C, but the temperature of from 0C
to +40C is recommended for long-term storage.
13-3
Date: 2013-12-13
13 Maintenance
13-4

Date: 2013-12-13

Table of Contents
14 Decommissioning and Disposal ................................................. 14-a
14.1 Decommissioning ....................................................................................... 14-1
14.2 Disposal ....................................................................................................... 14-1
14-a
Date: 2013-12-13
14-b

Date: 2013-12-13
14.1 Decommissioning
DANGER!
Switch OFF the circuit breaker for primary CTs and VTs BEFORE disconnecting the
cables of AI module.
WARNING!
Switch OFF the external miniature circuit breaker of device power supply BEFORE
disconnecting the power supply cable connected to the PWR module.
WARNING!
KEEP an adequate safety distance to live parts of the power substation.
1.
Switching off
To switch off this device, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.
2.
Disconnecting cables
Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.
3.
Dismantling
The device rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.
14.2 Disposal
NOTICE!
Strictly observe all local and national laws and regulations when disposing the device.
14-1
Date: 2013-12-13
14-2

Date: 2013-12-13

In the latest version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have been
modified.
Manual version and modification history records
Manual Version
Software
Source
New
Version
R1.00
R1.00
Date
2012-12-25
Description of change
Form the original manual.
Symbol corresponding relationship are added in the end of the
preface;
R1.00
R1.01
R1.00
2013-02-06
Operation characteristic of DPFC percentage restraint differential

element in Figure 3.3-3 is modified;
Logic Links State submenu are added for the menu Status;
MMS communication network deployment are modified.
R1.01
R1.02
R1.00
2013-07-04
Mechnical dimension of the devices are changed

Four restraint coefficients for steady-state busbar differential
R1.02
R1.03
R1.00
2013-09-25
protection are added;

Three
logic
settings
[En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS],
[En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] and [87B.En_CTS_Blk] are added.

Section 3.3 are added and Section 3.4 are modified;
Dead zone fault protection settings are added;
R1.03
R2.00
R1.00
2013-12-13
Many description of several protective functions are modified;

One device setting [En_Volt_BB] is added;
Many communication settings are added.
All the contents related to digital substation are modified;
R2.00
R2.10
R1.00
2014-07-02
Some contents of Chapter 3 are modified;

Almost all the figures in Chapter 9 are changed.
R2.10
R2.11
R1.00
2014-09-20
The basic information configuration item Inverted-logic for

enabled binary inputs is deleted
Phase-segregated CT circuit failure alarm signals are added;
R2.11
R2.12
R1.10
2015-03-07
Disconnector position configuration settings are added;

DNP3.0 protocol related configuration and communication
settings are added.
R2.12
R2.13
R1.10
2015-07-13
The MON module NR1101D is replaced by NR1101F.
15-1
Date: 2015-07-13
15-2

Date: 2015-07-13

PCS-915IC - X - Centralized - Busbar - Protection - Instruction Manual - EN - Overseas General - X - R2.13 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PCS-915IC - X - Centralized - Busbar - Protection - Instruction Manual - EN - Overseas General - X - R2.13 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Centralized Busbar Relay

NR Electric Co., Ltd.

1.2 Health and Safety

Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

1.3 Instructions and Warnings

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

Copyright 2015 NR. All rights reserved.

Headquarters: 69, Suyuan Avenue, Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China

Manufactory: 18, Xinfeng Road, Jiangning, Nanjing 211111, China

Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nrec.com

PN: ZL_PCS-915IC_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

5 Measurement and Recording

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

14 Decommissioning and Disposal

15 Manual Version History

Typographic and Graphical Conventions

Binary signal via opto-coupler

Input signal from comparator with setting

Input signal of logic setting for function enabling

Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

Input of other signal

Time (optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristic)

Timer (delay pickup, settable)

Timer (delay dropoff, settable)

Timer (delay pickup, delay dropoff, settable)

Timer [delay pickup (10ms), delay dropoff (2ms), non-settable]

Timer (inverse-time characteristic)

---xxx is the symbol

Symbol Corresponding Relationship

Ia, Ib, Ic, I0

IL1, IL2, IL3, IN

L1N, L2N, L3N

VL1, VL2, VL3

Uab, Ubc, Uca

VL12, VL23, VL31

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

Busbar differential protection (87B)

Steady-state percentage restraint differential protection

DPFC percentage restraint differential protection

Bus coupler protection

Breaker failure protection (50BF)

Dead zone fault protection (50DZ)

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

Pole disagreement protection (62PD)

Switch-onto-fault protection (50SOTF)

Overcurrent protection (50/51)

Breaker failure protection (50BF)

Dead zone fault protection (50DZ)

Pole disagreement protection (62PD)

Overcurrent protection (50/51)

Dynamic busbar replica

Disconnector position alarm

Protection and Control

Parallel calculation of double DSP system

Independent fault detector element

Accurate measurement which can prevent any undesired trip

High sensitive percentage restraint differential protection